3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description(02)(PDF)-En

3900 Series Base Station

Hardware Description Issue

02

Date

2015-12-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2015. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

Overview This document describes cabinets supported by 3900 series base stations, and the components (including their configurations, functions, and specifications) and cables used in the cabinets. This document serves as a reference for 3900 series base station planning and deployment. The exteriors of components or cables in this document are for reference only. The actual exteriors may be different. NOTE

Unless otherwise specified, LTE refers to either LTE FDD or LTE TDD, and eNodeB refers to either an LTE FDD eNodeB or an LTE TDD eNodeB in this document. The "L" and "T" in RAT acronyms refer to LTE FDD and LTE TDD, respectively. For details about the LampSite solution, see DBS3900 LampSite Hardware Description.

Product Version The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name

Solution Version

Product Version

BTS3900

l SRAN8.0 and later versions l GBSS15.0 and later versions l RAN15.0 and later versions l eRAN6.0 and later versions

V100R008C00 and later versions

BTS3900A BTS3900L BTS3900AL

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


ii


About This Document

Product Name

Solution Version

DBS3900

l SRAN8.0 and later versions

Product Version

l GBSS15.0 and later versions l RAN15.0 and later versions l eRAN6.0 and later versions l eRAN TDD 7.0 and later versions l SRAN8.0 and later versions

BTS3900C

l RAN15.0 and later versions

Cabinets, components, and RATs described in this document are supported by V100R008C00 and later versions, except the special cases listed in the following table. Item

Solution Version

Product Version

l Quadruple-Mode Base Station

Since SRAN8.1/GBSS15.1/ RAN15.1/eRAN6.1

V100R008C01

Since SRAN9.0/GBSS16/ RAN16.0/eRAN7.0/eRAN TDD 7.0

V100R009C00

Since SRAN10.0/ GBSS17.0/RAN17.0/ eRAN8.0

V100R010C00

Since SRAN11.0/ GBSS18.0/RAN18.0/ eRAN11.0/eRAN TDD 11.0

V100R011C00

l IBC10 l BBU3910 l Second-Level USU l APM30H(Ver.E) l TMC11H(Ver.E) l RFC(Ver.E) l IBBS200D(Ver.E) l IBBS200T(Ver.E) l BBU3910A l OPM50M l IBBS20D l IBBS300D(Ver.A) l IBBS300T(Ver.A) l USU3910 l IBBS20L l eBAT l WIUA

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


iii


About This Document

Item

Solution Version

Product Version

l IBBS20L-E

Since SRAN11.1/ GBSS18.1/RAN18.1/ eRAN11.1/eRAN TDD 11.1

V100R011C10

l OPM30M

Intended Audience This document is intended for: l

System engineers

l

Base station installation personnel

l

Site maintenance personnel

Organization 1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description This section describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description of each version. 2 3900 Series Base Stations 3900 series base stations include BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, DBS3900, and BTS3900C. 3 Cabinet Description This chapter describes information about cabinets supported by 3900 series base stations, including components and engineering specifications of the cabinets. 4 Component Description Components in a cabinet can be classified into BBU, RF modules, power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, temperature control devices, environment monitoring devices, and other devices, in terms of function. 5 Cable Description For cable description in 3900 series base stations, see 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


iv


About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal injury. Calls attention to important information, best practices and tips. NOTE is used to address information not related to personal injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v


About This Document

Convention

Description

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl +Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


vi


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

About This Document

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.


vii


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description................................................ 1 2 3900 Series Base Stations............................................................................................................11 2.1 BTS3900....................................................................................................................................................................... 13 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900............................................................................................................ 13 2.1.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900........................................................................................................16 2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900................................................. 38 2.1.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900.............................................................................................................. 54 2.1.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900........................................................................................................... 63 2.2 BTS3900L.................................................................................................................................................................... 64 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations............................................................................... 65 2.2.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900L..................................................................................................... 67 2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L...............................................79 2.2.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L............................................................................................................95 2.2.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900L.......................................................................................................102 2.3 BTS3900A.................................................................................................................................................................. 103 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A.......................................................................................................................103 2.3.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900A................................................................................................... 111 2.3.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A............................................ 174 2.3.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900A......................................................................................................... 196 2.3.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900A...................................................................................................... 215 2.4 BTS3900AL................................................................................................................................................................216 2.4.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900AL.................................................................................................................... 216 2.4.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900AL................................................................................................ 218 2.4.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A)............................. 237 2.4.4 Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A)........................................................................................ 240 2.4.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900AL....................................................................................................243 2.5 DBS3900.................................................................................................................................................................... 243 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900........................................................................................................243 2.5.2 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 (Using a BBU3900 or BBU3910)............................................................ 252 2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A.................................................................................... 304 2.5.4 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910.......................................................................................................................................................................... 307 Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


viii


Contents

2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A.............................................................................................. 342 2.5.6 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910....................................... 346 2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A..........................................................376 2.5.8 Cable Connections in a DBS3900........................................................................................................................... 378 2.6 BTS3900C.................................................................................................................................................................. 380 2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C....................................................................................................................... 380 2.6.2 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C............................................ 381 2.6.3 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900C..........................................................................................................383 2.6.4 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900C...................................................................................................... 387

3 Cabinet Description.................................................................................................................. 389 3.1 BTS3900 Cabinet Description....................................................................................................................................391 3.1.1 Exteriors of BTS3900s............................................................................................................................................ 391 3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets..........................................................................................................................392 3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications......................................................................................................................398 3.2 BTS3900L Cabinet Description................................................................................................................................. 404 3.2.1 Exteriors of BTS3900Ls.......................................................................................................................................... 404 3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets....................................................................................................................... 406 3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 413 3.3 RFC Description......................................................................................................................................................... 418 3.3.1 Exterior of the RFC................................................................................................................................................. 418 3.3.2 Components in RFCs...............................................................................................................................................419 3.3.3 RFC Engineering Specifications............................................................................................................................. 426 3.4 APM30H Description................................................................................................................................................. 428 3.4.1 Exteriors of APM30Hs............................................................................................................................................ 428 3.4.2 Components in APM30Hs.......................................................................................................................................429 3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications..................................................................................................................... 442 3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet..............................................................446 3.5 TMC11H Description................................................................................................................................................. 450 3.5.1 Exteriors of TMC11Hs............................................................................................................................................ 450 3.5.2 Components in TMC11Hs....................................................................................................................................... 451 3.5.3 TMC11H Engineering Specifications......................................................................................................................463 3.5.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a TMC11H............................................................................................466 3.6 IBBS200D Description...............................................................................................................................................466 3.6.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds.......................................................................................................................................... 466 3.6.2 Components in IBBS200Ds.....................................................................................................................................467 3.6.3 IBBS200D Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 475 3.7 IBBS200T Description............................................................................................................................................... 477 3.7.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts...........................................................................................................................................477 3.7.2 Components in IBBS200Ts..................................................................................................................................... 478 3.7.3 IBBS200T Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................484 3.8 IBBS300D Description...............................................................................................................................................486 3.8.1 Exterior of an IBBS300D........................................................................................................................................ 486 Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


ix


Contents

3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Ds.....................................................................................................................................487 3.8.3 IBBS300D Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 490 3.9 IBBS300T Description............................................................................................................................................... 492 3.9.1 Exterior of an IBBS300T.........................................................................................................................................492 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts..................................................................................................................................... 493 3.9.3 IBBS300T Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................496 3.10 IBBS20D Description...............................................................................................................................................497 3.10.1 Exterior of an IBBS20D........................................................................................................................................ 497 3.10.2 Components in an IBBS20D................................................................................................................................. 498 3.10.3 IBBS20D Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................... 500 3.11 IBBS20L Description............................................................................................................................................... 502 3.11.1 Exterior of an IBBS20L.........................................................................................................................................502 3.11.2 Ports and Indicators on an IBBS20L..................................................................................................................... 503 3.11.3 IBBS20L Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................504 3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual......................................................................................................................................... 506 3.12.1 Exterior.................................................................................................................................................................. 506 3.12.2 Ports and Indicators............................................................................................................................................... 506 3.12.3 Engineering Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 508 3.13 IBBS700D Description.............................................................................................................................................509 3.13.1 Exterior of an IBBS700D...................................................................................................................................... 510 3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700D............................................................................................................................... 511 3.13.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D........................................................................................................ 513 3.14 IBBS700T Description............................................................................................................................................. 515 3.14.1 Exterior of an IBBS700T.......................................................................................................................................515 3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T................................................................................................................................517 3.14.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700T.........................................................................................................520 3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description............................................................................................................................ 522 3.15.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet.....................................................................................................................522 3.15.2 Components of BTS3900AL Cabinets.................................................................................................................. 523 3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications.............................................................................................................. 529 3.15.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a BTS3900AL Cabinet....................................................................... 534 3.16 BTS3900C Cabinet Description............................................................................................................................... 534 3.16.1 Exterior of the BTS3900C Cabinet....................................................................................................................... 534 3.16.2 Components of BTS3900C Cabinets.....................................................................................................................535 3.16.3 BTS3900C Engineering Specifications................................................................................................................. 545 3.17 OMB Description..................................................................................................................................................... 551 3.17.1 Exterior of the OMB..............................................................................................................................................551 3.17.2 Components in OMBs........................................................................................................................................... 551 3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications.......................................................................................................................... 556 3.18 IMB03 Description................................................................................................................................................... 557 3.18.1 Exterior of the IMB03........................................................................................................................................... 558 3.18.2 Components in IMB03 Cabinets........................................................................................................................... 558 Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


x


Contents

3.18.3 IMB03 Engineering Specifications....................................................................................................................... 560 3.19 IFS06 Description.....................................................................................................................................................561 3.19.1 Exterior of the IFS06............................................................................................................................................. 561 3.19.2 Components of an IFS06....................................................................................................................................... 561 3.19.3 IFS06 Engineering Specifications......................................................................................................................... 562 3.20 INS12 Description.................................................................................................................................................... 562 3.20.1 Exterior of the INS12............................................................................................................................................ 563 3.20.2 Components of an INS12...................................................................................................................................... 563 3.20.3 INS12 Engineering Specifications.........................................................................................................................564 3.21 IMS06 Description................................................................................................................................................... 564 3.21.1 Exterior of an IMS06............................................................................................................................................. 565 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06......................................................................................................................................565 3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06...............................................................................................................568 3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06............................................................................................ 569 3.22 IBC10 Description.................................................................................................................................................... 570 3.22.1 Exterior of the IBC10............................................................................................................................................ 570 3.22.2 Components in IBC10s..........................................................................................................................................571 3.22.3 Engineering Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 573

4 Component Description........................................................................................................... 576 4.1 BBU............................................................................................................................................................................ 577 4.2 RF Modules................................................................................................................................................................ 577 4.3 Power Equipment....................................................................................................................................................... 577 4.3.1 EPS 01..................................................................................................................................................................... 577 4.3.2 EPS30-4815AF........................................................................................................................................................ 588 4.3.3 EPS4890.................................................................................................................................................................. 590 4.3.4 EPS24S48100DC.....................................................................................................................................................592 4.3.5 EPU03A...................................................................................................................................................................594 4.3.6 EPU05A...................................................................................................................................................................606 4.3.7 ETP48150-A3.......................................................................................................................................................... 631 4.3.8 ETP48400................................................................................................................................................................ 633 4.3.9 ETP48100-A1.......................................................................................................................................................... 634 4.3.10 ETP48100-B1........................................................................................................................................................ 636 4.3.11 PMU.......................................................................................................................................................................639 4.3.12 PSU........................................................................................................................................................................ 650 4.3.13 DCDU.................................................................................................................................................................... 659 4.3.14 PDU....................................................................................................................................................................... 701 4.3.15 Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet........................................................................................................ 710 4.3.16 OPM15M, OPM50M, or OPM30M...................................................................................................................... 722 4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC.................................................................................................................................. 722 4.3.18 DC Junction Box in a BTS3900AL....................................................................................................................... 723 4.3.19 DC Junction Box in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T................................................................................................ 724 4.3.20 AC Junction Box................................................................................................................................................... 725 Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


xi


Contents

4.3.21 Storage Battery...................................................................................................................................................... 727 4.4 Monitoring Devices.................................................................................................................................................... 729 4.4.1 CMUA..................................................................................................................................................................... 729 4.4.2 CMUE......................................................................................................................................................................734 4.4.3 CMUEA...................................................................................................................................................................737 4.4.4 CMUG..................................................................................................................................................................... 741 4.4.5 CMUH..................................................................................................................................................................... 743 4.4.6 HEUA...................................................................................................................................................................... 746 4.4.7 HEUB...................................................................................................................................................................... 748 4.4.8 CMUF...................................................................................................................................................................... 750 4.4.9 CCU......................................................................................................................................................................... 753 4.4.10 CCU01D-03...........................................................................................................................................................756 4.4.11 CCUB.....................................................................................................................................................................760 4.4.12 WIUA.................................................................................................................................................................... 764 4.4.13 eBat........................................................................................................................................................................ 768 4.5 Surge Protection Devices............................................................................................................................................770 4.5.1 SLPU....................................................................................................................................................................... 770 4.5.2 Surge Protection Subrack for Transmission Signals................................................................................................771 4.5.3 UELP....................................................................................................................................................................... 773 4.5.4 UFLP....................................................................................................................................................................... 774 4.5.5 USLP....................................................................................................................................................................... 776 4.5.6 GPS Surge Protector................................................................................................................................................ 778 4.5.7 SPD.......................................................................................................................................................................... 778 4.5.8 AC Surge Protection Box........................................................................................................................................ 779 4.6 Temperature Control Devices..................................................................................................................................... 780 4.6.1 Fan Assembly.......................................................................................................................................................... 781 4.6.2 (Optional) AC Heater.............................................................................................................................................. 806 4.6.3 (Optional) Heating Film.......................................................................................................................................... 807 4.6.4 TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS300T........................................................................................................................... 809 4.6.5 TEC Cooler in an IBBS700T...................................................................................................................................810 4.6.6 HAU01A-01.............................................................................................................................................................811 4.6.7 Outer Air Circulation Assembly..............................................................................................................................813 4.6.8 Inner Air Circulation Fan........................................................................................................................................ 814 4.6.9 Outer Air Circulation Fan........................................................................................................................................815 4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame............................................................................................................................................. 816 4.6.11 Heat Exchanger Core............................................................................................................................................. 820 4.7 Environment Monitoring Device................................................................................................................................821 4.7.1 Door Status Sensor.................................................................................................................................................. 821 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor................................................................................................................................................. 824 4.7.3 (Optional) EMU.......................................................................................................................................................831 4.7.4 (Optional) EMUA/EMUB....................................................................................................................................... 832 4.8 Other Devices............................................................................................................................................................. 832 Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


xii


Contents

4.8.1 (Optional) GATM.................................................................................................................................................... 832 4.8.2 (Optional) WGRU................................................................................................................................................... 833 4.8.3 ELU......................................................................................................................................................................... 836 4.8.4 (Optional) SOU........................................................................................................................................................841 4.8.5 (Optional) DDF........................................................................................................................................................843 4.8.6 (Optional) Filler Module......................................................................................................................................... 844 4.8.7 ODM06D................................................................................................................................................................. 845 4.8.8 OFD06..................................................................................................................................................................... 846

5 Cable Description...................................................................................................................... 849

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


xiii

1 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description


1

Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description

This section describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description of each version.

02 (2015-12-30) This is the second commercial release. Compared with the Issue 01 (2015-07-30), this issue includes the following new topics: l

3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual

l

3.12.1 Exterior

l

3.12.2 Ports and Indicators

l

3.12.3 Engineering Specifications

Compared with the Issue 01 (2015-07-30), this issue includes the following changes. Topic

Change Description

4.3.16 OPM15M, OPM50M, or OPM30M

Added the OPM30M.

Compared with the Issue 01 (2015-07-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2015-07-30) This is the first commercial release. This document incorporates 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description of all SRAN versions and presents differential information among these versions. Versions corresponding to the original 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description are as follows: l

SRAN 8.0: V100R008C00

l

SRAN 8.1: V100R008C01

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


1



l

SRAN 9.0: V100R009C00

l

SRAN 10.0: V100R010C00

l

SRAN 10.1: V100R010C10

The information added before the combination of all versions is as follows: l

3.10 IBBS20D Description and its child topics

l

Power Distribution Box in an IBBS20D

l

4.4.4 CMUG

l

4.4.10 CCU01D-03

l

2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A and its child topics

l

2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A

l

2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A

l

3.8 IBBS300D Description and its child topics

l

3.9 IBBS300T Description and its child topics

l

4.3.19 DC Junction Box in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T

l

4.3.18 DC Junction Box in a BTS3900AL

l

4.8.7 ODM06D

l

4.8.8 OFD06

l

3.21 IMS06 Description

l

3.21.2 Components of an IMS06

l

3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06

l

When the BBU Is Installed in the IBC10

l

Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the IBC10

l

3.22 IBC10 Description and its child topics

l

Fan Assembly (FAU03D-02)

l

3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06

l

3.1.1 Exteriors of BTS3900s

l

3.2.1 Exteriors of BTS3900Ls

l

3.3.1 Exterior of the RFC

l

3.4.1 Exteriors of APM30Hs

l

3.5.1 Exteriors of TMC11Hs

l

3.6.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds

l

3.7.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts

l

3.13.1 Exterior of an IBBS700D

l

3.14.1 Exterior of an IBBS700T

l

3.15.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet

l

3.16.1 Exterior of the BTS3900C Cabinet

l

3.17.1 Exterior of the OMB

l

3.18.1 Exterior of the IMB03

l

3.19.1 Exterior of the IFS06

l

3.20.1 Exterior of the INS12

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


2



l

3.21.1 Exterior of an IMS06

l

3.22.1 Exterior of the IBC10

The modification made before the combination of all versions is as follows: Topic

Change Description

About This Document

l Modified the product version. l Added information about the product versions that support each cabinet, component, and RAT.

Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

Added descriptions of scenarios where the OMB (Ver.C) configured with an IBBS20D.

l 4.3.21 Storage Battery

Added information about these components used in an IBBS20D.

l 4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame l 4.7.1 Door Status Sensor l 4.8.3 ELU l 4.6.3 (Optional) Heating Film l Outdoor AC Installation Scenario l Outdoor DC Installation Scenario

The BBU3910A is modified to BBU3910A3.

l 2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A l 2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A l 2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A l 3.10.1 Exterior of an IBBS20D Outdoor AC Installation Scenario Outdoor DC Installation Scenario l 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A l BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs Only

Added the RRUs can be used in a DBS3900 (BBU3910A). Added descriptions of scenarios where the BTS3900A is configured with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T and descriptions of cabinets.

l BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l 2.4.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900AL l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs

Added descriptions of scenarios where the BTS3900AL is configured with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T and descriptions of cabinets.

l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs and RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


3



Topic

Change Description

l 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900

Added descriptions of scenarios where the DBS3900 is configured with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T and descriptions of cabinets.

l Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply l 4.3.20 AC Junction Box l 4.6.4 TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS300T

Added information about these components used in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.

l 4.6.6 HAU01A-01 l 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor l 4.3.21 Storage Battery l 4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame l 4.7.1 Door Status Sensor

Added information about these components used in an IBBS300D, IBBS300T, or IBBS20D.

l 4.8.3 ELU Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

Added descriptions of scenarios where the OMB (Ver.C) configured with an IBBS20D.

l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900

Added figures showing dimensions of cabinets.

l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations l 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A l 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 l 2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


4



Topic

Change Description

l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D)

l Deleted descriptions of 110 V AC and 120 V AC scenarios. l Deleted descriptions of the EPU05A-04.

l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l 3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets l 3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets l 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06 l 3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06 l 2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900

Updated the description of the AC BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet.

l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l 3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations

Added the description of AC scenarios for the BTS3900L (Ver.D).

l BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l 3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


5



Topic

Change Description

l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.B)

Added the description of configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC base station configured with RFUs and RRUs.

l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) l 2.4 BTS3900AL and its child topics l 3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description and its child topics l 3.4.2 Components in APM30Hs l 3.5.2 Components in TMC11Hs

Updated the figure for the BTS3900AL cabinet.

l Replaced filler panels in the APM30H (Ver.D) and TMC11H (Ver.D) with air baffles. l Added the descriptions that the APM30H and TMC11H are configured with EMUB modules.

The whole document

Changed the names of all EPC6 connectors into EPC4 connectors.

l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs

Optimized the description of cabinet applications supported by a BTS3900.

l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


6



Topic

Change Description


Added the descriptions that the BTS3900 (Ver.D) and BTS3900L (Ver.D) are configured with IMS06 cabinets.

l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations l BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) l 4.3.6 EPU05A l PMU 11A or PMU 11B l PSU (R4850G2) l DCDU-12B l 4.3.21 Storage Battery l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet l Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Deleted the description of scenarios in which the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is installed in a cabinet and the DCDU-12B is installed on a wall. Deleted the description of scenarios in which the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.


7



Topic

Change Description

l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.C)

Deleted the description of configurations of upper-level circuit breakers, power cables, and power distribution schemes when DCDU-12B modules are installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.

l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.C) l Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) l Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.C) 4.3.21 Storage Battery

Added precautions for using non-Huawei storage batteries.

Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.D)

Modified the description of configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables.

4.7.2 Temperature Sensor

Modified the exterior of the hole in rubber plug for a temperature sensor.

l 4.3.6 EPU05A

Added the description that components can be installed in the IMS06.

l PMU 11A or PMU 11B l PSU (R4850G2) l DCDU-12B l 4.3.21 Storage Battery l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet

Added the description of scenarios in which the DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B is installed in a cabinet and the DCDU-12B is installed on a wall.

l Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet

Added the description of scenarios in which DCDU-11B or DCDU-12B modules are installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.

Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply

Added descriptions of the scenario where the DBS3900 uses an IBC10.

DCDU-12C

Added descriptions of the IBC10.

4.8.3 ELU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


8



Topic

Change Description


Added figures showing dimensions of cabinets.

l 2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations l 2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A l 2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 l 2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C l Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply

Added the description of quadruple-mode base stations.

l Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply l Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900A (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900A (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs and RRUs About This Document

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Added descriptions of the LampSite solution.


9



Topic

Change Description

Includes the information of base stations, cabinets, and components in the cabinets in hardware descriptions for all 3900 series base stations in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.

The following hardware descriptions for 3900 series base stations are included: l BTS3900 (Ver.B) Hardware Description, BTS3900 (Ver.C) Hardware Description, and BTS3900 (Ver.D) Hardware Description l BTS3900L (Ver.B) Hardware Description, BTS3900L (Ver.C) Hardware Description, and BTS3900L (Ver.D) Hardware Description l BTS3900A (Ver.B) Hardware Description, BTS3900A (Ver.C) Hardware Description, and BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Hardware Description l BTS3900C (Ver.C) Hardware Description and BTS3900C WCDMA Hardware Description l DBS3900 Hardware Description

The information deleted before the combination of all versions is as follows: l

EPU03A-20

l

Components of an EPU03A-20

l

EPU03A-20 subrack

l

"Monitoring schemes" and "Customized alarm input principles for 3900 series base stations". For details about the monitoring schemes and customized alarm input principles, see chapter "Reference for Configuring the Monitoring Function" in Monitoring Management.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


10


2 3900 Series Base Stations

2

3900 Series Base Stations

About This Chapter 3900 series base stations include BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, DBS3900, and BTS3900C. 3900 series base stations are divided into the following categories: l

Indoor macro base stations: BTS3900 and BTS3900L

l

Outdoor macro base stations: BTS3900A and BTS3900AL

l

Outdoor compact mini base station: BTS3900C

l

Distributed base station: DBS3900

2.1 BTS3900 This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900. 2.2 BTS3900L This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900L. 2.3 BTS3900A This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900A. 2.4 BTS3900AL This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900AL. 2.5 DBS3900 This section describes cabinets/racks, cabinet/rack applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, and cable connections for a DBS3900. 2.6 BTS3900C Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


11



This section describes cabinets, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900C.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


12



2.1 BTS3900 This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900.

2.1.1 Cabinets/Subracks Supported by a BTS3900 A BTS3900 is an indoor macro base station. Different types of base stations can be formed by BTS3900 cabinets of different versions. Huawei has enhanced cabinet design and developed various types of cabinets used for the BTS3900. For BTS3900 (Ver.D), an IMS06 can also be used to meet requirements in various aspects such as power distribution, module configuration, and user space. The following table lists the specific cabinets and subracks used by the BTS3900. Table 2-1 Cabinets and subrack used by the BTS3900 base stations Base Station

Cabinet/ Subrack

Cabinet/Subrack Description

Components of a Cabinet/Subrack

BTS3900 (Ver.B)

BTS3900 (Ver.B)

The cabinet can be supplied with AC and DC power inputs. To support a corresponding type of power supply, the BTS3900 needs to use one of the following types of cabinets:

For details, see Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) Cabinet.

l BTS3900 AC cabinet l BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) l BTS3900 DC cabinet (+24 V) BTS3900 (Ver.C)

BTS3900 (Ver.C)


For details, see Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet.

l BTS3900 AC cabinet l BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V), shortened to BTS3900 DC cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


13



Base Station

Cabinet/ Subrack


Components of a Cabinet/Subrack

BTS3900 (Ver.D)

BTS3900 (Ver.D)


For details, see Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) Cabinet.

l BTS3900 AC cabinet l BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V), shortened to BTS3900 DC cabinet IMS06(1)

An IMS06 can be installed under a BTS3900 cabinet to provide space for storage batteries or transmission equipment.

For details, see 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06.

NOTE

(1) IMS06: Indoor Mini Subrack

The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D), and IMS06. NOTE

A BTS3900 (Ver.B) AC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) AC cabinet have the same exteriors as a BTS3900 (Ver.B) DC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) DC cabinet, respectively, whereas a BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet has a different exterior from a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet.

Figure 2-1 Cabinet/subrack exteriors

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


14



The following figure shows the dimensions of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D), and IMS06. NOTE

A BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet have the same dimensions as a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet. The following figure takes BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet as an example.

Figure 2-2 Cabinet/subrack dimensions

In addition to the preceding cabinets, some other cabinets can be restructured to attain the same capabilities as the BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. The following table lists the cabinets that are restructured from old versions. Table 2-2 Restructured cabinets

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Base Station

Cabinet

Cabinet Description

Components of a Cabinet

BTS3900 (Ver.D_A)

BTS3900 (Ver.D_A)

The BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinet is restructured from a BTS3900 (Ver.A) cabinet.

For details, see Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the Cabinetin BTS3900 Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

BTS3900 (Ver.D_B)

BTS3900 (Ver.D_B)

The BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinet is restructured from a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet.

For details, see Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the Cabinetin BTS3900 Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.


15



Base Station

Cabinet

Cabinet Description


BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)

BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)

The BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet is restructured from a BTS3012 cabinet.

For details, see Upgrade Scenarioin BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) Installation Guide.

2.1.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900 A BTS3900 supports different RF module configurations and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900 can be configured with RFUs, or RFUs and RRUs depending on different scenarios.

BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs A BTS3900 base station configured with RFUs but without RRUs is applicable to different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, and stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios of the BTS3900. Sce nar io

Nu mb er of BB Us

Application Mode

Maxim um Numbe r of RF Modul es

Applicable Cabinet

Illustration

Sin gle cabi net

1

Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triple-mode base stations

6 RFUs

l One BTS3900 DC cabinet (+24 V)

The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1, 2, and 3 in Figure 2-3.

l One BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) l One BTS3900 AC cabinet

Cab inet s inst alle d side by side

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

1


12 RFUs

l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (+24 V) l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V) l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets

2

Triple- and quadruple-mode base station

12 RFUs


The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1, 2, and 3 in Figure 2-4. The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 4, 5, and 6 in Figure 2-4.

16



Sce nar io

Nu mb er of BB Us

Application Mode

Maxim um Numbe r of RF Modul es

Applicable Cabinet

Illustration

Sta cke d cabi nets

1


12 RFUs

l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V)

The application scenario is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-5.

Triple-and quadruple-mode base station

12 RFUs

2

l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets(1) NOTE (1) It is recommended that two BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinets be stacked. If two BTS3900 AC cabinets are stacked, reduce the maximum working temperature of the cabinets to +50°C (+122°F). One of the following figures shows stacked BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V) as examples.


Figure 2-3 Single cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


17



Figure 2-4 Cabinets installed side by side

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


18



Figure 2-5 Stacked cabinets

BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs A BTS3900 base station configured with RFUs but without RRUs is applicable to different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, and stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios of the BTS3900.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Sce nar io

Nu mb er of BB Us

Application Mode

Maxim um Numbe r of RF Module s

Illustration

Applicable Cabinet

Sin gle cabi net

1

Single-, dual-, quadruple-, and triplemode base stations

6 RFUs

The application scenarios are shown by illustrations 1 and 2 in Figure 2-6.

l One BTS3900 DC cabinet


l One BTS3900 AC cabinet

19



Sce nar io

Nu mb er of BB Us

Application Mode


Illustration

Applicable Cabinet


1


12 RFUs


l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets

2

Triple- and quadruplemode base station

12 RFUs


Stac ked cabi nets

1


12 RFUs



12 RFUs

2


l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets

l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets l Two BTS3900 AC cabinets(1) NOTE (1) It is recommended that two BTS3900 DC cabinets be stacked. If two BTS3900 AC cabinets are stacked, reduce the maximum working temperature of the cabinets to +50°C (+122°F). One of the following figures shows stacked BTS3900 DC cabinets as examples.

NOTE

A BTS3900 cabinet is configured with one BBU by default and can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs whose power consumption cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to new site deployment or capacity expansion.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


20





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


21




BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the BTS3900 can have different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, stacked cabinets, or using the IMS06.

BTS3900 Configured with Only BTS3900 Cabinets The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 that uses various BTS3900 cabinets and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


22


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Sce nar io

Nu mb er of BB Us

Application Mode


Illustration

Applicable Cabinet

Sin gle cabi net

1


6 RFUs



2


6 RFUs



1


12 RFUs


2


12 RFUs


Stac ked cabi nets

1


12 RFUs


2


12 RFUs




l Two BTS3900 DC cabinets l 1 BTS3900 AC cabinet +1 BTS3900 DC cabinet

Two BTS3900 DC cabinets

23



NOTE

l A BTS3900 cabinet is configured with one BBU by default and can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs whose power consumption cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to new site deployment or capacity expansion. l When cabinets are installed side by side or stacked, it is recommended that BBU 1 and BBU 0 be installed in the same cabinet. l One BTS3900 AC cabinet consists of one BTS3900 DC cabinet and one IMS06.


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


24




Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


25




BTS3900 Configured with BTS3900 Cabinets and an IMS06 The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 that uses various BTS3900 cabinets and an IMS06 and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Scenario

Num ber of BBUs

Applic ation Mode

Maximum Number of RF Modules

Illustration

Description

1 BTS3900 AC cabinet+1 BTS3900 DC cabinet+1 IMS06

2

Triplemode base station

12 RFUs


The IMS06 is used to house 100 Ah storage batteries, which provides lowcapacity backup power.

1 BTS3900 AC cabinet+1 IMS06

2

Triplemode base station

6 RFUs


The IMS06 is used to house transmission equipment.


26



NOTICE The IMS06 cannot be stacked on the BTS3900 cabinet. Otherwise, the heat dissipation holes on the top of the BTS3900 cabinet will be blocked. NOTE

When an IMS06 is configured with storage batteries, the power consumption of a BTS3900 cannot exceed 10,000 W. If the power consumption exceeds 10,000 W, large-capacity battery packs need to be added.

Figure 2-12 BTS3900 configured with BTS3900 cabinets and an IMS06

BTS3900 (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs A BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs is applicable to various scenarios such as a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, or stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


27



Sce nar io

Nu mb er of BB Us

Application Mode


Applicable Cabinet

Illustration

Sin gle cabi net

1

Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruplemode base stations

6 RFUs+6 RRUs

One BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V)

The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-13.


2

Triple- and quadruplemode base stations

12 RFUs+6 RRUs

Two BTS3900 DC cabinets (-48 V)


Stac ked cabi nets

2


12 RFUs+6 RRUs


For a BTS3900 (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-03B can be configured to provide power for RRUs and the DCDU-03B must be installed on a wall outside the BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet. Figure 2-13 Single cabinet (one BBU)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


28



Figure 2-14 Cabinets installed side by side (two BBUs)

Figure 2-15 Stacked cabinets (two BBUs)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


29



BTS3900 (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs A BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs is applicable to various scenarios such as a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, or stacked cabinets. The following table lists the application scenarios for a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs. Sce nar io

Nu mb er of BB Us

Application Mode


Applicable Cabinet

Illustratio n

Sin gle cabi net

1


6 RFUs+6 RRUs

One BTS3900 DC cabinet



2


12 RFUs+6 RRUs

Two BTS3900 DC cabinets


Stac ked cabi nets

2


12 RFUs+6 RRUs


For a BTS3900 (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-11B can be configured to provide power for RRUs and the DCDU-11B must be installed on a wall outside the BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


30



Figure 2-16 Single cabinet (one BBU)

Figure 2-17 Cabinets installed side by side (two BBUs)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


31



Figure 2-18 Stacked cabinets (two BBUs)

BTS3900 (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900 base station is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the BTS3900 can have different scenarios, including a single cabinet, cabinets installed side by side, stacked cabinets, or using an IMS06.

BTS3900 Not Configured with an IMS06 The following table describes the application scenarios for a BTS3900 base station that uses various BTS3900 cabinets and is configured with RFUs and RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


32



Sce nar io

Nu mb er of BB Us

Application Mode


Applicable Cabinet

Illustration

Sin gle cabi net

1


6 RFUs+6 RRUs


Figure 2-19 shows the application scenario.

2


6 RFUs+9 RRUs

1


12 RFUs+6 RRUs

2


12 RFUs+9 RRUs


1


12 RFUs+6 RRUs


2


12 RFUs+9 RRUs



Stac ked cabi nets


The application scenario is shown in Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21. Two BTS3900 DC cabinets


When a BTS3900 (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is installed in the BTS3900 cabinet to distribute power to RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


33



Figure 2-19 One BTS3900 DC cabinet (one BBU)

Figure 2-20 One BTS3900 DC cabinet (two BBUs)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


34



Figure 2-21 One BTS3900 AC cabinet (two BBUs)

Figure 2-22 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets installed side by side (one BBU)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


35



Figure 2-23 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets installed side by side (two BBUs)

Figure 2-24 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets stacked together (one BBU)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


36



Figure 2-25 Two BTS3900 DC cabinets stacked together (two BBUs)

BTS3900 Configured with an IMS06 The following table lists the application scenarios where a BTS3900 base station uses an BTS3900 cabinet and an IMS06 and is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Scenario

Num ber of BBUs

Applic ation Mode


Illustration

Description

1 BTS3900 AC+1 IMS06

2

Tripleand quadrupl e-mode base stations

6 RFUs+9 RRUs


An IMS06 houses 100Ah storage batteries, which provide lowcapacity backup power.

NOTICE The IMS06 cannot be stacked on the BTS3900 cabinet. Otherwise, the heat dissipation holes on the top of the BTS3900 cabinet will be blocked. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


37



NOTE

When an IMS06 is configured with storage batteries, the power consumption of a BTS3900 cannot exceed 10,000 W. If the power consumption exceeds 10,000 W, large-capacity battery packs need to be added.

Figure 2-26 BTS3900 configured with an IMS06 (1 BTS3900 AC+1 IMS06)

2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.B), a BTS3900 (Ver.C), and a BTS3900 (Ver.D). Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), or BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) are the same as those in a BTS3900 (Ver.D).

Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900 (Ver.B) which has the peak output power.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


38



NOTE

l The power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.

AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900 is supplied with AC power. Table 2-3 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply

Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker

Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable

Length of the Input Power Cable

220 V AC threephase

1x16 A/3 P (by default)

2.5 mm2 (0.004 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

220 V AC singlephase


6 mm2 (0.009 in.2)

110 V AC duallive-wire


NOTE

An insulation cable with two insulation layers and four wires is used for AC three-phase power. An insulation cable with two insulation layers and two wires is used for AC single-phase and 110 V duallive-wire power.

DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs and is supplied with +24 V or -48 V DC power. Table 2-4 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs Power Supply

Maximum Configuratio ns in a Cabinet(1)

Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)(3)(4)

CrossSectional Area of the Input Power Cable


+24 V DC

l 1 to 6 lowpower RFUs


25 mm2(0.039 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

l 1 BBU Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

1x160 A/1 P


39



Power Supply

Maximum Configuratio ns in a Cabinet(1)

Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)(3)(4)


-48 V DC



16 mm2(0.025 in.2)


l 1 BBU l 1 to 3 lowpower RFUs


l 1 BBU

NOTE

(1) Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU. (2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l

The requirements for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario are also applicable to a small configuration scenario.

l

The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A, 2x63 A, 100 A, 80 A, and 63 A.

(3) When two power inputs are used, the following requirements must be met: l

Both power inputs are from the same power cabinet.

l

Both power inputs use circuit breakers of the same specification and model.

l

Both power inputs use power cables of the same cross-sectional area and length.

(4) The capacity of circuit breakers for indoor macro base stations does not take into account the power consumed by transmission equipment in the cabinet.

DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides two -48 V DC power inputs to a DCDU-01 and a DCDU-03B. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.B). l

The DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. When the DCDU-01 is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Table 2-4.

l

The DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-03B is powered by the external power equipment.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


40



Table 2-5 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)

Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)



16 mm2(0.025 in.2),a group of DC input power cables

≤ 10 m (99.21 lb)

(3)(4)

4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)

1x63 A/1 P


1x63 A/1 P

4 to 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)



1x63 A/1 P

l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)

1x80 A/1 P

l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


41



NOTE

(1) The maximum power consumption of RRUs is as follows: l

The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs is less than 300 W: RRU3804, RRU3801C, RRU3801E, RRU3806, RRU3235, RRU3231, RRU3004, RRU3838, RRU3824, RRU3826, RRU3821E, or RRU3922E.

l

The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 300 W to 400 W or is equal to 300 W: RRU3908, RRU3808, RRU3220, RRU3828, RRU3928, RRU3203, RRU3232, RRU3222, RRU3936, RRU3832, RRU3260, RRU3268, RRU3926, RRU3008, RRU3805, RRU3938, or RRU3839.

(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l


l




l


l


(4) The maximum configurations in a cabinet are the full configuration of modules in the cabinet. l

When a base station uses both high-power RRUs and low-power RRUs, the specification of circuit breakers is determined by the high-power RRUs.

l

If the customer power supply is sufficient, configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.

l

When the power consumption of the transmission equipment exceeds 350 W, the circuit breakers corresponding to the exceeding part of the actual power consumption needs to be added to the circuit breakers that support 350 W.

Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900 (Ver.C) which has the peak output power. NOTE


AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900 is supplied with AC power.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


42



Table 2-6 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply




220 V AC threephase


2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)



16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

110 V AC dual-livewire


NOTE

An insulation cable with two insulation layers and four wires is used for AC three-phase power. An insulation cable with two insulation layers and three wires is used for AC single-phase and 110 V duallive-wire power.

DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-7 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)



Length of the Input Power Cable ≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

(3)(4)

l 4 to 6 highpower RFUs


16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

l 1 BBU

1x160 A/1 P

35 mm2or 0.054 in.2(low smoke zero halogen)

l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs

1x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

1x100 A/1 P

35 mm2or 0.054 in.2(low smoke zero halogen)

2x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

1x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

l 1 BBU l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 1 BBU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


43



Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)




(3)(4)


1x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

l 1 BBU

NOTE

(1) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows: l

If high-power RFUs and low-power RFUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs.

l

If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.

l

High-power RFUs include the LRFUe, WRFUd, MRFUd, MRFUe, WRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe.

l

Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU.



l




l


l



DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides -48 V DC power inputs to a DCDU-11A and a DCDU-11B. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.C). l

The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. When the DCDU-11A is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Table 2-7.

l

The DCDU-11B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-11B is powered by the external power equipment.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


44



Table 2-8 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)

Minimum Requirements for theUpper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)


Length of the Input Power Cable ≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)

(3)(4)


1x80 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P

35 mm2(0.054 in.2),a group of DC input power cables (low smoke zero halogen)


16 mm2(0.025 in.2),two groups of DC input power cables


1x63 A/1 P






1x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


45




Minimum Requirements for theUpper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)



(3)(4)





1x100 A/1 P





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


46



NOTE



l


l


l

The maximum power consumption of the following RRUs ranges from 560 W to 650 W or is equal to 560 W: RRU3953 or RRU3953w.



l




l


l




l


l


Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900 (Ver.D) which has the peak output power. NOTE


AC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


47



Table 2-9 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 AC configured with RFUs but without RRUs Power Supply

Number of PSUs

Minimum Requireme nts for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker



220 V AC three-phase

Four or five PSUs

1x40 A/3 P

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

Two or three PSUs

1x25 A/3 P

Black cable with four core wires, dual insulation layers, and a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2)

Five PSUs

1x100 A/1 P (recommend ed)

Four PSUs

1x80 A/1 P

Three PSUs

1x63 A/1 P


Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2)

AC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs. Table 2-10 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 AC configured with RFUs and RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply

Maximum Configurati ons in a Cabinet





l 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumpti on of each RRU ≤ 560 W)

1x100 A/1 P

25 mm2(0.039 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


48



Power Supply

Maximum Configurati ons in a Cabinet




l 3 RRUs (power consumpti on of each RRU ≤ 400 W)

1x40 A/3 P

6 mm2(0.009 in.2)


DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-11 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)

Minimum Requirementsfor the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)



16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

(3)(4)



l 2 BBUs

1x160 A/1 P

35 mm2or 0.054 in. smoke zero halogen) 2(low


1x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

1x100 A/1 P

35 mm2(0.054 in.2)

2x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

1x100 A/1 P

35 mm2(0.054 in.2)

2x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

l 1 BBU l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


49




Minimum Requirementsfor the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)



(3)(4)


1x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

1x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

l 1 BBU l 1 to 3 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs

NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l



DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900 cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B, respectively. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D). l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

The DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. If the DCDU-12A obtains power from external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in this scenario are the same as those in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Table 2-11. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50


l


The DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in this scenario when the DCDU-12B obtains power from external power equipment.

Table 2-12 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs Maximum Configuration(1)


Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)(4)



1x80 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)


1x63 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


51



Maximum Configuration(1)




1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P




1x160 A/1 P




1x100 A/1 P




l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 6 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) 9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



52



Maximum Configuration(1)



9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)




NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l


(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows:

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

l


l


l


l

If more than six RRUs are configured, a maximum of six power cables with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 560 W) and a maximum of three power cables with a cross-sectional area of 4 mm2(0.006 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 400 W) are configured.


53



2.1.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900 This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900 (Ver.B), a BTS3900 (Ver.C), and a BTS3900 (Ver.D) supplied with different power. The power distribution scheme in a BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), or BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) is the same as that in a BTS3900 (Ver.D).

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.B) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900 cabinets.

Power Distribution Schemes in AC Scenarios The external power equipment supplies 220 V AC single-phase, 220 V AC three-phase, or 110 V dual-live-wire power to a BTS3900 AC cabinet. The EPS4890 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the DC power to a DCDU-01. The DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario. NOTE

The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that L1, L2, and L3 input terminals do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


54



Figure 2-27 Power distribution schemes in AC scenarios

Power Distribution Scheme in +24 V DC Scenarios The external power equipment supplies +24 V DC power to a BTS3900 DC cabinet (+24 V). The EPS24S48100DC converts the DC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01. The DCDU-01 distributes the -48 V DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


55



Figure 2-28 Power distribution scheme in +24 V DC scenarios

Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01 in a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V), and the DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario. Figure 2-29 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


56



Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l

When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01, and the DCDU-01 distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme in this scenario is the same as that for a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Figure 2-29.

l

The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-03B, and the DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.

Figure 2-30 Power distribution schemein -48 V DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900 cabinets.

Power Distribution Schemes in AC Scenarios The external power equipment supplies 220 V AC single-phase power, 220 V AC three-phase power, or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power to a BTS3900 cabinet. The ETP48150-A3 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the DC power to a DCDU-11A. The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to modules in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario. NOTE

The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that L1, L2, and L3 input terminals do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


57



Figure 2-31 Power distribution schemes in AC scenarios

Power Distribution Schemes in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A in a BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V), and the DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to modules in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


58



Figure 2-32 Power distribution schemes in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs

Power Distribution Schemes in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l

When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A, and the DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme in this scenario is the same as that for a BTS3900 DC cabinet (-48 V) configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Figure 2-32.

l

Figure 2-33shows the power distribution schemes when the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC to a DCDU-11B that distribute the DC power to RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


59



Figure 2-33 Power distribution schemes in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900 (Ver.D) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900 cabinets.

Power Distribution Schemein AC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When the BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the external power equipment provides 220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase power input for the EPU05A-02. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A. Figure 2-34shows the distribution schemes in the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenario. The DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. Figure 2-36shows the distribution schemes for the DCDU-12A. NOTE

The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC singlephase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


60



Figure 2-34 Power distribution scheme in AC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs

Power Distribution Scheme in AC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides 220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase power input for the EPU05A-02. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B. Figure 2-35shows the distribution schemes in the 220 V AC single-phase power supply scenarios. The DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The DCDU-12B distributes the DC power to RRUs. Figure 2-36and Figure 2-37show the distribution schemes for the DCDU-12A and DCDU-12B, respectively. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


61



Figure 2-35 Power distribution schemein AC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs

Power Distribution Schemein DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When the BTS3900 is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the external power equipment provides -48 V DC power for the DCDU-12A in the BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet and the DCDU-12A distributes the -48 V DC power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900 cabinet. Figure 2-36 Power distribution schemein DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


62



Power Distribution Scheme in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l

When a BTS3900 is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-12A, and the DCDU-12A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A in this scenario is the same as that for a DCDU-12A used by a BTS3900 DC (-48 V) cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs. For details, see Figure 2-36.

l

The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to a DCDU-12B, and the DCDU-12B distributes the DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in this scenario.

Figure 2-37 Power distribution schemein DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs

NOTE

Ports LOAD0 to LOAD5 on a DCDU-12B feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 560 W, and ports LOAD6 to LOAD8 feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 400 W.

2.1.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900 This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900.

Cable List For cables in a BTS3900, see the following sections: l

BTS3900 (Ver.B): BTS3900 (Ver.B) Cable List

l

BTS3900 (Ver.C): BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cable List

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


63


l


BTS3900 (Ver.D): BTS3900 (Ver.D) Cable List

Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Table 2-13 Cable connections Bas e Sta tio n

Power Cable Connectio ns

Monitorin g Signal Cable Connectio ns

Transmiss ion Cable Connectio ns

BBU Interconn ection Signal Cable Connectio ns

CPRI Cable Connectio ns

RF Cable Connectio ns

BT S39 00 (Ver .B)

BTS3900 (Ver.B) Power Cable Connection s

BTS3900 (Ver.B) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s

Transmissi on Cable Connection s

Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connection s

CPRI Cable Connection s

RF Cable Connection s

BT S39 00 (Ver .C)

BTS3900 (Ver.C) Power Cable Connection s

BTS3900 (Ver.C) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s

BT S39 00 (Ver .D)

BTS3900 (Ver.D) Power Cable Connection s

BTS3900 (Ver.D) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s

2.2 BTS3900L This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900L.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


64



2.2.1 Cabinets and Subracks Supported by BTS3900L Base Stations The BTS3900L, an indoor macro base station, can be classified into BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D), in terms of cabinet versions. The BTS3900L cabinets can meet different site requirements for power distribution, module configuration, and space for customer equipment. The BTS3900L can use AC power when the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet is stacked upon an IMS06. The following table lists the cabinets and subrack that are used by the BTS3900L base stations. Table 2-14 Cabinets and subrack used by the BTS3900L base stations Base Station

Cabinet/ Subrack


Components of a Cabinet/ Subrack

BTS3900L (Ver.B)

BTS3900L (Ver.B)

For details, see Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) Cabinet.

BTS3900L (Ver.C)

BTS3900L (Ver.C)

This cabinet uses -48 V DC power only and provides space for the RFUs, BBU, fan assembly, power equipment, and customer equipment.

BTS3900L (Ver.D)

BTS3900L (Ver.D)

This cabinet provides space for the RFUs, BBU, fan assembly, power equipment, and customer equipment. This cabinet can be divided into the following types based on the configured power equipment:

For details, see Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) Cabinet.

For details, see Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet.

l BTS3900L DC cabinet l BTS3900L AC cabinet IMS06

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

The IMS06 houses power equipment. The BTS3900L base station uses AC power when a BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet is stacked upon the IMS06.


For details, see 3.21.2 Components of an IMS06.

65



The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), BTS3900L (Ver.D), and IMS06. Figure 2-38 Cabinet/subrack exteriors

The BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet can be restructured to have the same capability as the BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet, as listed in the following table. Table 2-15 Restructured cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Base Station

Cabinet

Cabinet Description


BTS3900L (Ver.D_B)

BTS3900L (Ver.D_B)

It is restructured from a BTS3900L (Ver.B).

For details, see components of a cabinet in Information to Be Known Before the Cabinet Transformationof BTS3900L Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.


66



2.2.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900L A BTS3900L cabinet can meet different requirements for RF module configurations and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900L can be configured with RFUs, or RFUs and RRUs depending on different scenarios.

BTS3900L (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.B) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.B) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Numbe r of BBUs

Application Mode


Illustration

1


12 RFUs

The cabinet application is shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-39.

2

Triple- ,quadruple- mode base station

12 RFUs



67



Figure 2-39 BTS3900L

BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.C) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.C) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Numbe r of BBUs

Application Mode


Illustration

1


12 RFUs


2

Triple- ,quadruple- mode base station

12 RFUs



68



Figure 2-40 BTS3900L

BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.D) can be configured with one or two BBUs.

Scenarios Where the BTS3900L Uses BTS3900L Cabinets Only The following table lists the application scenarios where the BTS3900L uses one BTS3900L cabinet only and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


69



Cabinet Type

Num ber of BBUs

Application Mode


Illustration

BTS3900L DC cabinet

1


12 RFUs


2

Triple-quadruple-, mode base station

12 RFUs


1


12 RFUs


2

Triple-quadruple-, mode base station

12 RFUs


BTS3900L AC cabinet

NOTICE The IMS06 cannot be stacked upon the BTS3900L cabinet. Otherwise, the heat dissipation holes on the top of the BTS3900L cabinet will be blocked.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


70



Figure 2-41 1 BTS3900L DC

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


71



Figure 2-42 1 BTS3900L AC (1 BTS3900L DC+1 IMS06)

Scenarios Where the BTS3900L Uses a BTS3900L Cabinet and an IMS06 The following table lists the application scenarios where the BTS3900L uses a BTS3900L DC cabinet and an IMS06 and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


72



Cabinet Type

Nu mbe r of BB Us

Application Mode

Maximu m Number of RF Module s

Description

Illustration

1 BTS3900 L DC+1 IMS06

1

Single-, dual-, and triple-mode base stations

12 RFUs


2

Triple-mode base station

12 RFUs

l A BTS3900L DC cabinet stacked on an IMS06 comprises an AC base station. l The IMS06 houses an EPU05A-02/ EPU05A-04 that provides DC power for components in the BTS3900L cabinet stacked upon the IMS06.


BTS3900L (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.B) is configured with RFUs and RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.B) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs

Application Mode


Illustration

1

Single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations

12 RFUs+6 RRUs

The cabinet application is shown in Figure 2-43.

2

Triple- and quadruple-mode base stations

12 RFUs+6 RRUs


When a BTS3900L (Ver.B) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-03B can be installed on a wall to distribute power to the RRUs. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


73



Figure 2-43 BTS3900L with only one BBU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


74



Figure 2-44 BTS3900L with two BBUs

BTS3900L (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.C) is configured with RFUs and RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.C) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Numb er of BBUs

Application Mode


Illustration

1


12 RFUs+6 RRUs


2


12 RFUs+6 RRUs


When a BTS3900L (Ver.C) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-11B can be installed on a wall to distribute power to the RRUs. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


75




Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


76




BTS3900L (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs This section describes scenarios where the BTS3900L (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs and RRUs. In these scenarios, the BTS3900L (Ver.D) can be configured with one or two BBUs. A BTS3900L base station can be configured with only one cabinet. The following table describes the scenarios where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs. Numbe r of BBUs

Application Mode


Illustration

1


12 RFUs+6 RRUs


2

Triple- and quadruple-mode base stations

12 RFUs+9 RRUs


When a BTS3900L (Ver.D) is configured with RFUs and RRUS, a DCDU-12B is installed at the third 1 U space at the bottom of a cabinet to distribute power to RRUs. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


77





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


78



2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.B), a BTS3900L (Ver.C), and a BTS3900L (Ver.D). The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) are the same as those in a BTS3900L (Ver.D).

Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900L (Ver.B) which has the peak output power. NOTE


BTS3900L Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power input. The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs are listed in the following table. Table 2-16 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet




2x80 A/1 P

The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-01s.

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

2x63 A/1 P

The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-01s.

(3)(4)

l 7 to 12 lowpower RFUs(1) l 2 BBUs

l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs l 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


79



NOTE

(1) Low-power RFUs include the DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, MRFU, and LRFU. (2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers: l


l




l


l



BTS3900L Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-01 and one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-03B. For details about the power distribution scheme, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.B). l

The DCDU-01 provides power for the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. When the DCDU-01 is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are the same as those in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as listed in Table 2-16.

l

The DCDU-03B provides power for RRUs. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when the DCDU-03B is powered by the external power equipment.

Table 2-17 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs and RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)






1x63 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (99.21 lb)


1x63 A/1 P


80








1x63 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P




NOTE

(1) Remarks about the maximum configuration are as follows: l


l


l


l


l


(2) Remarks about the minimum requirements for the upper-level circuit breakers:

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

l


l



81



Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900L (Ver.C) which has the peak output power. NOTE


BTS3900L Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power input. The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs are listed in the following table. Table 2-18 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configurations in a Cabinet(1)

Minimum Requirements for the Circuit Breaker(2)(4)

Cross-Sectional Area of the Input Power Cable(3)




The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for four groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

2x160 A/1 P

The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable of the smoke zero halogen (LSZH) type is connected to two DCDU-11As.

l 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


82







4x63 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P

The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-11As.

2x100 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in. 2),two groups of DC input power cables

3x80 A/1 P

The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables. One DCDU-11A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-11A is connected to one circuit breaker.

l 2 BBUs

l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack)


l 2 BBUs l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


83






l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack)

2x63 A/1 P


3x63 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


l 2 BBUs


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



84



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l



BTS3900L Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-11A and one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-11B. For details, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.C). l

The DCDU-11A distributes the DC power to the RFUs, BBU, and fan assembly in the cabinet. When the DCDU-11A is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are the same as those in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as listed in Table 2-18.

l


Table 2-19 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900L configured with RFUs and RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)






1x80 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)


85







1x63 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P





1x63 A/1 P






1x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P




1x100 A/1 P



l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W < power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


86






consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)




NOTE



l


l


l


l


l




l



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


l


l



87



Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900L (Ver.D) which has the peak output power. NOTE


AC Input Scenario The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables when the BTS3900L uses AC input power and is configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-20 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 AC configured with RFUs but without RRUs Power Supply

Number of PSUs





Four or five PSUs

1x40 A/3 P

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

Two or three PSUs

1x25 A/3 P


Five PSUs

1x100 A/1 P (recommend ed)

Four PSUs

1x80 A/1 P

Three PSUs

1x63 A/1 P


Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2)

DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The BTS3900L uses -48 V DC power input. The upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the BTS3900L configured with RFUs but without RRUs are listed in the following table.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


88



Table 2-21 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for base stations configured with RFUs but without RRUs Maximum Configuration in a Cabinet(1)






≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

2 x 160 A/1 P

The cross-sectional area is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables and the power cable of the smoke zero halogen (LSZH) type is connected to two DCDU-12As.

4x63 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


(4)

l 7 to 12 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs

l 7 to 12 lowpower RFUs l 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


89



Maximum Configuration in a Cabinet(1)




(4)

l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack)

2x100 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


3x80 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


l 2 BBUs

l 1 to 6 highpower RFUs l 2 BBUs

l 1 to 6 low-power RFUs (3 or less RFUs in an RF subrack) l 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


90



Maximum Configuration in a Cabinet(1)




(4)


3x63 A/1 P

The cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for three groups of DC input power cables and the power cable is connected to two DCDU-12As. One DCDU-12A is connected to two circuit breakers and the other DCDU-12A is connected to one circuit breaker.

2x80 A/1 P


l 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


91



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l



DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12A and one -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12B. For details about the power distribution scheme, see Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D). l

The DCDU-12A provides power for the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. When the DCDU-12A is powered by the external power equipment, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables are the same as those in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as listed in Table 2-21.

l


Table 2-22 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)






1x80 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)


92







1x63 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P



l 3 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W < power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


93






consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W)

2x63 A/1 P



1x160 A/1 P




1x160 A/1 P




1x100 A/1 P






l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 6 RRUs (300 W < power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) 9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)

9 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



94



NOTE



l


l


l


l


l


l

If more than six RRUs are configured, a maximum of six power cables with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 560 W) and a maximum of three power cables with a cross-sectional area of 4 mm2(0.006 in.2) for RRUs (power consumption of each RRU is less than or equal to 400 W) are configured.



l




l


l


2.2.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900L (Ver.B), a BTS3900L (Ver.C), and a BTS3900L (Ver.D). The power distribution scheme in a BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) is the same as that in a BTS3900L (Ver.D).

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.B) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900L cabinet.

Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01 in the BTS3900L cabinet, and the DCDU-01 distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


95



Figure 2-49 Power distribution scheme for the BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs

Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs and RRUs l

When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01, and the DCDU-01 distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The power distribution schemes are the same for the DCDU-01 in a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs and a BTS3900L cabinet configured only with RFUs, as shown in Figure 2-49.

l

The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-03B, and the DCDU-03B supplies the -48 V DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


96



Figure 2-50 Power distribution schemefor a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.C) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900L cabinet.

Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11A in the BTS3900L cabinet, and the DCDU-11A distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


97



Figure 2-51 Power distribution scheme for the BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs but without RRUs

Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900L Cabinet Configured with RFUs and RRUs l

When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11A, and the DCDU-11A distributes the -48 V DC power to RFUs, BBU, FAN in the cabinet. The power distribution schemes are the same for the DCDU-11A in a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs and a BTS3900L cabinet configured only with RFUs, as shown in Figure 2-51.

l

The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-11B, and the DCDU-11B supplies the -48 V DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


98



Figure 2-52 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900L (Ver.D) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900L cabinet.

Power Distribution Schemein AC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the external power equipment provides 220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase power input for the EPU05A-02 in the IMS06. The EPU05A-02 converts the AC power into -48 V DC power and then supplies the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-12A. Figure 2-53shows the power distribution schemes for the BTS3900L when the 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied. The DCDU-12A supplies power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. Figure 2-54shows the power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A. NOTE

The 220 V AC three-phase power supply has the same power distribution scheme as the 220 V AC single-phase power supply, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars when the 220 V AC three-phase power supply is used.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


99



Figure 2-53 Power distribution schemein AC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs

Power Distribution Scheme in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The external power equipment provides -48 V DC power for the DCDU-12A in the BTS3900L cabinet and the DCDU-12A distributes the -48 V DC power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900L cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


100



Figure 2-54 Power distribution scheme in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs but without RRUs

Power Distribution Scheme in DC Input Scenarios Configured with RFUs and RRUs l

When the BTS3900L cabinet is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the external power equipment provides -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12A. The DCDU-12A supplies the -48 V DC power to the BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs in the cabinet. The power distribution scheme for the DCDU-12A in this scenario is the same as that in the scenario where the BTS3900L is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, as shown in Figure 2-54.

l

The external power equipment provides -48 V DC power input for the DCDU-12B and the DCDU-12B distributes the -48 V DC power to RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900L cabinet configured with RFUs and RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


101



Figure 2-55 Power distribution scheme in DC input scenarios configured with RFUs and RRUs

NOTE

Ports LOAD0 to LOAD5 on a DCDU-12B feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 560 W, and ports LOAD6 to LOAD8 feed power to each RRU with power consumption of less than or equal to 400 W.

2.2.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900L This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900L.

Cable List For cables in a BTS3900L, see the following sections: l

BTS3900L (Ver.B): BTS3900L (Ver.B) Cable List

l

BTS3900L (Ver.C): BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cable List

l

BTS3900L (Ver.D): BTS3900L (Ver.D) Cable List

Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900L, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


102



Table 2-23 Cable connections Base Station

Power Cable Connection s

Monitori ng Signal Cable Connecti ons

Transmi ssion Cable Connecti ons

BBU Intercon nection Signal Cable Connecti ons

CPRI Cable Connecti ons

RF Cable Connecti ons

BTS3900 L (Ver.B)

Power cable connections in a BTS3900L (Ver.B)

Monitorin g signal cable connectio ns in a BTS3900 L (Ver.B)


InterBBU Signal Cable Connectio ns



BTS3900 L (Ver.C)

Power cable connections in a BTS3900L (Ver.C)

Monitorin g signal cable connectio ns in a BTS3900 L (Ver.C)

BTS3900 L (Ver.D)

Power cable connections in a BTS3900L (Ver.D)

Monitorin g signal cable connectio ns in a BTS3900 L (Ver.D)

2.3 BTS3900A This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900A.

2.3.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900A The BTS3900A is an outdoor separated macro base station, and it can be constituted of cabinets with different functions. With the improvement in designing cabinets, Huawei has many types of cabinets applicable to a BTS3900A. These cabinets meet the requirements of power distribution, module configuration, and customer space. The following table describes the cabinets that constitute a BTS3900A. NOTE

BTS3900A (Ver.B), BTS3900A (Ver.C), BTS3900A (Ver.D), or BTS3900A (Ver.E) refer to the BTS3900A base station whose cabinets are all of Ver.B, Ver.C, Ver.D, or Ver.E.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


103



Table 2-24 Cabinets constituting a BTS3900A Base Statio n

Cabinet Name

Cabinet Description

BTS39 00A (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.B), and IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l The APM30H(1) cabinet provides power to components in it and to other cabinets in AC scenarios.

BTS39 00A (Ver.C)

APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.C), and IBBS200T (Ver.C)

BTS39 00A (Ver.D)

APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.D), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS200T (Ver.D), IBBS700D, IBBS700T, IBBS300D (Ver.A), and IBBS300T (Ver.A)

l The TMC11H(2) cabinet can serve as a power cabinet in DC scenarios or as a transmission cabinet based on the transmission space requirement.

BTS39 00A (Ver.E)

APM30H (Ver.E), TMC11H (Ver.E), RFC (Ver.E), IBBS200D (Ver.E), IBBS200T (Ver.E), IBBS300D (Ver.A), IBBS300T (Ver.A)

l The IBBS(3) cabinet is a battery cabinet that provides backup power to a site. l The RFC(4) houses RFUs.

NOTE

(1) APM30H: Advanced power module with heat exchanger (2) TMC11H: Transmission cabinet with heat exchanger (3) IBBS200T/IBBS300T/IBBS700T: Integrated battery backup system with TEC; IBBS200D/IBBS300D/ IBBS700D: Integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation (4) RFC: Radio frequency cabinet

Exteriors of Cabinets Figure 2-56and Figure 2-57list the common combinations of cabinets.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


104



Figure 2-56 Exteriors of cabinets used by BTS3900As (Ver.B) or BTS3900As (Ver.C)

A: BTS3900A (Ver.B)/BTS3900A (Ver.C) in AC scenarios B: BTS3900A (Ver.B)/BTS3900A (Ver.C) in without backup power or in DC scenarios AC scenarios with backup power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


105



Figure 2-57 Exteriors of cabinets used by BTS3900As (Ver.D)

A: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios without backup power or in DC scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

B: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS200D


106



C: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS300D

D: BTS3900A (Ver.D) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS700D

Figure 2-58 Exteriors of cabinets used by BTS3900As (Ver.E)

A: BTS3900A (Ver.E) in AC scenarios without backup power or in DC scenarios

B: BTS3900A (Ver.E) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS200D

C: BTS3900A (Ver.E) in AC scenarios with backup power provided by the IBBS300D

-

Cabinets The following table lists cabinets applicable to the BTS3900A base station and the cabinet configuration for reference.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


107



Table 2-25 APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS, and RFC series cabinets Cabinet Type

Cabinet Name

Cabinet Configuration

APM30H series cabinets

l APM30H (Ver.B)

l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.B).

l APM30H (Ver.C) l APM30H (Ver.D) l APM30H(Ver.E)

l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.E).

TMC11H series cabinets

l TMC11H (Ver.B) l TMC11H (Ver.C) l TMC11H (Ver.D) l TMC11H (Ver.E)

l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E).

IBBS series cabinets

l IBBS700D or IBBS700T l IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T (Ver.B) l IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) l IBBS200D (Ver.D) or IBBS200T (Ver.D) l IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E) l IBBS300D (Ver.A) or IBBS300T (Ver.A)

RFC series cabinets

l RFC (Ver.B) l RFC (Ver.C) l RFC (Ver.D) l RFC (Ver.E)

l For details, see Components of an IBBS700Dand Components of an IBBS700T. l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E). l For details, see 3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Dsand 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts. l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an RFC (Ver.E).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


108



Besides the preceding cabinets, some cabinets of earlier versions can be restructured to have the same capability as Ver.D cabinets, as described in the following table. Table 2-26 Reused cabinets Base Station

Cabinet Name

Cabinet Description


BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ C)

APM30H (Ver.D_C)

Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.C)

TMC11H (Ver.D_C)

Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.C)

IBBS200D (Ver.D_C) and IBBS200T (Ver.D_C)

Restructured from the IBBS200D (Ver.C) and IBBS200T(Ver.C)

For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

RFC (Ver.D_C)

Restructured from the RFC (Ver.C)

APM30H (Ver.D_B)

Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.B)

TMC11H (Ver.D_B)

Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.D_B) and IBBS200T (Ver.D_B)

Restructured from the IBBS200D (Ver.B) and IBBS200T(Ver.B)

RFC (Ver.D_B)

Restructured from the RFC (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.D_A2)

Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.A) cabinet

For details, see APM30H (Ver.D_A2) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

TMC11H (Ver.D_A2)

Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.A)

For details, see TMC11H (Ver.D_A2) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2)

Restructured from the IBBS200T (Ver.A)

For details, see IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ B)

BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ A2)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

109


Base Station

BTS39 00A (Ver.D_ A1)

BTS39 00A (Ver.E_ B~D)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Cabinet Name

Cabinet Description


RFC (Ver.D_A)

Restructured from the RFC (Ver.A)

For details, see RFC (Ver.D_A) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

APM30 (Ver.D_A1)

Restructured from the APM30 (with breathable film)

For details, see APM30 (Ver.D_A1) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

TMC (Ver.D_A1)

Restructured from the TMC (with breathable film)

For details, see TMC (Ver.D_A1) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

BBC (Ver.D_A1)

Restructured from the BBC

For details, see BBC (Ver.D_A1) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

RFC (Ver.D_A)

Restructured from the RFC

For details, see RFC (Ver.D_A) Configurationin BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

APM30H (Ver.E_B~D)

Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), and APM30H (Ver.D)

TMC11H (Ver.E_B~D)

Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), and TMC11H (Ver.D)

IBBS200D (Ver.E_B~D) and IBBS200T(Ver.E _B~D)

Restructured from the IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.D)

For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_B~D), Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_B~D), and Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.D) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_B~D) in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

RFC (Ver.E_B~D)

Restructured from the RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D)


110



Base Station

Cabinet Name

Cabinet Description


BTS39 00A (Ver.E_ A2)

APM30H (Ver.E_A2)

Restructured from the APM30H (Ver.A)

TMC11H (Ver.E_A2)

Restructured from the TMC11H (Ver.A)

IBBS200T (Ver.E_A2)

Restructured from the IBBS200T (Ver.A)

For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_A2) in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

RFC (Ver.E_A2)

Restructured from the RFC (Ver.A)

APM30 (Ver.E_A1)

Restructured from the APM30 (with breathable film)

TMC (Ver.E_A1)

Restructured from the TMC (with breathable film)

BBC (Ver.E_A1)

Restructured from the BBC

RFC (Ver.E_A1)

Restructured from the RFC

BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z)

Restructured from the BTS3012AE

BTS39 00A (Ver.E_ A1)

BTS30 12AE (Ver.D_ Z)

For details, see Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.E_A1) in BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

For details, see BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) Installation Guide.

2.3.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900A Various cabinets can be configured for a BTS3900A to meet different requirements for RF module configurations, backup power capacity, and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900A can be configured with RFUs, or RFUs and RRUs depending on different scenarios.

BTS3900A (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.

Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a single site: l

A BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.

l

A BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of two cabinet combinations (one cabinet combination consists of one APM30H/TMC11H and one RFC). The two cabinet combinations must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) between them.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


111


l


An APM30H can be configured with an RFC and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.

Principles for stacking and combining cabinets l

An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS200D or IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is stacked on the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

l

An RFC can be stacked only below the APM30H or TMC11H.

l

If auxiliary cabinets, such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H, are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left, and the basic cabinets are positioned on the right. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.

l

Battery cabinets are selected base on the climatic conditions and power backup requirements of the site. A site must be configured with only one type of battery cabinets. Battery cabinets of different types or versions are not allowed at a site. For example, an IBBS200D and an IBBS200T cannot co-exist at a site, and an IBBS200D (Ver.B) and an IBBS200D (Ver.C) cannot co-exist at a site.

l

During initial site construction, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right side of original cabinets during capacity expansion. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RFUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with of different requirements of spacefor customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


112



Figure 2-59 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


113



Figure 2-60 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet

When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


114



Figure 2-61 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


115



Figure 2-62 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

NOTE

As shown in the preceding figure, there are two installation modes of 2 TMC11Hs + 2 RFCs: (A) and (B). In mode (A), one RFC is installed during the initial site construction, and the other RFC is installed during capacity expansion. In mode (B), two RFCs are installed during the initial site construction.

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-27 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply

Backup Power Capacity

Space Requireme nts of Customer Equipmen t

Carrier Configurat ion


110 V AC or 220 V AC

No backup power

≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RFUs

2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H


116



Power Supply

-48 V DC





≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RFUs

2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H

The number of battery cabinets is the same as the number of APM30Hs and only one battery cabinet is configured initially.

≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RFUs

2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RFUs

2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

The number of battery cabinets is twice the number of APM30Hs and two battery cabinets are configured initially.

≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RFUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RFUs


-

≤9U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 6 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

≤ 20 U

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode BTS3900A l

Two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured for a triple-mode base station. BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the left side. BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H or TMC11H, which is on the right side.

l

A triple-mode base station can also be configured with only one BBU, for example, BBU 0 in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


117



When a site is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-63 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when no backup power is required

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-64 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


118



When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-65 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-66 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


119



Table 2-28 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station Power Supply






No backup power

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RFUs

2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs

≤ 21 U


Backup power provided by two battery cabinets

≤ 10 U


≤ 21 U


Backup power provided by four battery cabinets

≤ 10 U


≤ 21 U


-

≤ 18 U

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

-48 V DC

BTS3900A (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.

Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a single site: l


l

A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of two cabinet combinations (one cabinet combination consists of one APM30H/TMC11H and one RFC). The two cabinet combinations must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm between them.

l

An APM30H can be configured with an RFC and a maximum of two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.


The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS200D or IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is above the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

l

The RFC can be stacked only below the APM30H or TMC11H.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


120



l

If auxiliary cabinets, such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H, are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left, and the basic cabinets are positioned on the right. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.

l

During initial site construction, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets during capacity expansion. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RFUs are configured, two APM30Hs are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-67 Cabinet configurations of a site with no backup power

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


121



Figure 2-68 Cabinet configurations of a site where the number of battery cabinets is the same as that of APM30Hs

When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


122



Figure 2-69 Cabinet configurations of a site where the number of battery cabinets is two times that of APM30Hs


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


123



Figure 2-70 Cabinet configurations of a site in the -48 V DC scenario

NOTE

As shown in the preceding figure, there are two installation modes of 2 TMC11Hs + 2 RFCs: (A) and (B). In mode (A), one RFC is installed during the initial site construction, and the other RFC is installed during capacity expansion. In mode (B), two RFCs are installed during the initial site construction.

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-29 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply






No backup power

≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RFUs

2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs



124



Power Supply

-48 V DC





≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RFUs


The number of battery cabinets is the same as the number of APM30Hs and only one battery cabinet is configured initially.

≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RFUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RFUs


The number of battery cabinets is twice the number of APM30Hs and two battery cabinets are configured initially.

≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RFUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RFUs


-

≤9U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 6 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

≤ 20 U

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode BTS3900A l


l


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


125



When a site is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-71 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when no backup power is required

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-72 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


126



Figure 2-73 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-74 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


127



Table 2-30 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station Power Supply






No backup power

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RFUs

2 APM30Hs+2 RFCs

≤ 21 U



≤ 10 U


≤ 21 U



≤ 10 U


≤ 21 U


-

≤ 18 U

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

-48 V DC

BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs Only When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.

Cabinet Configuration Principles Maximum configuration principles for a single site l

A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.

l

A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of two cabinet combinations (one cabinet combination consists of one APM30H and one RFC). The two cabinet combinations must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm between them.

l

When a site is configured with more than six RFUs and only one IBBS200D/IBBS200T/ IBBS300D/IBBS300T, the IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T must be configured with at least two battery packs consisting of 100 Ah storage batteries to avoid over current of a single battery pack during the discharging.


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

An IBBS200D/IBBS200T can be stacked only with an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS200D/IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is stacked on the IBBS200D/IBBS200T. Only two IBBS200Ds or two IBBS200Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS200D cannot stack with an IBBS200T. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128



l

An IBBS300D/IBBS300T can be stacked only with an IBBS300D, IBBS300T, or TMC11H. When the IBBS300D/IBBS300T is stacked with the TMC11H, the TMC11H is stacked on the IBBS300D/IBBS300T. Only two IBBS300Ds or two IBBS300Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS300D cannot stack with an IBBS300T.

l

An IBBS200D/IBBS200T cannot be used together with an IBBS300D/IBBS300T.

l

An RFC can be stacked only below the APM30H or TMC11H.

l

If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H, are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left side of basic cabinets. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.

l

During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets for capacity expansion and the original cabinets are not relocated. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets.

l

A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption of all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to new site deployment or capacity expansion.

Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station A single-mode or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs are required. When a site is supplied with the 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


129



Figure 2-75 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required

NOTE

The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 1 RFC+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+1 TMC11H.

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-76 and Figure 2-77. NOTE

IBBS in the following figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


130



Figure 2-76 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


131



Figure 2-77 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS700D/IBBS700T

When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


132



Figure 2-78 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

NOTE

The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the scenario with the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+ 1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+ 2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 TMC11H.

When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


133



Figure 2-79 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

NOTE

The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the scenario with the initial configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (B) refers to the scenario of the initial configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC expanded to 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs.

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-31 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply


Space for Customer Equipmen t




No backup power

≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

≤5U

≤ 12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H


134


Power Supply






Backup power provided by one battery cabinet

≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤5U

≤ 12 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H


≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

≤5U

≤ 12 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


135



Power Supply





-48 V DC

-

≤9U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 TMC11H + 1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 6 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs + 1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

≤ 20 U

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-mode or Quadruple-mode Base Station The principles for configuring a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l

When a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure.

l

When two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

l

During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

When a site is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-80 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station when no backup power is required

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


136



When one battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in the following figure. NOTE

IBBS in the follwing figure represents IBBS200D/IBBS200T, IBBS300D/IBBS300T is used when the base station is configured two storage battery cabinets.

Figure 2-81 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


137



Figure 2-82 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruplemode base station are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


138



Figure 2-83 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-32 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply






No backup power

≤3U

≤ 12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs

≤ 14 U



≤3U

l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T



139



Power Supply




≤ 14 U




≤3U


≤ 14 U

l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11 l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+2 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 TMC11H

-48 V DC

-

≤7U

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 18 U

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

BTS3900A (Ver.E) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs If a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, different cabinet configurations can be used for the BTS3900A in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode scenario supplied with 110 V AC power, 220 V AC power, or -48 V DC power supply.



l

Cabinets in a BTS3900A must be installed side by side with a clearance of 40 mm between the cabinets.

l

If a site is configured with more than six RFUs and only one IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T, the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T must be configured with at least two battery packs consisting of 100 Ah storage batteries to prevent overcurrent of a single battery pack during the discharging.


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

An IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or TMC11H. When being stacking with a TMC11H, an IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be placed under the TMC11H. Only two IBBS200Ds or two IBBS200Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS200D cannot stack with an IBBS200T. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140



l

An IBBS300D or IBBS300T can be stacked only with an IBBS300D, IBBS300T, or TMC11H. When being stacking with a TMC11H, an IBBS300D or IBBS300T must be placed under the TMC11H. Only two IBBS300Ds or two IBBS300Ts can stack with each other. An IBBS300D cannot stack with an IBBS300T.

l

An IBBS200D or IBBS200T cannot be used together with an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.

l

An RFC can be stacked only below an APM30H or TMC11H.

l

If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS200D/IBBS200T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H, are required during initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinets are positioned on the left side of basic cabinets. If both a battery cabinet and a transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.

l

During initial site deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the future. Unless otherwise stated, new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets for capacity expansion and the original cabinets are not relocated. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left side of original cabinets.

Configuration principles in a single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations l

In a single- or dual-mode base station, only one BBU is configured. In a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the second.

l

A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption of the two BBUs cannot exceed 1200 W.

l

If two BBUs are configured during the initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

l

During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in an APM30H, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. If there is no space, the second BBU is installed in a TMC11H. NOTE

The cabinet configurations in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station configured with one BBU are the same as those in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs, except the configurations of the second BBU. This section describes the cabinet configurations in a base station configured with two BBUs.

Cabinet Configuration l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations but without backup power in a 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario.


141



Figure 2-84 Cabinet configurations of a base station without backup power

NOTE

The preceding figure shows two configurations: (A) and (B). (A) refers to the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H. (B) refers to the initial configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H expanded to 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1 TMC11H.

l

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by one battery cabinet. Figure 2-85 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by one battery cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


142


l


The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by two battery cabinets. Figure 2-86 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by two battery cabinets

l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power.


143



Figure 2-87 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power

The following table lists the cabinet configurations with different power inputs, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-33 Cabinet configurations Power Supply






No backup power

Single BBU: ≤ 5 U

≤ 6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs

Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U Two BBUs: ≤3U

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


144


Power Supply






Single BBU: ≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs


≤ 12 RFUs


≤ 6 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by one battery cabinet

Single BBU: ≤ 5 U


Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 5 U

≤ 12 RFUs



≤ 6 RFUs

Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U

Single BBU: ≤ 5 U

≤ 12 RFUs

≤ 6 RFUs


≤ 12 RFUs

Two BBUs: ≤3U

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)




Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by two battery cabinets




145


Power Supply






Single BBU: ≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H


l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H ≤ 12 RFUs

Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U -48 V DC

-

Single BBU: ≤ 9 U Two BBUs: ≤7U Single BBU: ≤ 20 U


≤ 6 RFUs

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 6 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

Two BBUs: ≤ 18 U

BTS3900A (Ver.B) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.

Cabinet Configuration Principles A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and six RRUs. Therefore, deploy more than one site if the RFUs and RRUs to be configured exceed the maximum configuration.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


146




When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-89 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


147



When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-90 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


148



Figure 2-91 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. NOTE

APM30Hs listed in the "Cabinet Configuration" column of the following table include the APM30H used in the BTS3900A (AC) and the extension APM30H used in the distributed base station.

Table 2-34 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply






No backup power

≤ 12 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 RFC

≤ 23 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+1 TMC11H

Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by one battery cabinet

≤ 12 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 23 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H

Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by

≤ 12 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs



149



Power Supply

-48 V DC





two battery cabinets

≤ 23 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs


-

≤9U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

≤ 20 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode BTS3900A l


l


When a site is supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-92 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when no backup power is required

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


150



Figure 2-93 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


151



Figure 2-94 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-95 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


152



The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-35 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station Power Supply






No backup power

≤ 10 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 RFC


≤ 10 U


≤ 21 U



≤ 10 U


≤ 21 U


-

≤ 18 U

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

-48 V DC

≤ 21 U


BTS3900A (Ver.C) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.

Cabinet Configuration Principles A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and six RRUs. Therefore, deploy more than one site if the RFUs and RRUs to be configured exceed the maximum configuration.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode BTS3900A A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When a site is supplied with 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


153




When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-97 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet

When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station with different Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


154



requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-98 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different carrier configurations and different requirements of space for customers are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-99 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


155



The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. NOTE

APM30Hs listed in the "Cabinet Configuration" column of the following table include the APM30H used in the BTS3900A (AC) and the extension APM30H used in the distributed base station.

Table 2-36 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply






No backup power

≤ 12 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 RFC

≤ 23 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs


Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by one battery cabinet

≤ 12 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs


≤ 23 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs


Initial configuratio n of backup power provided by two battery cabinets

≤ 12 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs


≤ 23 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs


-

≤9U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

≤ 20 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

-48 V DC

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-or Quadruple-Mode BTS3900A l


l


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


156



In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-100 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when no backup power is required

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-101 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


157



When four battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-102 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station when backup power is provided by four battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or QuadrupleMode base station with of different requirements of space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-103 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in the -48 V DC scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


158



The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station in the case different backup power capacities, space requirements of customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-37 Cabinet configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple-Mode base station Power Supply






No backup power

≤ 10 U

≤ 6 RFUs+6 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 RFC


≤ 10 U


≤ 21 U



≤ 10 U


≤ 21 U


-

≤ 18 U

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

-48 V DC

≤ 21 U


BTS3900A (Ver.D) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the BTS3900A with 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supplies in single-mode/dualmode and triple-mode, and quadruple-mode scenarios.

Cabinet Configuration Principles l

A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.

l

When a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2x60 W and three RRUs of 2x40 W.

Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station A single-mode or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H or TMC11H. When a site is supplied with the 110 or 220 V AC power and does not require backup power, the cabinet configurations for a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


159



space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-104 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when no backup power is required

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-105. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


160



Figure 2-105 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by one battery cabinet

When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-106 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

When a site is supplied with -48 V DC power, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


161



Figure 2-107 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-38 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station Power Supply






No backup power

≤5U

≤ 6 RFUs+9 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

Backup power provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuratio n

≤5U

≤ 16 U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤ 16 U


Backup power provided by two battery cabinets in the initial

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

≤5U



162



Power Supply



configuratio n

≤ 16 U



l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H

-48 V DC

-

≤9U

1 TMC11H + 1 RFC

≤ 20 U

2 TMC11Hs + 1 RFC

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-mode or Quadruple-mode Base Station The principles for configuring a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l

When a triple-mode or Quadruple-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, the BBU is installed in the position of BBU 0 in the following figure.

l

When two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

l

During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


163



Figure 2-108 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when no backup power is required

When one battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-109and Figure 2-110. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


164



Figure 2-109 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Figure 2-110 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by one IBBS700D/IBBS700T

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


165



When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-111 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station when backup power is provided by two battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruplemode base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


166



Figure 2-112 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in -48 V DC scenarios

The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station in the case of different backup power capacities, space required for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-39 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply






No backup power

≤3U

≤ 6 RFUs+9 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC


≤3U

≤ 14 U


1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

167



Power Supply





l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H

≤ 14 U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 TMC11H Backup power provided by two battery cabinets

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤3U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H

≤ 14 U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H -48 V DC

-

≤7U

1 TMC11H + 1 RFC

≤ 18 U

2 TMC11Hs + 1 RFC

BTS3900A (Ver.E) Configured with RFUs and RRUs If a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, different cabinet configurations can be used for the BTS3900A in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode scenario supplied with 110 V AC power, 220 V AC power, or -48 V DC power supply.


A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum configuration of 6 RFUs+15 RRUs or 12 RFUs+9 RRUs. One more site is required if more RFUs or RRUs need to be configured.

l

If a BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRU specifications supported by the BTS3900A are shown in the following table.

Table 2-40 RRU specifications supported by a BTS3900A configured with RFUs and RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

RF Module Configuration

RRU Specifications

6 RFUs+15 RRUs

6 RRUs (2x80 W)+ 9 RRUs (2x40 W)

12 RFUs+9 RRUs

9 RRUs (2x40 W)


168



Configuration principles in a single-, dual-, triple-, and quadruple-mode base stations l

In a single- or dual-mode base station, only one BBU is configured. In a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed in the 2 U space under the second.

l

A cabinet combination of one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by default. This cabinet combination can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption of the two BBUs cannot exceed 1200 W.

l

If two BBUs are configured during the initial deployment, both the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

l

During capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in an APM30H, the second BBU is installed in the APM30H. If there is no space, the second BBU is installed in a TMC11H. NOTE

The cabinet configurations in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station configured with one BBU are the same as those in a triple- or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs, except the configurations of the second BBU. This section describes the cabinet configurations in a base station configured with two BBUs.

Cabinet Configuration l

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations but without backup power in a 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario. Figure 2-113 Cabinet configurations of a base station without backup power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


169


l


The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by one battery cabinet. Figure 2-114 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by one battery cabinet

l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station with different space for customer equipment, carrier configurations, and backup power provided by two battery cabinets.


170



Figure 2-115 Cabinet configurations of a base station with backup power provided by two battery cabinets

l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power.


171




The following table lists the cabinet configurations with different power inputs, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations. Table 2-41 Cabinet configurations

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply






No backup power

Single BBU: ≤ 5 U

≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

Two BBUs: ≤3U


172


Power Supply






Single BBU: ≤ 5 U

≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs

≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs


≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs


≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs


Two BBUs: ≤3U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by one battery cabinet

Single BBU: ≤ 5 U



≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs



≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Single BBU: ≤ 5 U


≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs

Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U Backup power provided by two battery cabinets



≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs

Two BBUs: ≤3U



173


Power Supply






Single BBU: ≤ 5 U

≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs



≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs


l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts +1 TMC11H ≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs

Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U -48 V DC

-

Single BBU: ≤ 8 U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts +1 TMC11H


≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 6 RFUs +15 RRUs

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs +9 RRUs

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

Two BBUs: ≤6U Single BBU: ≤ 9 U Two BBUs: ≤7U Single BBU: ≤ 19 U Two BBUs: ≤ 17 U Single BBU: ≤ 20 U Two BBUs: ≤ 18 U

2.3.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.B), a BTS3900A (Ver.C), a BTS3900A (Ver.D), Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


174



and a BTS3900A (Ver.E). The configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and crosssectional areas of power cables in a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.D) are the same as those in the BTS3900A (Ver.D).

Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in base stations with different power supplies and configurations. NOTE

l The power cables purchased at local markets must comply with local regulations. l P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.

AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-42 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply


Requirements for the Input Power Cable


220 V AC threephase

1x25 A/3 P

2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


1x50 A/1 P

6 mm2(0.009 in.2)


1x50 A/2 P

DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


175



Table 2-43 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs Product Configuration




l 0 to 6 RFUs

1x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a group of DC input power cables

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

l 1 BBU l Power of the BBU and transmission equipment ≤ 650 W

DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-01 and a DCDU-03B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l

The DCDU-01 provides power for the DCDU-03C in the TMC11H (power cabinet) and RFUs and FAN 01A in the RFC. Table 2-43 describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-01.

l

The DCDU-03B provides power for RRUs only. The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-03B.

Table 2-44 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Product Configuration(1)


Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)(4)


3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W)

1x63 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)


1x63 A/1 P

3 RRUs (power ≤ 300 W) + 3 RRUs (power ≤ 400 W)

1x80 A/1 P


1x63 A/1 P




176



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


If an AC heater is installed when -48 V DC power is used, one more AC power input must be added. In this scenario, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater are described in the following table. Table 2-45 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables of an AC heater Power Supply




220 V AC singlephase or 220 V AC three-phase

1x10 A/1 P

1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in base stations with different power supplies and configurations. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


177



NOTE


AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-46 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in AC input scenarios Power Supply




220 V AC threephase

1x25 A/3 P

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


1x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)


1x63 A/2 P

DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A configured with RFUs but without RRUs. Table 2-47 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs but without RRUs Product Configuration(1)

Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)

Requirements for the Input Power Cable(3)



1x160 A/1 P

35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen (LSZH), a group of DC input power cables

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


16 mm2(0.025 in.2), two groups of DC input power cables

l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


178







1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P


l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs


l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of the BBU and transmission equipment ≤ 650 W l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 1 to 3 highpower RFUs l 0 or 1 BBU l Power of the BBU and transmission equipment ≤ 650 W

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


179







1x63 A/1 P




NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l


DC Input Scenario Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900A uses -48 V DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-11A and a DCDU-11B are used to provide power for the equipment in the base station. l

The DCDU-11A provides power for the RFUs and FAN 01B in the RFC. Table 2-47 describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-11A.

l


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


180



Table 2-48 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario configured with RFUs and RRUs Product Configuration(1)





1x63 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)


1x63 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P





1x80 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


181



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l




l


l







1x10 A/1 P

1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

110 V AC dual-livewire Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


182



Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900A (Ver.D) which has the peak output power. NOTE


AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-50 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply

Number of PSUs

Minimum Requirements for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker




4 or 5 PSUs


≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

2 or 3 PSUs



5 PSUs


4 PSUs

1x80 A/1 P

3 PSUs

1x63 A/1 P

5 PSUs


4 PSUs

1x80 A/2 P

220 V AC single-phase

110 V AC or 120 V AC duallive-wire

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) Three wires (L1, L2, and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a


183



Power Supply

Number of PSUs



3 PSUs

1x63 A/2 P

cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2)



Minimum Requirem ents for the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker(2)



l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs

1x160 A/1 P

35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, a group of DC input power cables

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)



2x63 A/1 P

l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W


1x100 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2), a groupof DC input power cables

l 0 to 2 BBUs l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


184







1x100 A/1 P



2x63 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P


1 x 160 A/1 P




1x63 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P


1x63 A/1 P


l 0 to 2 BBUs

l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU

l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



185



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l



The DCDU-12A provides power for the RFUs and FAN 01C in the RFC. Table 2-51describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12A.

l



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)






1x63 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)


1x63 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P



186







1x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



187







1 x 160 A/1 P




1 x 160 A/1 P





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



188



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l




l


l







1x10 A/1 P

1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)



189



Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured base station that has the peak output power.

AC Input NOTE


The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A. Table 2-54 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC input scenario Power Supply

Number of PSUs





4 or 5


≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

2 or 3



5


4

1x80 A/1 P

3

1x63 A/1 P

5


4

1x80 A/2 P


110 V/120 V AC dual-livewire

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) Three wires (L1, L2, and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation


190



Power Supply

Number of PSUs



3

1x63 A/2 P

layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2)







1x160 A/1 P


≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)



2x63 A/1 P



1x100 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P


l 0 to 2 BBUs l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


191







1x100 A/1 P



2x63 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P


1 x 160 A/1 P




1x63 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P


1x63 A/1 P


l 0 to 2 BBUs

l 0 or 1 BBU l Power consumption of transmission equipment ≤ 350 W l 4 to 6 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU

l 0 to 3 high-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 4 to 6 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU l 0 to 3 low-power RFUs l 0 BBU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



192



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l



The DCDU-12A provides power for the RFUs and FAN 01D in the RFC. Table 2-55 describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for the DCDU-12A.

l



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)






1x160 A/1 P

35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, two groups of DC input power cables

≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)


1x160 A/1 P



193








1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P



1x160 A/1 P




1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P




Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



194



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l




l


l







1x10 A/1 P

1.5 mm2 (0.002 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)



195



2.3.4 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900A This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900A (Ver.B), a BTS3900A (Ver.C), a BTS3900A (Ver.D), and a BTS3900A (Ver.E) supplied with different power. The power distribution scheme of a reused base station with the same capability as a BTS3900A (Ver.D) is the same as that of the BTS3900A (Ver.D).

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900A (Ver.B) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.

Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power supply system (EPS) in the APM30H. The EPS converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs: l

One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU).

l

One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.

The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-117 and Figure 2-118show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-58 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE


Figure 2-117 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


196



Figure 2-118 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H when a BTS3900A is supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power

Table 2-58 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Power Supply

Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the EPS

Specifications of the AC Output Circuit Breaker

Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker or Fuse

220 V AC single-phase or 220 V AC three-phase

3x16 A (MCB(1))

l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)

l BAT(2): 1x100 A (MCB)

l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)

l RFC 1: 1x80 A (MCB)

110 V AC dual-live-wire

1x40 A (MCB)



l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)

l TMC: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU: 2x15 A (FUSE) l IBBS: 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM(4): 4x5 A (FUSE)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


197



NOTE

(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) FUSE: Fuse (4) TM: Transmission equipment

When AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-117 and Figure 2-118. The DCDU-01 distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-03C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. NOTE

If DRFUs are configured for RFCs, 12 DRFUs and two RFCs are required.

Figure 2-119 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-59 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H. Figure 2-119 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


198



Table 2-59 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Cabinet

Specifications of the DC Output Circuit Breaker

RFC

l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB) l BBU (reserved): 1x12 A (MCB) l Reserved: 1x12 A (MCB)+1x25 A (MCB)

TMC11H

l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 7x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios -48 V DC power in a BTS3900A is directly supplied to the DCDU-01 in the RFC, which then distributes the power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet. The DCDU-01 can supply a 25 A DC input with the maximum power of 800 W to the DCDU-03C in the TMC11H, which then distributes the power to BBU, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet. Figure 2-120 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-60 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H. Figure 2-120 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


199



Table 2-60 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power Cabinet


RFC

l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB) l BBU (reserved): 1x12 A (MCB) l Reserved: 1x12 A (MCB) l TMC: 1x25 A (MCB)

TMC11H

l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l Transmission equipment: 6x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900A (Ver.C) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.

Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in the APM30H. The EPU converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs: l


l


The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-121 and Figure 2-122 show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-61 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


200





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


201




Specifications of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker for the PSU




3x20 A (MCB(1))

Heater and SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)

l BAT(2): 1x160 A (MCB)


1x63 A (MCB)

l RFC 1: 1x125 A (MCB) l RFC 2: 1x125 A (MCB)

l Heater: 1x15 A (MCB) l SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)

l TMC: 1x30 A (MCB) l BBU_0: 1x25 A (MCB) l BBU_1: 1x25 A (MCB) l TM(3): 2x5 A (FUSE(4)) l TM or TMC: 1x15 A (FUSE) l FAN or TEC(5): 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM or EMUA: 1x15 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE)

NOTE

(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) TM: Transmission equipment (4) FUSE: Fuse (5) TEC: Thermoelectric cooler

When AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-121 and Figure 2-122. The DCDU-11A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-11C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. NOTE

If DRFUs are configured for RFCs, 12 DRFUs and two RFCs are required.

Figure 2-123 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-62 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the RFC and TMC11H.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


202



Figure 2-123 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A

Table 2-62 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Cabinet


RFC

l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB) l Reserved: 3x25 A (MCB)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


203



Cabinet


TMC11H

l TM: 2x25 A (MCB)+2x12 A (MCB)+2x6 A (MCB) l TM or BBU: 2x25 A (MCB) l TM or EMUA: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, external power is directly supplied to the RFC. -48 V DC power is directly supplied to the DC junction box in the RFC, which then distributes the power to the DCDU-11A in the RFC and the DCDU-11C in the TMC. The DCDU-11A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-11C distributes power to the BBU, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. Figure 2-124 shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-62 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and AC inputs in the RFC and TMC11H.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


204



Figure 2-124 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900A (Ver.D) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.

Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in the APM30H. The EPU converts one AC power input into two AC power outputs: l


l


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


205



The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-125 and Figure 2-126 show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-63 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE




Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


206








2x40 A+1x25 A (MCB(1))

Heater and SOU: 1x16 A /2 P(MCB)

l BAT(2): 1x125 A/2 P (MCB)


1x100 A/2 P (MCB)

l RFC 1: 1x125 A (MCB) l Heater: 1x16 A (MCB)


l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)

l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l BBU_0: 1x30 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU_1: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM(4): 4x30 A (FUSE) l TMC(5): 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS(6): 1x30 A (FUSE)

NOTE

(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) FUSE: Fuse (4) TM: Transmission equipment (5) TMC: TMC11H (6) IBBS: Fan in the IBBS200D/IBBS700D or TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS700T

When AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-125 and Figure 2-126. The DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-12C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the RFC and TMC11H.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


207



Figure 2-127 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A

Table 2-64 Specifications of the fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an AC-powered BTS3900A Cabinet

Specifications of the DC Output Fuse

RFC

l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l Reserved: 3x30 A (FUSE)

TMC11H

l TM: 7x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


208



Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, external power is directly supplied to the RFC. -48 V DC power is directly supplied to the DC junction box in the RFC, which then distributes the power to the DCDU-12A in the RFC and the DCDU-12C in the TMC. The DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in the RFC. The DCDU-12C distributes power to the BBU, transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H. Table 2-64 lists the specifications of the fuses and AC inputs in the RFC and TMC11H. Figure 2-128 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H when a BTS3900A is supplied with -48 V DC power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


209



Power Distribution Scheme in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900A cabinets supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.

Power Distribution Schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC Scenarios If 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, the AC power is converted to DC power and distributed by the embedded power subrack unit (EPU) in an APM30H. The EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l


l


The AC power input is converted by PSUs into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, RFC, TMC11H, and other equipment. Figure 2-129 and Figure 2-130 show the power distribution schemes in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios, respectively. Table 2-65lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. NOTE

The power distribution scheme in a 220 V AC three-phase scenario is the same as that in a 220 V AC single-phase scenario, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by short-circuiting bars in a 220 V AC three-phase scenario.

Figure 2-129 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H in a BTS3900A supplied with 220 V AC single-phase power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


210



Figure 2-130 Power distribution scheme for an APM30H in a BTS3900A supplied with 110 V AC dual-live-wire power

Table 2-65 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in an APM30H in an BTS3900A supplied with AC power Power Supply


Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the AC Output



5x32 A/1 P (MCB(1))

Heater and SOU: 1x16 A /2 P (MCB)

l RFC 1: 1x100 A (MCB) l RFC 2: 1x100 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l BBU_0: 1x30 A (FUSE(2)) l BBU_1: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM(3): 4x30 A (FUSE)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


211



Power Supply





5x32 A/1 P (MCB)

Heater and SOU: 1x16 A /2 P (MCB)

l TMC(4): 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS(5): 1x30 A (FUSE)

NOTE

(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) FUSE: Fuse (3) TM: Transmission equipment (4) TMC: TMC11H (5) IBBS: Fan in an IBBS200D/IBBS300D or TEC in an IBBS200T/IBBS300T

If AC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, an APM30H distributes three DC outputs to RFC 1, RFC 2, and a TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-129 and Figure 2-130. A DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in an RFC. A DCDU-12C distributes power to the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in a TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for an RFC and a TMC11H. The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in an RFC and a TMC11H.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


212



Figure 2-131 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in a BTS3900A supplied with AC power

Table 2-66 Specifications of the fuses in the RFC and TMC11H in an BTS3900A supplied with AC power Cabinet Type


RFC

l RFU 0 to RFU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l Reserved: 3x30 A (FUSE)

TMC11H


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


213



Power Distribution Scheme in a -48 V DC Scenario If -48 V DC power is supplied to a BTS3900A, external power is directly supplied to an RFC. -48 V DC power is directly supplied to the DC junction box in an RFC, which then distributes the power to the DCDU-12A in the RFC and the DCDU-12C in a TMC. A DCDU-12A distributes power to the RFUs, fan assembly, and other components in an RFC. A DCDU-12C distributes power to the BBU, transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in a TMC11H. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for an RFC and a TMC11H. Table 2-66 lists the specifications of the fuses and AC inputs in an RFC and a TMC11H. Figure 2-132 Power distribution scheme for the RFC and TMC11H in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


214



2.3.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900A This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900A.

Cable List For cables in a BTS3900A, see the following sections: l

BTS3900A (Ver.B) Cable List for a BTS3900A (Ver.B)

l

BTS3900A (Ver.C) Cable List for a BTS3900A (Ver.C)

l

BTS3900A (Ver.D) Cable List for a BTS3900A (Ver.D)

l

BTS3900A (Ver.E) Cable List for BTS3900A (Ver.E)

Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900A, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. The following table lists the links to these topics. Table 2-67 Cable connections

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Bas e Sta tio n







BT S39 00A (Ver .B)

BTS3900A (Ver.B) Power Cable Connection s

BTS3900A (Ver.B) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s


Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connection s


RF Cable Connection s

BT S39 00A (Ver .C)

BTS3900A (Ver.C) Power Cable Connection s

BTS3900A (Ver.C) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s

BT S39 00A (Ver .D)

BTS3900A (Ver.D) Power Cable Connection s

BTS3900A (Ver.D) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s


215



Bas e Sta tio n



BT S39 00A (Ver .E)

BTS3900A (Ver.E) Power Cable Connection s

BTS3900A (Ver.E) Monitoring Signal Cable Connection s





2.4 BTS3900AL This section describes cabinets, cabinet applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900AL.

2.4.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900AL A BTS3900AL, outdoor macro base station, supports the following cabinets: BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, and TMC11H (Ver.D). The following table lists the cabinets supported by a BTS3900AL. Table 2-68 Cabinets supported by a BTS3900AL Cabinet Name

Cabinet Description

Components in a Cabinet

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

The BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, basic cabinet in a BTS3900AL, uses a heat exchanger to dissipate heat and houses the BBU, power equipment, RFUs, transmission equipment, and storage batteries. Different power equipment can be installed in BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinets to support the AC or DC power supply.

For details, see 3.15.2 Components of BTS3900AL Cabinets.

l The BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet supplied with AC power is referred to as a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. l The BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet supplied with DC power is referred to as a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


216



Cabinet Name

Cabinet Description

Components in a Cabinet

l IBBS700D or IBBS700T

The battery cabinets provide backup power for a base station.

l For details, see Components of an IBBS700D.


l For details, see Components of an IBBS700T. l For details, see 3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Ds. l For details, see 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts.

TMC11H (Ver.D)

The TMC11H (Ver.D), transmission cabinet in a BTS3900AL, is installed when more transmission space is required to provide power supplies and installation space for transmission equipment.

For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D).

The following figure shows the exteriors of a BTS3900AL, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, and TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets. Figure 2-133 Exteriors of a BTS3900AL, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, and TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


217



The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS300D (Ver.A) and an IBBS300T (Ver.A). IBBS300D (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300D and IBBS300T (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300T in this section. Figure 2-134 Exteriors of an IBBS300D and an IBBS300T

2.4.2 Cabinet Applications Supported by a BTS3900AL Various cabinets can be configured for a BTS3900AL to meet different requirements for RF module configurations, backup power capacity, and spaces for customer equipment. A BTS3900AL can be configured with RFUs or RFUs and RRUs.

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs but Without RRUs When a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) is configured with RFUs but without RRUs, the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) can be configured as a single-, dual-, quadruple-, or triple-mode base station and supports different combinations of cabinets.


A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of 18 RFUs. If there are more than 18 RFUs, one or more sites need to be added.

l

A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet, and the two cabinets must be installed side by side with the BTS3900AL DC cabinet on the right.

l

A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.

l

A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of two IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts.

l

A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one TMC11H (Ver.D).

l

If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS700D/IBBS700T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D), are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets should be positioned on the left, and the basic cabinet on the right.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


218



Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station One BBU is configured in a single- or dual-mode base station. In a BTS3900AL configured with 6 to 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured and the BBU is installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. In a BTS3900AL configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet are configured and the BBU is installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-135 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and backup power is not required.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


219



Figure 2-136 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power is not required

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required. Figure 2-137 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when short-term backup power is required

Figure 2-138 and Figure 2-139 show the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


220



Figure 2-138 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


221




The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-69 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply


Space for Customer Equipme nt

RF Configur ation


-48 V DC

N/A

≤ 11 U

≤ 9 RFUs

One BTS3900AL DC cabinet


No backup power

≤ 11 U

≤ 9 RFUs

One BTS3900AL AC cabinet

≤ 22 U

≤ 18 RFUs

1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet


222



Power Supply



RF Configur ation


Short-term backup power

≤4U

≤ 9 RFUs


≤ 15 U

≤ 9 RFUs

1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 TMC11H (Ver.D)

Medium- to long-term backup power

≤ 11 U

≤ 9 RFUs

1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts

≤ 22 U

≤ 18 RFUs

1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet

NOTICE (1) When short-term backup power is required, a pack of four storage batteries needs to be installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The prerequisites for configuring the built-in storage batteries are as follows: l

The ambient temperature in the cabinet is below 40°C (104°F).

l

The storage batteries must be used in the first class power grid. In the first class power grid, the average power-off time of AC power supply every month is less than ten hours.

l

It is recommended that a pack of Northstar 100 Ah storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.

l

The maximum power consumption of a base station is 10,000 W.

(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet. (4) When an IBBS700D or IBBS300D is configured, reduce the ambient temperature to 40°C (104°F). When IBBS700T or IBBS300T is configured, the ambient temperature can remain unchanged.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


223



Cabinet Configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple- Mode Base Station A triple- or quadruple-mode base station can be configured with one or two BBUs. When a triple- or quadruple- mode base station is configured with one BBU, cabinet configurations in the triple- or quadruple-mode base station are the same as those in a single- or dual-mode base station. When a triple- or quadruple- mode BTS3900AL is configured with two BBUs and 6 to 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet is configured and the two BBUs are installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. When a triple- or quadruple- mode BTS3900AL is configured with more than 9 RFUs, one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet are configured and the two BBUs are installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. In the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station are the same as those of a single- or dual-mode base station, which are listed in Table 2-70. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-140 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and backup power is not required.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


224



Figure 2-141 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when backup power is not required

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required. Figure 2-142 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when shortterm backup power is required

Figure 2-143 shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


225



Figure 2-143 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when medium- to long-term backup power is provided by an IBBS700D or IBBS700T

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


226




The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-70 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply



RF Configur ation


-48 V DC

N/A

≤9U

≤ 9 RFUs



No backup power

≤9U

≤ 9 RFUs


≤ 20 U

≤ 18 RFUs

1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet


227



Power Supply



RF Configur ation



≤2U

≤ 9 RFUs


≤ 13 U

≤ 9 RFUs



≤9U

≤ 9 RFUs


≤ 20 U

≤ 18 RFUs

1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+1 IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet 1 BTS3900AL AC cabinet+2 IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 BTS3900AL DC cabinet



l


l

It is recommended that a 100 Ah pack of Nothstar storage batteries be used to meet the high-current discharge requirements.

l


(2) When medium- to long-duration backup power is used, an external battery cabinet needs to be configured. It is recommended that the battery cabinet be configured with a minimum of 300 Ah, that is, a minimum of two 150 Ah battery packs. (3) A base station cannot be configured with both the built-in storage batteries and the external battery cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


228



BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Configured with RFUs and RRUs When a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) can be configured as a single-, dual-, quadruple-, or triple-mode base station and supports different combinations of cabinets.


A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of 9 RFUs and 12 RRUs and with a maximum of one BTS3900AL AC cabinet or one BTS3900AL DC cabinet.

l

A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.

l

A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of two IBBS300Ds or IBBS300Ts.

l

A BTS3900AL can be configured with a maximum of one TMC11H (Ver.D).

l

If auxiliary cabinets, such as the battery cabinet IBBS700D/IBBS700T/IBBS300D/ IBBS300T or transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D), are required during an initial site construction, the auxiliary cabinets should be positioned on the left, and the basic cabinet on the right.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-145 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and no backup power is required. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


229




The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


230



Figure 2-147 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when short-term backup power is required

Figure 2-148 and Figure 2-149 show the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


231





The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-71 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply


Space for Customer Equipment


-48 V DC

N/A

≤ 11 U



232



Power Supply





No backup power

≤ 11 U



≤4U


≤ 15 U



≤ 11 U




l


l


l



Cabinet Configurations of a Triple- or Quadruple- Mode Base Station If a triple- or quadruple- mode base station is configured with two BBUs, both of them are installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet or BTS3900AL DC cabinet. If a triple- or quadruple- mode base station is configured with one BBU, a filler panel should be installed in the position illustrated by BBU 1 in the following figure. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


233



In the case of different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station are the same as those of a single- or dual-mode base station, which are listed in Table 2-72. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different requirements of space for customer equipment and RF configurations when -48 V DC power is supplied. Figure 2-150 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when -48 V DC power is supplied

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and no backup power is required. Figure 2-151 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when no backup power is required

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


234



The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and short-term backup power is required. Figure 2-152 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station when shortterm backup power is required

Figure 2-153 and Figure 2-154 show the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruplemode base station in the case of different space for customer equipment and RF configurations when 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied and medium- to long-term backup power is required.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


235





The following table describes the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station with different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and RF configurations. Table 2-72 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple- mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply




-48 V DC

N/A

≤9U



236



Power Supply





No backup power

≤9U



≤2U


≤ 13 U



≤9U




l


l


l



2.4.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900AL (Ver.A) which has the peak output power. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


237



NOTE


AC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when AC power is supplied to a BTS3900AL. Table 2-73 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables Power Supply

Product Configuration

Minimum Requirementsf or the UpperLevel Circuit Breaker




7 PSUs+1 SOU

1x63 A/3 P (recommended)

10 mm2(0.015 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

4 to 6 PSUs+1 SOU

1x40 A/3 P

4 to 7 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU

1x63 A/3 P

7 PSUs+1 SOU


6 PSUs+1 SOU

1x125 A/1 P

5 PSUs+1 SOU

1x100 A/1 P

4 PSUs+1 SOU

1x80 A/1 P

6 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU

1x125 A/1 P

5 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU

1x125 A/1 P

4 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU

1x100 A/1 P

7 PSUs+1 SOU


6 PSUs+1 SOU

1x125 A/2 P

5 PSUs+1 SOU

1x100 A/2 P

4 PSUs+1 SOU

1x80 A/2 P



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

35 mm2(0.054 in.2)

35 mm2(0.054 in.2)


238



DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when DC power is supplied to a BTS3900AL. Table 2-74 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables Power Supply

Power Equipme nt

Product Configurati on(1)

Minimum Requirement s for the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)



-48 V DC

PDU03D01_INPUT 0

9 high-power RFUs

2x100 A/1 P (recommended )

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

6 high-power RFUs and 3 low-power RFUs

2x100 A/1 P

25 mm2or 0.039 in. 2(low smoke zero halogen)

3 high-power RFUs and 6 low-power RFUs

2x100 A/1 P

9 low-power RFUs

1x125 A/1 P

12 RRUs (≤ 560 W)

2x125 A/1 P

9 RRUs (≤ 560 W)

2x100 A/1 P

6 RRUs (≤ 560 W)


PDU03D01_INPUT 1

2x63 A/1 P

2x63 A/1 P

PDU03D01_INPUT 2

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

3 RRUs (≤ 560 W)

1x63 A/1 P

Transmission equipment and two BBUs



239



NOTE


If high-power RFUs or RRUs and low-power RFUs or RRUs are configured in one base station, the specifications of the circuit breakers are based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs or RRUs.

l

If the customer power supply is sufficient, you are advised to configure the circuit breakers based on the full configuration of high-power RFUs or RRUs. If the originally configured circuit breakers do not meet the requirements for the full configuration of high-power RFUs or RRUs, replace the circuit breakers during base station capacity expansion.

l


l




l


2.4.4 Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) This section describes the power distribution schemes for BTS3900AL cabinets.

Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900AL AC Cabinet When a BTS3900AL AC cabinet is supplied with 220 V AC or 110 V AC power, the input AC power is distributed by the PDU05A-01 and converted into DC power by the ETP48400 in the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The DC power is distributed by the DCDU-12C to components in the cabinet. After going through the PDU05A-01, the AC power input is divided into five AC power outputs: l

One AC output is connected to the junction box on the right side of the cabinet door, and divided into four AC outputs, which are then provided for the HAU01A-01.

l

Three AC power outputs are connected to the PSUs (R4850G2) and converted by the PSUs (R4850G2) into DC power outputs, which are then provided for the DCDU-12C and storage batteries.

l

One AC output is provided for the SOU.

Figure 2-155 shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL AC cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power. The power distribution scheme in a 220 V AC singlephase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supply scenario is the same as that in a 220 V AC three-phase power supply scenario. The difference among the power distribution schemes for the three types of power inputs resides in the configuration of short-circuiting bars, as shown in Figure 2-156. NOTE

When RFUs and RRUs are configured, LOAD3 and LOAD5 ports on the ETP48400 provide DC power for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


240



Figure 2-155 Power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 220 V AC three-phase power

Table 2-75lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses. Table 2-75 Specifications of circuit breakers Power Distribution Device

Specifications of AC Output Circuit Breakers

Specifications of DC Output Circuit Breakers or fuse

PDU05A-01

l PSU1/5: 1x40 A

-

l PSU2/6: 1x40 A l PSU3/4/7: 1x63 A l HEATER: 1x25 A l SOU: 1x10 A ETP48400

-

l DCDU-12C 0#: 1x100 A l DCDU-12C 1#: 1x200 A l Storage battery: 1x400 A

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

DCDU-12C 0#

-

10x30 A

DCDU-12C 1#

-

10x30 A


241



Figure 2-156 Configuration of short-circuiting bars

Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900AL DC Cabinet A BTS3900AL DC cabinet is supplied with external DC power, which is distributed by the PDU03D-01 to the DCDU-12C. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. NOTE

When RFUs and RRUs are configured, INPUT1 terminals on the PDU03D-01 provide DC power for the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.

Figure 2-157 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900AL DC cabinet

Table 2-76lists the specifications of DC output fuse. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


242



Table 2-76 Specifications of DC Output Fuse Power Distribution Device

Specifications of DC Output Fuse

DCDU-12C 0#

10x30 A

DCDU-12C 1#

10x30 A

2.4.5 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900AL This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900AL.

Cable List For cables in a BTS3900AL, see BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Cable List.

Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900AL, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Table 2-77 Cable connections Power Cable Connectio ns


Transmissi on Cable Connectio ns

BBU Interconne ction Signal Cable Connectio ns



BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Power Cable Connections

BTS3900AL (Ver.A) Monitoring Signal Cable Connections

Transmissio n Cable Connections

Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connections

CPRI Cable Connections

RF Cable Connections

2.5 DBS3900 This section describes cabinets/racks, cabinet/rack applications, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, and cable connections for a DBS3900.

2.5.1 Cabinets and Racks Supported by a DBS3900 DBS3900 is a distributed base station, which consists of various types of cabinets and racks, including APM30H series cabinets, TMC11H series cabinets, battery cabinets, OMB series cabinets, IMB03, IFS06, IBC10,and INS12. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


243



Cabinets and Racks Huawei provides various types of cabinets and racks to meet different requirements for power distribution, module configurations, and spaces for customer equipment in a DBS3900, as listed in the following table. Table 2-78 Cabinets and racks supported by a DBS3900 Cabinet/ Rack Type

Cabinet/Rack Name

Cabinet/Rack Description

Cabinet/Rack Configuration

APM30H(1) series cabinets

l APM30H (Ver.B)

The APM30H series cabinets supply AC power to components in the cabinet and other cabinets.

l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.B).

l APM30H (Ver.C) l APM30H (Ver.D) l APM30H(V er.E)

TMC11H(2) series cabinets

l TMC11H (Ver.B) l TMC11H (Ver.C) l TMC11H (Ver.D) l TMC11H (Ver.E)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in an APM30H (Ver.E).

The TMC11H series cabinets can be used as a power cabinet to supply DC power to components in the cabinet or can be used as a transmission cabinet to provide space for transmission equipment.

l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D). l For details, see Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E).


244



Cabinet/ Rack Type

Cabinet/Rack Name



IBBS(3)seri es cabinets


The IBBS series cabinets are battery cabinets, providing backup power for a base station.

l For details, see Components of an IBBS700Dand Components of an IBBS700T.

l IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B).

l IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C)

l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C).

l IBBS200D (Ver.D) or IBBS200T (Ver.D)

l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D).

l IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E)

l For details, see Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)and Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E).

l IBBS300D (Ver.A) or IBBS300T (Ver.A)

l For details, see 3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Dsand 3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts.

l

l For details, see 3.10.2 Components in an IBBS20D.

IBBS20D(9) (Ver.A) (shortened to IBBS20D in this section)

l 3.11 IBBS20L Description

l IBBS20L(10 )

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

OMB(4)seri es cabinets

l OMB

IMB03(5)

IMB03

l OMB (Ver.C)

The OMB series cabinets are used in outdoor distributed base stations to provide AC and DC power.

For details, see 3.17.2 Components in OMBs.

The IMB03 is used in an indoor distributed base station to provide AC and DC power.

For details, see 3.18.2 Components in IMB03 Cabinets.


245



Cabinet/ Rack Type

Cabinet/Rack Name



IFS06(6)

IFS06

l An IFS06 is indoor floormounted rack, which applies to centralized RRU installation scenarios.

l For details about the components in an IFS06, see 3.19.2 Components of an IFS06. l For details about the components and configurations of an ICR, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.

l The combination of an IMB03 and an IFS06, which is called indoor centralized rack (ICR), can support the centralized installation of a distributed base station. 19-inch rack

IBC10(8)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

l INS12(7) l 19-inch rack provided by a customer

IBC10

An INS12 can provide an installation space of 12 U high for 19-inch wide equipment.

For details, see 3.20.2 Components of an INS12.

The IBC10 supplies DC power to components in itself and other cabinets.

For details, see 3.22.2 Components in IBC10s.


246



NOTE

(1) APM30H: Advanced power module with heat exchanger (2) TMC11H: Transmission cabinet with heat exchanger (3) IBBS200T/IBBS300T/IBBS700T: Integrated battery backup system with TEC; IBBS200D/ IBBS300D/IBBS700D: Integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation (4) OMB is short for outdoor mini box. (5) IMB03 is short for indoor mini box 03. (6) IFS06 is short for indoor floor installation support 06. (7) INS12 is short for indoor normal support 12. (8) IBC10 is short for the indoor BBU cabinet 10. (9) IBBS20D is short for the integrated battery backup system with direct ventilation. (10) IBBS20L is short for the integrated battery backup system with lithium batteries.

Exteriors of Cabinets and Racks The following figure shows the exteriors of an APM30H series cabinet and a TMC11H series cabinet. Figure 2-158 Exteriors of an APM30H and a TMC11H

The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS700D and an IBBS700T.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


247



Figure 2-159 Exteriors of an IBBS700D and an IBBS700T

The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS200D and an IBBS200T. Figure 2-160 Exteriors of an IBBS200D and an IBBS200T

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


248



The following figure shows the exteriors of an IBBS300D (Ver.A) and an IBBS300T (Ver.A). IBBS300D (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300D and IBBS300T (Ver.A) is shortened to IBBS300T in this section. Figure 2-161 Exteriors of an IBBS300D and an IBBS300T

The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20D.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


249



Figure 2-162 Exterior of an IBBS20D

The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20L. Figure 2-163 Exterior of an IBBS20L

The following figure shows the exteriors of an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


250



Figure 2-164 Exteriors of an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C)

The following figure shows the exteriors of an IMB03, an IFS06, and an INS12. Figure 2-165 Exteriors of an IMB03, an IFS06, and an INS12

The following figure shows the exterior of an IBC10.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


251



Figure 2-166 Exterior of an IBC10

2.5.2 Application Scenarios of the DBS3900 (Using a BBU3900 or BBU3910) This section describes application scenarios of the DBS3900 that uses a BBU3900 or BBU3910 as well as different types of cabinets, including the outdoor installation scenarios with AC power supply, outdoor installation scenarios with DC power supply, indoor installation scenarios with AC power supply, and indoor installation scenarios with DC power supply.

Outdoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the outdoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with AC power.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


252



Table 2-79 BBU installation scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

BBU Installation Position

Scenario Description

Remarks

APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E)

BBU 0 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E), BBU 1 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or a TMC11H (Ver.E), and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) supplies power to the BBUs, and the APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power to the RRUs.

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E)

APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)

BBU 0 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D), BBU 1 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or a TMC11H (Ver.D), and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies power to the BBUs, and the APM30H (Ver.D) supplies power to the RRUs.

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D)

APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B)

The BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B) and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.C) or APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

The same configuration principles apply to the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.C). For details, see BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C), which uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.

TP48600A

The BBU is installed in a TP48600A and the RRUs are installed remotely. The TP48600A supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in a TP48600A

OMB

The BBU is installed in an OMB and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB


253





Remarks

OMB (Ver.C)

The BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

Configuration Principles of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900 The overall principles for configuring a DBS3900 are as follows: l

When being configured with an APM30H (Ver.E), a DBS3900 can support a maximum of 21 RRUs. When being configured with an APM30H (Ver.D), a DBS3900 can support a maximum of 15 RRUs. When being configured with an OMB, a DBS3900 can support only one RRU. When being configured with an OMB (Ver.C), a DBS3900 can support a maximum of 6 RRUs. When being configured with other cabinets, a DBS3900 can support a maximum of 12 RRUs.

l

During initial deployment, the basic cabinet is positioned on the right and the auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet, if required, are positioned on the left. During capacity expansion, unless otherwise stated, the original cabinets remain in the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right side of the original cabinets.

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an APM30H cabinet are as follows: l

An APM30H can be installed side by side with only one TMC11H, or it can be stacked on a maximum of two IBBS200Ds, IBBS200Ts, IBBS300Ds, or IBBS300Ts. (An IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T can be stacked on another cabinet of the same type.)

l

An APM30H or TMC11H can be installed on the ground or stacked on an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.

l

An APM30H (Ver.D) can be installed side by side with only one IBBS700D or IBBS700T.

l

If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the battery cabinet or positioned on the left side of the battery cabinet.

The principles for configuring the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TP48600A are as follows: l

A TP48600A can be installed together with a TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) side by side.

l

A TP48600A can be installed together with an IBB300D, IBBS300T, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T side by side.

Configuration Principles of BBUs in Cabinets Used by a DBS3900 l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

When a DBS3900 is configured with an APM or TMC series cabinet and a TP48600A cabinet, the DBS3900 can be a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254



When a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB series cabinet, the DBS3900 can be only a single- or dual-mode base station. l

A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the basic cabinet.

l

When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with one BBU, the BBU is installed in the basic cabinet.

l

When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station is configured with two BBUs: –

If two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

–

If there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H during capacity expansion, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) An APM30H can supply power to a maximum of 21 RRUs. The following table lists the mapping between the number of RRUs and power equipment. Table 2-80 Mapping between the number of RRUs and power equipment Number of RRUs

Power Equipment

Description

1st to 6th RRUs

EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 (LOAD9 to LOAD14 ports)

-

7th to 15th RRUs

3 PDU03D-02s

One PDU03D-02 can supply power to three RRUs.

16th to 21th RRUs

1 PDU01D-01+1 ODM

One PDU01D-01 and one ODM can be used together to supply power to six RRUs.

NOTE

For details about BBU installation in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station, see Configuration Principles of BBUs in Cabinets Used by a DBS3900. The following figure uses a site configured with two BBUs as an example.

When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


255



Figure 2-167 Cabinet configurations without backup power

When backup power is required, and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


256



Figure 2-168 Cabinet configurations when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

When a single- or dual-mode base station requires backup power and is initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


257



Figure 2-169 Cabinet configurations when backup power is required and APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts are initially configured on a 1:2 ratio

The following table lists the cabinet configurations with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-81 Cabinet configurations Power Supply



Carrier Configura tion



No backup power

Single BBU: ≤ 5 U

≤ 21 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 ODM

Two BBUs: ≤ 3 U

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


258



Power Supply





Single BBU: ≤ 6 U

≤ 21 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 ODM

≤ 21 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T/IBBS300D/IBBS300T +1 ODM

≤ 21 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 ODM

≤ 21 RRUs

1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM

≤ 21 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM

Two BBUs: ≤ 4 U APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

Single BBU: ≤ 5 U Two BBUs: ≤ 3 U Single BBU: ≤ 6 U Two BBUs: ≤ 4 U

APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s/ IBBS300D s/ IBBS300T s initially configured on a 1:2 ratio

Single BBU: ≤ 5 U Two BBUs: ≤ 3 U Single BBU: ≤ 16 U Two BBUs: ≤ 14 U

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) NOTE

APM30H (Ver.D) is shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.D) is shortened to TMC11H.

Single- or dual-mode base station An APM30H cabinet can supply power to a maximum of 15 RRUs. When a base station is configured with 7 to 12 RRUs, another DCDU-12B must be added to the APM30H. When a base station is configured with 13 to 15 RRUs, an ODM and an OFD must be configured. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


259



A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-170 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power

When a single- or dual-mode base station requires backup power and is initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


260



Figure 2-171 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio

When a single- or dual-mode base station requires backup power and is initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


261



Figure 2-172 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


262




The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-82 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply


Space for Custom er Equipm ent




No backup power

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

≤4U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)


263


Power Supply



APM30H s and IBBS200 Ds/ IBBS200 Ts initially configure d on a 1:1 ratio

l APM3 0Hs and IBBS 200Ds / IBBS 200Ts / IBBS 300Ds / IBBS 300Ts initiall y config ured

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)




≤ 15 U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 15 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H

≤ 15 U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤4U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤4U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 15 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T

≤ 15 U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

l 1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T

≤4U

≤ 12 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T


264



Power Supply





on a 1:2 ratio l APM3 0Hs and IBBS 700Ds / IBBS 700Ts initiall y config ured on a 1:1 ratio

≤4U

≤ 15 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 15 U

≤ 12 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T

≤ 15 U

≤ 15 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD

NOTE

When APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts are initially configured on a 1:1 ratio and there are more than six RRUs, ensure that two or more 100 Ah battery packs are configured in each IBBS200D/ IBBS200T to avoid over current of a single battery pack.

Triple- or quadruple-mode base station When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows: l

If two BBUs are configured in the initial deployment, the BBUs are installed in an APM30H and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

l

If there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H during capacity expansion, the BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure. When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


265



Figure 2-174 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station without backup power

When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station requires backup power and is initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


266



Figure 2-175 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts on a 1:1 ratio

When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station requires backup power and is initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


267



Figure 2-176 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts on a 1:2 ratio

When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station requires backup power and is initially configured with APM30Hs and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


268




The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-83 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply






No backup power

≤2U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 13 U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 ODM+1 OFD


269



Power Supply





APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200T s initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

≤2U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T/ IBBS300D/IBBS300T+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 13 U

≤ 15 RRUs

1 APM30H (with one DCDU)+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T+1 ODM+1 OFD

l APM30 Hs and IBBS2 00Ds/ IBBS2 00Ts/ IBBS3 00Ds/ IBBS3 00Ts initially configu red on a 1:2 ratio

≤2U

≤ 15 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts/ IBBS300Ds/IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD

≤ 13 U

l APM30 Hs and IBBS7 00Ds/ IBBS7 00Ts initially configu red on a 1:1 ratio

≤ 15 RRUs

l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts/IBBS300Ds/ IBBS300Ts+1 ODM+1 OFD l 1 APM30H (with one DCDU) +1 TMC11H+1 IBBS700D/ IBBS700T+1 ODM+1 OFD

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) NOTE

APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H (Ver.C) are shortened to APM30H, and TMC11H (Ver.B) and TMC11H (Ver.C) are shortened to TMC11H.

Single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


270



When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dualmode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Figure 2-178 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station without backup power


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


271





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


272




A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. An APM30H can be connected to a maximum of 6 RRUs with 6 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 12 groups of 2-wire fiber optic cables. A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the APM30H. When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured, two APM30H cabinets are required. The BBU is installed in the basic APM30H, which is on the left. The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


273




Backup Power Capacit y


Carrier Configurati on



No backup power

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs

≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H

APM30 Hs and IBBS20 0Ds/ IBBS20 0Ts initially configur ed on a 1:1 ratio

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/ IBBS200T

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts

≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

APM30 Hs and IBBS20 0Ds/ IBBS20 0Ts initially configur ed on a 1:2 ratio

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/ IBBS200Ts

≤ 16 U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 12 U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 23 U

≤ 12 RRUs


Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The principles for configuring a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l

When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the basic APM30H on the left and BBU 1 is installed in the extension APM30H on the right.

l

When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.

When backup power is not required at a site, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


274



Figure 2-181 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station without backup power


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


275





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


276





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply



Carrier Configuratio n



No backup power

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs

≤ 21 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs+1 TMC11H

APM30Hs and IBBS200D

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RRUs



277


Power Supply




Carrier Configuratio n


s/ IBBS200Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

≤ 21 U

≤ 12 RRUs


APM30Hs and IBBS200D s/ IBBS200Ts initially configured on a 1:2 ratio

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 21 U

≤ 12 RRUs


BBU Installed in a TP48600A Single- or dual-mode base station The single- or dual-mode base station is configured with one BBU. A TP48600A provides power to a maximum of 12 RRUs. When no storage battery cabinet is configured initially, the cabinet configurations of a singleor dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


278



Figure 2-184 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when no storage battery cabinet is configured initially

When a single- or dual-mode base station requires backup power and is initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


279



Figure 2-185 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


280





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


281




The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different backup power requirements, customer space requirements, and carrier configurations. Table 2-86 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply






No storage battery cabinet is configured initially.

≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)


282



Power Supply





TP48600As and IBBS700Ds /IBBS700Ts initially configured on a 1:1 ratio

≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 IBBS700T/ IBBS700D+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)


≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs



≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)

Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The principles for configuring a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l

When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, BBU 0 is installed in the 2 U space under the DCDU-11C in the equipment compartment and BBU 1 is installed in the 2 U space under BBU 0.

l

When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the position of the BBU is indicated by BBU0 in the following figure.

When no storage battery cabinet is configured initially, the cabinet configurations of a tripleor quadruple-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


283



Figure 2-188 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station with 48 V 300 Ah backup power

When a triple- or quadruple-mode base station requires backup power and is initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio, the cabinet configurations of the triple- or quadruple-mode base station with different customer space requirements are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


284



Figure 2-189 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station requiring backup power and initially configured with TP48600As and IBBS700Ds/IBBS700Ts on a 1:1 ratio


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


285





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


286





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply






No storage battery cabinet is

≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A


287



Power Supply





configured initially.

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)


≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs



≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs



≤5U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds

≤ 16 U

≤ 12 RRUs

1 TP48600A+2 IBBS300Ts/ IBBS300Ds+1 TMC11H (Ver.C)

BBU Installed in an OMB When a DBS3900 is configured with an OMB, one OMB can supply power only to one RRU. RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


288



Figure 2-192 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C) Each OMB configured in a DBS3900 can supply power to six RRUs. The RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, U-steel, or angle steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) is shown in the following figure. Figure 2-193 Cabinet configuration of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

If an OMB in a DBS3900 requires backup power, each OMB can be configured with one or two IBBS20Ds to supply power to three RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


289



Figure 2-194 Cabinet configuration of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) (with backup power)

Outdoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed outdoors and is supplied with DC power. Table 2-88 lists the scenarios where the BBU is installed outdoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. Table 2-88 BBU installation scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



Remarks

TMC11H (Ver.E)

The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.E) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E)

TMC11H (Ver.D)

The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.D) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D)

TMC11H (Ver.C)

The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

The same configuration principles are used for the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) and the DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C). For details, see BBU Installed


290





Remarks

TMC11H (Ver.B)

The BBU is installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) and RRUs are installed remotely. The TMC11H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

in a TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C), which uses a TMC11H (Ver.C) as an example.

APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power

The BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power and RRUs are installed remotely. The APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied with +24 V DC Power

OMB

The BBU is installed in an OMB and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB

OMB (Ver.C)

The BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) and RRUs are installed remotely. The OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

NOTE

TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.E), and TMC11H (Ver.D) are shortened to TMC11H.

Configuration Principles of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900 For details, see Configurations of Cabinets Used by a DBS3900.

BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.E) When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a base station are shown in the following figure. NOTE

For details about BBU installation in a single-, dual-, triple-, or quadruple-mode base station, see Configuration Principles of BBUs in Cabinets Used by a DBS3900. The following figures use a base station configured with two BBUs as an example.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


291




The following table lists the cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power. Table 2-89 Cabinet configurations of a base station supplied with -48 V DC power Power Supply


Carrier Configuration


-48 V DC

≤6U

≤ 21 RRUs

1 TMC11H (with two DCDUs)

≤ 17 U

≤ 21 RRUs

2 TMC11Hs (with three DCDUs)

BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.D) Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the TMC11H. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


292



Figure 2-196 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power

A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A TMC11H can be connected to a maximum of 12 RRUs with 12 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 24 groups of 2-wire fiber optic cables. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are listed in the following table. Table 2-90 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply




-48 V DC

≤9U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)

≤8U

≤ 12 RRUs


Triple- or quadruple-mode base station When two BBUs are configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows: l

In the initial deployment scenario, two BBUs are configured. The BBUs are installed in a TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input) and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).

l

In the capacity expansion scenario, if there is space for a second BBU in the TMC11H, the BBU is installed in the TMC11H (with the BBU3900 and -48 V DC power input). Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H (only provide transmission space).

When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBU is shown by BBU 0 in the following figure. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure. In the following figure, illustrations a and b show the scenarios of new site deployment and illustration c shows a capacity expansion scenario. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


293



Figure 2-197 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are listed in the following table. Table 2-91 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply




-48 V DC

≤6U

≤ 12 RRUs


≤ 17 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 TMC11Hs (with three DCDUs)

BBU Installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) Single- or dual-mode base station A single- or dual-mode base station can be configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the TMC11H. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


294



Figure 2-198 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power

A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. A TMC11H can be connected to a maximum of 12 RRUs with 12 groups of RRU power cables, which contain 24 groups of 2-wire fiber optic cables. When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different customer space requirements and carrier configurations are listed in the following table. Table 2-92 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station Power Supply




-48 V DC

≤9U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 TMC11H (with one DCDU)

≤8U

≤ 12 RRUs


Triple- or quadruple-mode base station The configuration principles of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are as follows: l

When two BBUs (BBU 0 and BBU 1) are configured, BBU 0 is installed in the basic TMC11H, which is on the left; BBU 1 is installed in the extension TMC11H, which is on the right.

l

When one BBU is configured for a triple- or quadruple-mode base station, the BBU is shown by BBU 0 in the following figure.

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure and are listed in the following table.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


295



Figure 2-199 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station supplied with -48 V DC power

Table 2-93 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply




-48 V DC

≤ 18 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 TMC11Hs

BBU Installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) Supplied with +24 V DC Power When the BBU of a DBS3900 is installed in an APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power, this APM30H (Ver.B) supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs. When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station are shown in the following figure and table. Figure 2-200 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station supplied with +24 V DC power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


296







+24 V DC

≤5U

≤ 6 RRUs

1 APM30H (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power

When +24 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station are shown in the following figure and are listed in the following table. Figure 2-201 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station supplied with +24 V DC power

Table 2-95 Cabinet configurations of a triple- or quadruple-mode base station Power Supply




+24 V DC

≤ 10 U

≤ 12 RRUs

2 APM30Hs (Ver.B) supplied with +24 V DC power

BBU Installed in an OMB In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB, an OMB supplies power to three RRUs, and the RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB is shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


297



Figure 2-202 Cabinet configuration of a base station of which the BBU is installed in an OMB

BBU Installed in an OMB (Ver.C) In scenarios where the DBS3900 uses an OMB (Ver.C), an OMB (Ver.C) supplies power to six RRUs, and the RRUs can be installed on a pole, wall, angle steel, or U-steel. The cabinet configuration of a DBS3900 of which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C) is shown in the following figure. Figure 2-203 Cabinet configuration of a base station in which the BBU is installed in an OMB (Ver.C)

Indoor Installation Scenarios with AC Power Supply This section describes the scenarios where the DBS3900 is installed indoors and is supplied with AC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with AC power. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


298



Table 2-96 Installation scenarios BBU Installation Position


Reference

IMB03

The BBU is installed in an IMB03 and the RRUs are installed remotely. The IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an IMB03

IFS06

The BBU is installed in an IMB03. The IMB03 and RRUs are installed in an IFS06.

For details, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.

BBU Installed in an IMB03 When external 110 V or 220 V AC power is provided, an AC/DC power device or ETP48100B1 is required to supply power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-204 BBU installed in an IMB03 (without backup power)

The following table lists the cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an IMB03 and there is no backup power. Table 2-97 Cabinet and module configurations when the BBU is installed in an IMB03 (without backup power) Power Supply

Cabinet and Module Configuration

110 V/220 V

1 IMB03+1 AC/DC power device+1 RRU 1 IMB03+1 ETP48100-B1+3 RRUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


299



Indoor Installation Scenarios with DC Power Supply This section describes the indoor installation scenarios where a DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. The following table describes the scenarios where the BBU is installed indoors and the DBS3900 is supplied with DC power. Table 2-98 Installation scenario BBU Installation Position


Reference

19-inch rack

19-inch racks consist of the INS12 rack provided by Huawei and the 19-inch rack provided by the customer.

BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack

The BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed in a 19-inch rack indoors, and the RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and outdoor RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Wall

The BBU and DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B are installed on a wall indoors, and the RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and outdoor RRUs.

BBU Installed on a Wall

Indoor

The BBU is installed indoors. RRUs are remotely installed outdoors. The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E) supplies power only to the RRUs and monitors only the RRUs.

BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H)

IMB03

The BBU is installed in an IMB03 and the RRUs are installed remotely outdoors. The IMB03 supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

BBU Installed in an IMB03

The BBU is installed in an IMB03. The IMB03 and RRUs are installed in an IFS06.

For details, see DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide


300





Reference

IBC10

The BBU is installed in an IBC10. The DCDU-12C supplies power to the BBU.

BBU Installed in an IBC10

BBU Installed in a 19-Inch Rack When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed in a 19-inch rack, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs. The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station. Figure 2-205 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

The following figure shows the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station configured with two BBUs. A triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station can also be configured with one BBU, and the cabinet configurations in this scenario are the same as those in the preceding figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


301



Figure 2-206 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode or quadruple-mode base station

BBU Installed on a Wall When -48 V DC power is provided, the BBU and the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B can be installed indoors on a wall, and RRUs can be remotely installed outdoors. In this scenario, the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B supplies power to the BBU and RRUs, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-207 BBU installed on a wall

BBU Installed Indoors and RRUs Installed Outdoors (Powered by an APM30H) When the BBU is installed indoors and supplied with -48 V DC power, RRUs can be installed outdoors and supplied with power and monitored by an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H(Ver.E). The APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


302



(Ver.D), or APM30H(Ver.E) can be supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power. The following figure shows the installation scenarios. Figure 2-208 BBU installed indoors and RRUs installed outdoors

BBU Installed in an IMB03 When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IMB03, which supplies power to the BBU as well as six RRUs installed outdoors, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-209 BBU installed in an IMB03

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


303



BBU Installed in an IBC10 When -48 V DC power is supplied, the BBU can be installed in an IBC10, which supplies power to the BBU and USU (Universal Switching Unit), as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-210 BBU installed in an IBC10

2.5.3 Application Scenarios of a DBS3900 Using a BBU3910A This section describes outdoor AC and DC scenarios for a DBS3900 using a BBU3910A.

Outdoor AC Installation Scenario This section describes the outdoor AC installation scenario of a DBS3900. This following table describes the outdoor AC installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


304



Table 2-99 Installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A BBU Installation Position

Scenario

On a pole or wall

The BBU and OPM50M are installed on a pole or wall, RRUs are remotely installed, and the OPM50M supplies power to the BBU and RRUs.

The following table describes the configurations of a base station with different requirements for backup power capacities and carrier configurations. Table 2-100 Configurations of a DBS3900 Power Supply

Back up Powe r Capac ity

Carrie r Config uratio n

Base Station Configuration

Illustration


No backu p power

3 RRUs

1 OPM50M+1 BBU3910A +3 RRUs

Figure 2-211

6 RRUs

2 OPM50Ms+1 BBU3910A +6 RRUs

3 RRUs

1 OPM50M+1 BBU3910A +3 RRUs+1 IBBS20D

6 RRUs

2 OPM50Ms+1 BBU3910A +6 RRUs+2 IBBS20Ds

3 RRUs

1 OPM50M+1 BBU3910A +3 RRUs+2 IBBS20Ds

6 RRUs

2 OPM50Ms+1 BBU3910A +6 RRUs+4 IBBS20Ds

The numbe r of OPM5 0Ms must be the same as that of IBBS2 0Ds. The numbe r of IBBS2 0Ds is twice as that of OPM5 0Ms.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Figure 2-212

305



The following figure shows the application scenario of a DBS3900 when no backup power is required. Figure 2-211 Application scenario of a DBS3900 (without backup power)

The following figure shows the application scenario of a DBS3900 when backup power is required. Figure 2-212 Application scenario of a DBS3900 (with backup power)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


306



Outdoor DC Installation Scenario This section describes the outdoor DC installation scenario of a DBS3900. This following table describes the outdoor DC installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A. Table 2-101 Installation scenario of a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A BBU Installation Position

Scenario

On a pole or wall

The BBU and RRUs are installed on a pole or wall. The DCDU is installed in a thirdparty cabinet to supply DC power to the BBU and RRUs.

The following table describes the configurations of a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power. Table 2-102 Configurations of a DBS3900 Power Supply

Base Station Configuration

Illustration

-48 V DC

l 1 BBU3910A+3 RRUs

Figure 2-213

l 1 BBU3910A+6 RRUs

Figure 2-213 Application Scenario of a DBS3900

2.5.4 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 configured with different types of cabinets using a BBU3900 or BBU3910. If the Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


307



existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets, the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets used by a DBS3900.

When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) and having the peak output power. NOTE


AC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 2-103 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) Power Supply





1x50 A/1 P

6 mm2(0.009 in.2)

≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)


1x50 A/2 P

220 V AC threephase

1x25 A/3 P

2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)

≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.C). Table 2-104 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.C)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply





1x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)


308



Power Supply




1x63 A/2 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

220 V AC threephase

1x25 A/3 P

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)


≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with +24 V DC power and using the APM30H (Ver.B). Table 2-105 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) Power Supply




+24 V DC

2x100A/1P

25 mm2(0.039 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

1x160 A/1 P

When the BBU Is Installed in the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) and having the peak power. NOTE


DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


309



Table 2-106 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) Product Configuration(1)(4)

Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker(2)



l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)

1x80 A

16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables

≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)

1x63 A


1x160 A

35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables

2x80 A


1x80 A


l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


310



Product Configuration(1)(4)



l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)

1x80 A


1x63 A


1x100 A


2x63 A


1x160 A



l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


311






l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

2x63 A


l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W)

1x160 A


2x63 A


1x80 A


1x160 A


2x80 A




l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


312



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l




l


l


l

When more than six RRUs are configured, a new DCDU-11B is required.

In an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power, a heater must be installed in a TMC11H, and one more AC input must be added. The following table describes the configurations of circuit breakers and power cables for the heater. Table 2-107 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a heater

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply





1x10 A/1 P

1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


313



When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.D) and having the peak output power. NOTE


AC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.D). Table 2-108 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.D) Power Supply




220 V AC threephase

1x40 A/3 P

6 mm2(0.009 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


1x100 A/1 P

25 mm2(0.039 in.2)


1x100 A/2 P

When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.E) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.E) and having the peak output power.

AC Input NOTE


The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the APM30H (Ver.E).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


314



Table 2-109 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.E) Power Supply

Number of PSUs





4 or 5


≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

2 or 3



5


4

1x80 A/2 P

3

1x63 A/2 P

5


4

1x80 A/2 P

3

1x63 A/2 P


110 V/120 V AC dual-livewire

Two wires (L and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) Three wires (L1, L2, and N), each with a single core wire, two insulation layers, and a cross-sectional of 25 mm2(0.039 in.2)

When the BBU Is Installed in the TMC11H (Ver.D) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.D) and having the peak power. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


315



DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.D). Table 2-110 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.D) Product Configuration(1)(4)





1x80 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)

1x63 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


316







1x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x63 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P



l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


317






l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)

1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P




l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


318







1x160 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P


l 1 or 2 BBUs

l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)


l 1 or 2 BBUs l 7 to 9 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs


16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables 2x63 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2), three groups of DC input power cables

1x160 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P

35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables 16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables

l 1 or 2 BBUs

l 12 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W)

2x80 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P (by default)


2x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P


l 1 or 2 BBUs l 12 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)




319







2x160 A/1 P



16 mm2(0.025 in.2), four groups of DC input power cables

l 1 or 2 BBUs


NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l


(4) Remarks about the product configuration are as follows:

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

l


l


l


l

When more than six RRUs are configured, a new DCDU-12B is required.


320



When the BBU Is Installed in the TMC11H (Ver.E) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.E) and having the peak power. NOTE


DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an outdoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the TMC11H (Ver.E). Table 2-111 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.E) Component Configuration(1)(4)




6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 640 W)+3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W)

1x160 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)


1x160 A/1 P



16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for two groups of DC input power cables


1x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables


1x160 A/1 P




l 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


321



Component Configuration(1)(4)




1x160 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P

35mm2(0.054 in.2) for a group of DC input power cables

2x63 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P


1x63 A/1 P


1x63 A/1 P


l 0 or 1 BBU

l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 2 BBUs

l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 0 or 1 BBU



l 2 BBUs l 6 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W) l 0 or 1 BBU l 3 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 560 W) l 0 or 1 BBU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


322



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l




l


l


When the BBU Is Installed in the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) and having the peak output power. When a DBS3900 uses the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) and the BBU is powered by the customer equipment, the upper-level circuit breakers should support the 15 A to 25 A current. NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


323



AC Input Table 2-112 and Table 2-113 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the OMB and OMB (Ver.C). Table 2-112 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB Power Supply





1x10 A

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)

≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)


Table 2-113 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB (Ver.C) Power Supply






1 PSU

20 A/1 P

2 PSUs

32 A/1 P

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


1 PSU

20 A/2 P

2 PSUs

32 A/2 P

DC Input Table 2-114 and Table 2-115 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the OMB and OMB (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


324



Table 2-114 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB Power Supply




-48 V DC

Minimum: 1x63 A, maximum: 1x80 A (all using the level-1 magnetic blast breaker)

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

Table 2-115 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the OMB (Ver.C) Product Configuration(1)(4)




l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)

50 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)

l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W)

80 A/1 P

l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


325





l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)

63 A/1 P



l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W)

100 A/1 P

25 mm2(0.039 in.2)

2x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

125 A/1 P

25 mm2(0.039 in.2)

l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (power consumption of

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


326






each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)

2x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)


80 A/1 P

25 mm2(0.039 in.2)

2x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

100 A/1 P

25 mm2(0.039 in.2)

2x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)


l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption of each RRU ≤ 400 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption of each RRU ≤ 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W) Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


327







100 A/1 P

25 mm2(0.039 in.2)

2x63 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)


l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption of each RRU ≤ 560 W) l 1 BBU (power consumption ≤ 450 W) l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 200 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


328



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l




l


When the BBU Is Installed in the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch Rack, or Wall This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using an IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch rack, or wall and having the peak output power. NOTE


AC Input Table 2-116 and Table 2-117 describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a DBS3900 that uses an IMB03 and is supplied with AC input power.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


329



Table 2-116 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03 and using an EPS30-4815AF Power Supply





1x10 A

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)

≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)


Table 2-117 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03 and using an ETP48100-B1 Power Supply





1 PSU

1x20 A/1 P

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)

≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)

2 PSUs

1x32 A/1 P


1 PSU

1x20 A/2 P

2 PSUs

1x32 A/2 P

The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an indoor DBS3900 supplied with AC power and using the IMB03+IFS06. Table 2-118 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03 and an IFS06 and using an EPS4890

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply




220 V AC threephase

1x16 A/3 P

2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


1x32 A/1 P

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)


1x32 A/2 P


330



DC Input Table 2-119, Table 2-120, and Table 2-121describe the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with the IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-12B. Table 2-119 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-03B Power Supply




-48 V DC

Minimum: 1x63 A/1 P, maximum: 1x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

Table 2-120 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-11B Product Configuration(1)(4)





1x80 A


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)

1x63 A


l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


331







1x160 A


2x80 A


1x80 A


1x80 A


1x63 A


l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W)


l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


332






l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W)

1x100 A


2x63 A


1x160 A


2x63 A


1x160 A


2x63 A




l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


333







1x80 A


1x160 A


2x80 A



l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Table 2-121 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a base station configured with an IMB03, 19-inch rack, or wall and using a DCDU-12B Product Configuration(1)(4)





1x80 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)

l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


334







1x63 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P



l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


335







1x63 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P



l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


336







2x63 A/1 P



1x160 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


1x80 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P+1x63 A/1 P




l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 6 RRUs (560 W ≤ power consumption < 650 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs

l 7 to 9 RRUs (power consumption ≤ 300 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs l 7 to 9 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)




337







1x160 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P

35 mm2(0.054 in.2), low smoke zero halogen, one group of DC input power cables 16 mm2(0.025 in.2), one group of DC input power cables

l 1 or 2 BBUs



2x80 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P (by default)


2x80 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P+1x80 A/1 P


l 1 or 2 BBUs l 12 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption ≤ 400 W) l 1 or 2 BBUs




2x160 A/1 P



16 mm2(0.025 in.2), four groups of DC input power cables

l 1 or 2 BBUs

The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an indoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using the IMB03+IFS06. Table 2-122 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 using the IMB03+IFS06

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply




-48 V DC

1x80 A/1 P

16 mm2(0.025 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


338



Power Supply



+24 V DC

2x100 A/1 P

25 mm2(0.039 in.2)


1x160 A/1 P

When the BBU Is Installed in the TP48600A This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the TP48600A and having the peak output power. NOTE


The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in the AC-powered TP48600A. Table 2-123 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an AC scenario Power Supply






7 PSUs+1 SOU

63 A/3 P (recommended)

10 mm2(0.016 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

4 to 6 PSUs+1 SOU

40 A/3 P

4 to 7 PSUs+1 HAU+1 SOU

63 A/3 P

7 PSUs+1 SOU


35 mm2(0.054 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

6 PSUs+1 SOU

125 A/1 P

5 PSUs+1 SOU

100 A/1 P

4 PSUs+1 SOU

80 A/1 P

6 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU

125 A/1 P


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


339



Power Supply




5 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU

125 A/1 P

4 PSUs+1 HAU +1 SOU

100 A/1 P

7 PSUs+1 SOU


6 PSUs+1 SOU

125 A/2 P

5 PSUs+1 SOU

100 A/2 P

4 PSUs+1 SOU

80 A/2 P



35 mm2(0.054 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)

When the BBU Is Installed in the IBC10 This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured DBS3900 using the IBC10 which has the peak output power. NOTE


DC Input The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in an indoor DBS3900 supplied with DC power and using an IBC10. Table 2-124 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DC scenario

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Equipment

Configured Module




0#DCDU-12C

l Two firstlevel USUs (power consumptio n ≤ 850 W)

1x160 A/1 P

One group of DC input power cables with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2 (0.055 in.2)

≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)


340


Power Equipment

1#DCDU-12C

2#DCDU-12C

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Configured Module



l One secondlevel USUs (power consumptio n ≤ 505 W) l Two fan assemblies (power consumptio n ≤ 300 W)

2x80 A/1 P

Two groups of DC input power cables with a cross-sectional area of 16 mm2 (0.025 in.2)

Five BBUs (power consumption ≤ 700 W)

1x160 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P


2x80 A/1 P


Five BBUs (power consumption ≤ 700 W)



341



NOTE

(1) Remarks about the minimum requirements for upper-level circuit breakers are as follows: l

The configurations for the circuit breakers used in a large configuration scenario can be used in a small configuration scenario.

l

The circuit breakers with high-load capabilities can be used in a scenario where the circuit breakers with low-load capability are required. The circuit breakers are arranged based on their load capabilities in a descending order as follows: 160 A, 2x80 A.



l


l


2.5.5 When a DBS3900 Is Configured with a BBU3910A This section describes configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A.

AC Input In AC power scenarios, an OPM50M is configured to provide power for the BBU and RRUs. The following table lists configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables. Table 2-125 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in AC power scenarios Power Supply

Minimum Requirement for the Circuit Breaker on Customer Equipment




1x20 A

2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)

100 m (328.09 ft)


DC Input In DC power scenarios, a DCDU-12B is configured to provide power for the BBU and RRUs. The following table lists configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


342



Table 2-126 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in DC power scenarios Component Configuration(1)(4)





1x80 A/1 P


≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)

1x63 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P



2x80 A/1 P



1x80 A/1 P


l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 1 to 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 4 to 6 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU

l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


343







1x100 A/1 P



2x63 A/1 P



1x63 A/1 P


1x100 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


1x160 A/1 P


l 1 BBU


l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (300 W ≤ power consumption < 400 W) l 1 BBU l Transmission equipment (power consumption ≤ 350 W) l 3 RRUs (power consumption < 300 W) l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


344







2x63 A/1 P



1x160 A/1 P


2x63 A/1 P


l 3 RRUs (400 W ≤ power consumption < 560 W) l 1 BBU



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


345



NOTE



l


l


l




l




l


l


(4) The actual configurations are as follows: l


l


l


2.5.6 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3900 or BBU3910 This section describes the power distribution scheme for the DBS3900 in different power supply scenarios when a BBU3900 or BBU3910 is used. If the existing cabinets of a DBS3900 have been restructured to possess the same capabilities as APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets, the power distribution scheme for these cabinets must be the same as those for APM30H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.D) cabinets used by a DBS3900 site.

Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C) in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and +24 V DC scenarios. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


346



Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the EPS (EPS 01B or EPS 01D) or EPU (EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05) in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The EPS or EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l


l


The PSUs convert AC power into DC power, which is supplied to the battery cabinet, transmission cabinet, BBU, RRUs, and other equipment. NOTE

The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios, except that the three power inputs do not need to be connected by shortcircuiting bars in the 220 V AC three-phase scenarios.

Figure 2-214 and Figure 2-215 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-127 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-214 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


347



Figure 2-215 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios

Table 2-127 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.B) in AC scenarios Power Supply



Specifications of the Circuit Breaker/Fuse for the DC Output


3x16 A (MCB(1))

l Heater and SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)

l BAT(2): 1x100 A (MCB)


1x40 A (MCB)


l RRU: 6x20 A (MCB) l TMC: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE(3)) l BBU: 2x15 A (FUSE) l TEC(4): 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM(5): 4x15 A (FUSE)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


348



NOTE

(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) BAT: Storage battery (3) FUSE: Fuse (4) TEC: Thermoelectric cooler in an IBBS200T (5) TM: Transmission equipment

Figure 2-216 and Figure 2-217 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-128 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-216 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


349



Figure 2-217 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.C) in 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios

Table 2-128 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.C) in AC scenarios Power Supply





3x20 A (MCB)

l Heater and SOU: 1x15 A (MCB)

l BAT: 1x160 A (MCB)


1x63 A (MCB)


l RRU: 6x25 A (MCB) l TMC: 1x30 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x15 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x25 A (FUSE) l TEC: 1x15 A (FUSE) l TM: 4x15 A (FUSE)

When the APM30H (Ver.B) uses AC power supply, the AC power is converted into several DC outputs. One DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. Then, the DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides the power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


350



Figure 2-218 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-129 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet

Specifications of the Circuit Breaker for the DC Output

Transmission cabinet

l TM: 7x12 A (MCB)+1x6 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x6 A (MCB)

When the APM30H (Ver.C) uses AC power supply, the AC power is converted into several DC outputs. One DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. Then, the DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides the power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


351



Figure 2-219 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-130 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet


Transmission cabinet

l TM: 2x6 A (MCB)+2x12 A (MCB) +5x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Scheme in +24 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses +24 V DC power supply, the EPS24S48100DC in the APM30H (Ver.B) converts the +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power, which is then provided to DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, transmission equipment, and other components, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


352



Figure 2-220 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.B) in +24 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in +24 V DC scenarios. Table 2-131 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the APM30H (Ver.B) in +24 V DC scenarios Cabinet


APM30H (Ver.B, +24 V)

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios.

Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver.B) distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


353



Figure 2-221 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.B) in -48 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in -48 V DC scenarios. Table 2-132 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.B) in -48 V DC scenarios Cabinet


TMC11H (Ver.B)

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB(1)) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM(2): 1x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)

NOTE

(1) MCB: Miniature circuit breaker (2) TM: Transmission equipment

When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-11B in the TMC11H (Ver.C) distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


354



Figure 2-222 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios. Table 2-133 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the TMC11H (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios Cabinet


TMC11H (Ver.C)

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x25 A (MCB) l BBU or TM: 2x25 A (MCB) l TM: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D) This section describes the power distribution scheme fora DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.D) in 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenarios.

Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l


l

One output is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided forthe heater or heating film.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


355





Figure 2-223 and Figure 2-224 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-134 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-223 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


356



Figure 2-224 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.D) in 110 V AC dual-livewire scenarios

Table 2-134 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.D) in AC scenarios Power Supply





2x40 A+1x25 A

Heater: 1x16 A (MCB) and SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)

l BAT: 1x125 A/2 P (MCB)


1x100 A

Heater: 1x16 A (MCB) SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)

l RFC: 1x125 A (MCB) l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 4x30 A (FUSE) l TMC: 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS: 1x30 A (FUSE)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


357



When the APM30H (Ver.D) uses AC power supply, the AC power is converted into several DC outputs. One DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. Then, the DC power distribution box in the transmission cabinet provides the power for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-225 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-135 Specifications of the fuses in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet


TMC11H (Ver.D) serving as a transmission cabinet


Power Distribution Scheme When the BBU Is Installed in the APM30H (Ver.E) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the APM30H (Ver.E) in 110 V AC or 220 V AC scenarios.

Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is used, the EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The EPU divides one AC input into two AC outputs. l Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

One output is provided for the service outlet unit (SOU). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

358


l





Figure 2-226 and Figure 2-227 show the power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.E) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Table 2-136 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.E) in 220 V AC and 110 V AC scenarios. Figure 2-226 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.E) in 220 V AC single-phase scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


359



Figure 2-227 Power distribution scheme for the APM30H (Ver.E) in 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


360



Table 2-136 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the APM30H (Ver.E) in AC scenarios Power Supply





2x40 A+1x25 A

Heater: 1x16 A (MCB), and SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)

l RFC: 1x125 A (MCB)


1x100 A


l LOAD9 to LOAD14: 6x30 A (FUSE)

l SOU: 1x16 A (MCB)

l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 4x30 A (FUSE) l TMC: 1x30 A (FUSE) l IBBS: 1x30 A (FUSE)

When the APM30H (Ver.E) uses the AC power supply, one DC output is supplied to the transmission cabinet. The transmission cabinet provides power supply for the transmission equipment, fan assembly, and other components in the cabinet through the DC power distribution box, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-228 Power distribution scheme for the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


361



The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios. Table 2-137 Specifications of the fuses in the transmission cabinet in AC scenarios Cabinet


TMC11H (Ver.E) serving as a transmission cabinet


Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios.

Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power, the DCDU-12B in the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, fan assembly, and other components, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-229 Power distribution scheme for the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the fuses in the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


362



Table 2-138 Specifications of the fuses in the TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in -48 V DC scenarios Cabinet


TMC11H (Ver.D)/ TMC11H (Ver.E) serving as a power cabinet

l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the OMB or OMB (Ver.C) in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC scenarios.

Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power by the ETP48150-A3 and distributed to other components in the OMB. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme. Figure 2-230 Power distribution scheme for the OMB in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-139 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB Application Scenario

Power Supply


OMB

220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire

l BBU&HEUA: 1x10 A l RRU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x4 A

When the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the AC power is converted into DC power by the ETP48100-A1 power equipment and distributed to other components in the OMB (Ver.C). The following figure shows the power distribution scheme. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


363



Figure 2-231 Power distribution scheme for the OMB (Ver.C) in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-140 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB (Ver.C) Application Scenario

Power Supply


OMB (Ver.C)


l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE(1)) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

NOTE

(1) FUSE: Fuse

Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 uses -48 V DC power supply, the DC power distribution box distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


364



Figure 2-232 Power distribution scheme for the OMB in -48 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-141 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB Application Scenario

Power Supply


OMB

-48 V DC

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)

The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the OMB (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


365



Figure 2-233 Power distribution scheme for the OMB (Ver.C) in -48 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-142 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station using the OMB (Ver.C) Application Scenario

Power Supply


OMB (Ver.C)

-48 V DC

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x30 A (FUSE) l BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-Inch Rack, or Wall This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the IMB03, IFS06, 19-inch rack, or wall in 110 V AC, 220 V AC, -48 V DC, and +24 V DC scenarios.

Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply is used, the EPS30-4815AF in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in a DBS3900 using only the IMB03 in 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


366



Figure 2-234 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 configured with an EPS30-4815AF in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Table 2-143 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario

Power Supply


IMB03


l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A l RRU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x4 A

When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply is used, the ETP48100-B1 in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme in a DBS3900 using only the IMB03 in 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios. Figure 2-235 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 configured with an ETP48100-B1 in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


367



Table 2-144 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario

Power Supply


IMB03


l RRU: 1x30 A l SPARE: 2x30 A l BBU: 1x30 A

Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios When -48 V DC power supply is used, DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components, as shown in Figure 2-236, Figure 2-237, and Figure 2-238. Figure 2-236 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios when DCDU-03B is configured

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


368



Figure 2-237 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios when DCDU-11B is configured

Figure 2-238 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios when DCDU-12B is configured

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


369



Table 2-145 Specifications of the circuit breakers and fuses in the base station Application Scenario

Power Supply

Power Equipment


IMB03, IMB03+IFS06, wall, or 19-inch rack

-48 V DC

DCDU-03B

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x12 A (MCB)

DCDU-11B

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x25 A (MCB) l BBU or TM: 2x25 A (MCB) l TM: 1x25 A (MCB) l FAN: 1x25 A (MCB)

DCDU-12B

l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE) l TM or BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

Power Distribution Scheme in +24 V DC Scenarios When a DBS3900 configured with IMB03+IFS06 uses +24 V DC power supply, the EPS24S48100DC in the IMB03 converts the +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power, which is then provided to the DCDU-03B. The DCDU-03B distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for the IMB03.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


370



Figure 2-239 Power distribution scheme for the IMB03 in +24 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03. Table 2-146 Specifications of the circuit breakers in the IMB03 in +24 V DC scenarios Application Scenario

Power Supply


IMB03+IFS06

+24 V DC

l RRU 0 to RRU 5: 6x20 A (MCB) l BBU: 1x12 A (MCB) l TM: 1x12 A (MCB)

Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the TP48600A This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the TP48600A in 110 V AC and 220 V AC scenarios. When the TP48600A uses 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply, the PDU05A-03 divides the AC power and the ETP converts the AC power into DC power. Then the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B distributes the DC power to the BBU, RRUs, transmission equipment, and other components. The PDU05A-03 divided one AC input into five AC outputs. l

One AC output is connected to the AC junction box on the right inner wall of the cabinet, and divided into four AC outputs, which are then provided for the HAU.

l

Three AC outputs are connected to the PSUs and converted by the PSUs to DC power outputs, which are then provided to the DCDU-11C, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-03B, storage batteries, and other components.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


371


l


One AC output is provided for the SOU.

Figure 2-240 shows the power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-11B is used. Figure 2-241 shows the power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-03B is used. Table 2-147 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. The power distribution scheme in 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire scenarios is the same as that in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios. To support different types of power supply, the power input terminals need to be connected to different short-circuiting bars, as shown in Figure 2-242. Figure 2-240 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-11B is used

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


372



Figure 2-241 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC three-phase scenarios when the DCDU-03B is used

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


373



Table 2-147 Specifications of the circuit breakers Power Distribution Device



PDU05A-03

l PSU1/5: 1x40 A

-

l PSU2/6: 1x40 A l PSU3/4/7: 1x63 A l HEATER: 1x25 A l SOU: 1x10 A ETP

-

l DCDU-11C: LOAD0 (1x100 A) l DCDU-11B/DCDU-03B: LOAD3 (1x200 A) and LOAD5 (1x200 A) l TMC11H (Ver.C): LOAD1 (1x100 A) and LOAD2 (1x100 A) l Storage battery: LOAD6 (1x400 A) l SPARE: LOAD4 (1x200 A)

DCDU-11C

-

l CCU: LOAD0 (1x6 A) l CMUF: LOAD1 (1x6 A) l TM(1): LOAD2 (1x12 A) l EMUA or TM: LOAD3 (1x12 A) l BBU: LOAD4 to LOAD7 (4x25 A) l CMUF: LOAD8 (1x25 A) l IBBS: LOAD9 (1x25 A)

DCDU-11B

-

l RRUs: LOAD0 to LOAD5 (6x25 A) l SPARE: LOAD6 to LOAD9 (4x25 A)

DCDU-03B

-

l RRUs: LOAD0 to LOAD5 (6x20 A) l SPARE: LOAD6 to LOAD8 (3x12 A)

NOTE

(1) TM: Transmission equipment

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


374



Figure 2-242 Configuration of short-circuiting bars

Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Using the IBC10 This section describes power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 using the IBC10 in -48 V DC scenarios.

Power Distribution Scheme for an IBC10 DC Cabinet When IBC10 configure USU3910, -48 V DC external power is supplied, DCDU-12Cs can provide DC power for USUs, BBUs, fan assemblies, and other components. The following figures show the power distribution principles of the three DCDU-12Cs in the cabinet, respectively.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


375



Figure 2-243 Power distribution scheme for an IMB10 in -48 V DC scenarios

2.5.7 Power Distribution Scheme for a DBS3900 Configured with a BBU3910A This section describes the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 configured with a BBU3910A.

AC Input When AC power is supplied, the power is fed into an SPM60A for surge protection and then into an OPM50M. The OPM50M converts AC power into DC power and then supplies it to the BBU and RRUs. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 supplied with AC power.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


376



Figure 2-244 Power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 supplied with AC power

The following table lists specifications of fuses in the OPM50M. Table 2-148 Specifications of fuses in the OPM50M Power Supply

Specifications of a Fuse

220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC duallive-wire

l BBU3910A: 1x30 A (FUSE) l RRU: 3x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE)

DC Input When DC power is supplied, it is fed into the DCDU-12B, which then provides power for the BBU, RRUs, and other devices, as shown in the following figure. Figure 2-245 Power distribution scheme for a DBS3900 supplied with DC power

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


377



The following table lists specifications of fuses in the DCDU-12B. Table 2-149 Specifications of fuses in the DCDU-12B Power Supply

Specifications of a Fuse

-48 V DC

l RRU: 6x30 A (FUSE) l TM/BBU: 2x30 A (FUSE) l TM: 1x30 A (FUSE) l FAN: 1x30 A (FUSE)

2.5.8 Cable Connections in a DBS3900 This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cable connections in a DBS3900. For cable connections in a DBS3900, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. The following table lists the links to these topics. Table 2-150 Cable connections

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Cabine t Used by a DBS39 00

Power Cable Connections

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections


Interconn ection Signal Cable Connecti ons


APM30 H (Ver.B) or APM30 H (Ver.C)

Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.B) or APM30H (Ver.C)

Transmissio n Cable Connections

Inter-BBU Signal Cable Connectio ns


APM30 H (Ver.D)

Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D)

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.D)


378


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)





APM30 H (Ver.E)

Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.E)

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the APM30H (Ver.E)

TMC11 H (Ver.B) or TMC11 H (Ver.C)

Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C)

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.C)

TMC11 H (Ver.D)

Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D)

Monitoring Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.D)

TMC11 H (Ver.E)

Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.E)

Monitoring Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TMC11H (Ver.E)

OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03

Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using an OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03

Monitoring Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using an OMB, OMB (Ver.C), or IMB03





379






TP4860 0A

Power Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TP48600A

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in a DBS3900 Using the TP48600A

IBC10

Power Cable Connections in an IBC10 Used by a DBS3900

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in an IBC10 Used by a DBS3900




2.6 BTS3900C This section describes cabinets, configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables, power distribution scheme, cables, and cable connections for a BTS3900C.

2.6.1 Cabinets Supported by a BTS3900C The BTS3900C, an outdoor compact mini base station, is classified into BTS3900C WCDMA and BTS3900C (Ver.C), in terms of cabinet versions. The following table lists cabinets supported by a BTS3900C.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Cabinet

Cabinet Description


BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet

This cabinet is used in UMTS scenarios and consists of an OMB and an RRU subrack. The BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet can be supplied with AC or DC power. The OMB is configured for housing the BBU and the RRU subrack is used to install RRU.

For specific components of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet, see components of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet in Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC Cabinet.


380



Cabinet

Cabinet Description


BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet

This cabinet is used in UMTS or multimode scenarios and consists of an OMB (Ver.C) and an RRU subrack. The BTS3900C cabinet can be supplied with AC or DC power. The OMB is configured for housing the BBU and the RRU subrack is used to install RRU.

For specific components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, see components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet in Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC Cabinet.

The following figure shows the exteriors of a BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet. Figure 2-246 Exteriors of BTS3900C cabinets

2.6.2 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900C WCDMA and a BTS3900C (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


381



Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C WCDMA This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured BTS3900C WCDMA which has the peak output power. NOTE

l Power cables purchased locally must comply with local regulations. l In the following table, P is short for Pole, indicating the number of switches simultaneously controlled by a pole.

AC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900C is supplied with AC power. Table 2-151 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in AC scenarios Power Supply

Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker




10 A/1 P

2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2)

≤ 40 m (131.23 ft)


DC Input The following table lists the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables when a BTS3900C is supplied with DC power. Table 2-152 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in DC scenarios Power Supply

Minimum Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker



-48 V DC

16 A/1 P

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)

≤ 15 m (590.55 ft)

Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) This section describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a fully configured base station which has the peak output power. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


382



NOTE


AC Scenario The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for an AC-powered BTS3900C. Table 2-153 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in AC scenario Power Supply

Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers

Cross-sectional Area of an Input Power Cable



1x20 A/1 P

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)

≤ 15 m (49.21 ft)


1x20 A/2 P

DC Scenario The following table describes the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables for a DC-powered BTS3900C. Table 2-154 Configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and power cables in DC scenario Power Supply

Minimum Requirements for the Upper-Level Circuit Breakers

Cross-sectional Area of an Input Power Cable


-48 V DC

1x32 A/1 P

4 mm2(0.006 in.2)

≤ 10 m (32.81 ft)

2.6.3 Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900C This section describes power distribution schemes in a BTS3900C WCDMA and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) supplied with different power.

Power Distribution Scheme for a BTS3900C WCDMA This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


383



Power Distribution Scheme in 110 V AC or 220 V AC Scenarios When 110 V AC or 220 V AC power is supplied, the EPS30-4815AF in the cabinet converts the AC power into DC power and distributes the power to other components. The following figure shows the power distribution scheme for a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC dual-live-wire power. Figure 2-247 Power distribution scheme in 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power. Table 2-155 Specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power Power Supply


220 V AC single-phase or 110 V AC duallive-wire

l BBU and HEUA: 1x10 A l RRU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x4 A

Power Distribution Scheme in -48 V DC Scenarios When -48 V DC power is supplied, the DC power distribution box in the cabinet distributes the power to the BBU, RRUs, and other components, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


384



Figure 2-248 Power distribution scheme in -48 V DC scenarios

The following table lists the specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with -48 V DC power. Table 2-156 Specifications of circuit breakers in a BTS3900C WCDMA supplied with -48 V DC power Power Supply


-48 V DC

l RRU: 1x20 A l BBU: 1x12 A l TM: 1x12 A l FAN: 1x12 A

Power Distribution Schemes for a BTS3900C (Ver.C) This section describes power distribution schemes for a BTS3900C supplied with 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power.

Power Distribution Scheme in a 110 V or 220 V AC Power Supply Scenario When a BTS3900C is supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC, the ETP48100-A1 in the OMB converts the one AC input into two DC outputs. Figure 2-249 shows the power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power, and Table 2-157 lists the specifications of fuses in it. NOTE

When 220 V AC single-phase power is used, the live wire must be connected to a circuit breaker.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


385



Figure 2-249 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with 220 V or 110 V AC power

Table 2-157 The specifications of fuses for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with 110 V or 220 V AC power. Power Supply

Specifications of DC Output Fuses


l RRU:1x30 A


l BBU:1x30 A l FAN:1x30 A l SPARE:1x30 A

Power Distribution Scheme in a -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario When a BTS3900C cabinet is supplied with -48 V DC power, the PDU10D-01 in the OMB converts the one DC input into several DC outputs and distributes the DC power to modules such as the BBU, HEUB, and RRU. Figure 2-249 shows the power distribution scheme for a cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power, and Table 2-158 lists the specifications of fuses in the base station.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


386



Figure 2-250 Power distribution scheme for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power

Table 2-158 Fuse specifications for a BTS3900C cabinet supplied with -48 V DC power Power Supply

Specifications of DC Output Fuses

-48 V DC

l RRU:1x30 A l BBU:1x30 A l FAN:1x30 A l SPARE:1x30 A

2.6.4 Cables and Cable Connections in a BTS3900C This section lists the reference sections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables for cables and cable connections in a BTS3900C.

Cable List For cables in a BTS3900C, see the following sections: l

BTS3900C WCDMA: BTS3900C WCDMA Cable List

l

BTS3900C (Ver.C): BTS3900C (Ver.C) Cable List

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


387



Cable Connections For cable connections in a BTS3900C, see topics related to cable connections in 3900 Series Base Station Cables. Table 2-159 Cable connections

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Base Station



Transmission Cable Connections

BTS3900C WCDMA

Power cable connections in a BTS3900C WCDMA

Monitoring signal cable connections in a BTS3900C WCDMA

Transmission cable connections

BTS3900C (Ver.C)

Power cable connections in a BTS3900C (Ver.C)

Monitoring signal cable connections in a BTS3900C (Ver.C)


388


3 Cabinet Description

3

Cabinet Description

About This Chapter This chapter describes information about cabinets supported by 3900 series base stations, including components and engineering specifications of the cabinets. 3.1 BTS3900 Cabinet Description The BTS3900 cabinet applies to a BTS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900 cabinets. 3.2 BTS3900L Cabinet Description The BTS3900L cabinet applies to a BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900L cabinets. 3.3 RFC Description The RFC applies to a BTS3900A. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of RFCs. 3.4 APM30H Description The APM30H applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of APM30Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment. 3.5 TMC11H Description The TMC11H applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of TMC11Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment. 3.6 IBBS200D Description The IBBS200D applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ds. 3.7 IBBS200T Description The IBBS200T applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ts. 3.8 IBBS300D Description The IBBS300D applies to a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300D. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


389



3.9 IBBS300T Description An IBBS300T applies to the BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300T. 3.10 IBBS20D Description An IBBS20D applies to the DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, configuration, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20D. 3.11 IBBS20L Description An IBBS20L can be used in a DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20L. 3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual IBBS20L-E provides power backup for communications devices so that power can be supplied to communications devices when no power inputs to power modules are available. This ensures normal service running and stable power supply. This manual describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of IBBS20L-E. 3.13 IBBS700D Description The IBBS700D applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700D. 3.14 IBBS700T Description The IBBSIBBS700T applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700T. 3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description The BTS3900AL cabinet applies to a BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of BTS3900AL cabinets, and specifications of configured customer equipment. 3.16 BTS3900C Cabinet Description There are two types of BTS3900C cabinets: BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet and BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of two types of BTS3900C cabinets. 3.17 OMB Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of OMBs. 3.18 IMB03 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IMB03s. 3.19 IFS06 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an IFS06. 3.20 INS12 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an INS12. 3.21 IMS06 Description The IMS06 applies to a BTS3900 or BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IMS06. 3.22 IBC10 Description This section describes the cabinet configuration and engineering specifications of an IBC10.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


390



3.1 BTS3900 Cabinet Description The BTS3900 cabinet applies to a BTS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900 cabinets.

3.1.1 Exteriors of BTS3900s The BTS3900 cabinets is vertical cabinets, which are designed in compliance with the IEC297 standard.

Exteriors The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D). NOTE

A BTS3900 (Ver.B) AC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) AC cabinet have the same exteriors as a BTS3900 (Ver.B) DC cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) DC cabinet, respectively, whereas a BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet has a different exterior from a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet.

Figure 3-1 Cabinet exteriors

Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D). NOTE

A BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet and a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet have the same dimensions as a BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet. The following figure takes BTS3900 (Ver.D) DC cabinet as an example.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


391



Figure 3-2 Cabinet dimensions

3.1.2 Components in BTS3900 Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900 cabinets.

Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet. Figure 3-3 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


392



Table 3-1 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet No.

Module

Optional or Mandator y

Maximum Quantity in a Single Cabinet

Remarks

1

Filler panel (RFU)

Optional

-

To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, a filler panel is installed in each vacant slot in the RFU subrack.

2

RFU

Mandatory

6

A radio frequency unit (RFU) modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.B) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU..

3

FAN

Mandatory

1

A FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN is configured with the fan monitoring unit type C (FMUC), which monitors the fans and reports alarms.

4

Filler panel (air intake vent)

Mandatory

1

A filler panel is installed in the air intake vent.

5

BBU

Mandatory

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

6

DCDU01

Mandatory

1

A DCDU-01 distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.

7

Transmi ssion equipme nt

Optional

-

A 2 U customer space is reserved for transmission equipment.

8

EPS24S 48100D C

Mandatory

1

An EPS24S48100DC converts external +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01.


393



No.

Module



Remarks

9

EPS489 0

Mandatory

1

An EPS4890 converts 220 V AC single-phase power, 220 V AC threephase power, or 110 V AC dual-livewire power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-01.

NOTE

The BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet can feed power to customer's transmission equipment. The customer equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher.

Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet. Figure 3-4 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


394



Table 3-2 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet No.

Module



Remarks

1

Filler panel (RFU)

Optional

-


2

RFU

Mandatory

6

An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.C) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..

3

FAN 03B

Mandatory

1

A FAN 03B dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN 03B is configured with the fan monitoring unit type E (FMUE), which monitors the fans and reports alarms.

4


Mandatory

1


5

BBU

Mandatory

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

6

DCDU11A

Mandatory

1

A DCDU-11A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.

7


Optional

-



395



No.

Module



Remarks

8

ETP481 50-A3

Mandatory

1

An ETP48150-A3 converts 220 V AC single-phase power, 220 V AC threephase power, or 110 V AC dual-livewire power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-11A.

NOTE


Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet. Figure 3-5 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


396



Table 3-3 Components in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet No.

Module



Remarks

1

Filler panel (RFU)

Optional

-


2

RFU

Mandatory

6

An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900 (Ver.D) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..

3

FAN 03C

Mandatory

1

A FAN 03C dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN 03C is configured with the fan monitoring unit type EA (FMUEA), which monitors the fans and reports alarms.

4


Mandatory

1


5

BBU

Mandatory

2

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. If there are two BBUs, the second BBU is installed in the 2 U space below the DCDU-12A. The BTS3900 (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

6

DCDU12A

Mandatory

1


7

BBU

Optional

-

A 2 U customer space is reserved for a BBU.


397



No.

Module



Remarks

8

DCDU12B

Optional

1

If a BTS3900 configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is installed in the 1 U space to feed DC power to RRUs.

9


Optional

-


10

Filler panel

Optional

-

A filler panel is installed in each vacant slot for a PSU (R4850G2).

11

PSU (R4850 G2)

Mandatory

5

A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

12

PMU 11A

Mandatory

1

A power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.

13

EPU05 A-02 subrack

Mandatory

1

An EPU05A-02 converts 220 V AC single-phase power or 220 V AC threephase power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to a DCDU-12A or DCDU-12B.

NOTE


3.1.3 BTS3900 Engineering Specifications BTS3900 engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards that have been complied with.

Input Power Specifications The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have different power input specifications. Table 3-4, Table 3-5, and Table 3-6 describe the power input specifications for the BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, respectively.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


398



NOTE

For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900 cabinet, see 2.1.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900 in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.

Table 3-4 Input power supported by the BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet Input Power

Voltage Range

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

+24 V DC

+21.6 V DC to +29 V DC

120/208 V AC to 127/220 V AC dual-livewire

105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC


90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC

200 V AC to 240 V AC single-phase

176 V AC to 290 V AC

200/346 V AC to 240/415 V AC threephase

176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC

Table 3-5 Input power supported by the BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet Input Power

Voltage Range

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC


105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC


90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC




176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC

Table 3-6 Input power supported by the BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Input Power

Voltage Range

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC




176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC


399



Equipment Specifications The following table lists the size and weight of BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets. Table 3-7 Equipment specifications of BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets Cabinet

Dimensions (H x W x D)

Weight

BTS3900 (Ver.B)/BTS3900 (Ver.C)

900 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm

≤ 135 kg (including 1 BBU and 6 RFUs and excluding the transmission equipment)

BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet

l DC: 900 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm

l DC: ≤ 135 kg (including 1 BBU and 6 RFUs and excluding the AC power supply)

l AC: 1250 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (including the IMS06; base: 40 mm x 600 mm x 420 mm)

l AC: ≤ 180 kg (including 1 BBU, 6 RFUs, and the AC power supply)

Environment Specifications The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the same environment specifications, as provided in the following table. Table 3-8 Environment specifications of the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets Item

Specification/Standard

Operating temperature

-20°C to +55°C Short term: +50°C to +55°C NOTE Short term indicates that a base station does not work for over 15 days within a year or that a base station does not continuously work for over 72 hours.

Relative humidity

5% RH to 95% RH

Atmospheric pressure

70 kPa to 106 kPa

Noise Sound Power Level

ETS300 753 3.1 ≤7.2bels

Storage Time

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

It is recommended that the device be installed and used within one year after its delivery because of the failure rate.


400



Item


Biological environment

l The equipment room must be well-sealed and dustproof to prevent the growth of fungus or mildew. l Ensure that animals such as rodents (rats for example), ants, winged insects, or snakes cannot enter the equipment room.

Surge Protection Specifications The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 3-9. NOTE

l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications depend on the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.

Table 3-9 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets Port

Surge Protection Mode

Specification

DC power supply port

Surge

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

AC power supply port

Surge current

5 kA

Standards The BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets comply with the same standards, as provided in the following table.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


401



Table 3-10 Standards with which the BTS3900 (Ver.B), BTS3900 (Ver.C), and BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets comply Item

Standard

Security standards

l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/ SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/ SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/ SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/ SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions

Protection rating

IP20

Operating environment

ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1

Storage

ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations"

Transportation

ETSI EN300019-1-2 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"

Anti-seismic performance

IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff: Vibration -Time-history method YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)

Anti-earthquake performance

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

ETSI EN 300019-1-3: "Earthquake"


402



Item

Standard

EMC

NOTE The BTS3900 complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900 is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 The GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeB meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 The eNodeB has been certified by European standards. The eNodeB meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


403



Item

Standard l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l 3GPP TS 36.113 l ETSI EN 301489-1/23 l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10) l ITU-R SM.329-10

Surge protection

l IEC 62305-1 Protection against lightning - Part 1: General principles l IEC 62305-3 Protection against lightning - Part 3: Physical damage to structures and life hazard l IEC 62305-4 Protection against lightning - Part 4: Electrical and electronic systems within structures l ITU-T K.35 Bonding configurations and earthing at remote electronic sites l ITU-T K.56 Protection of radio base stations against lightning discharges l ITU-T K.97 Lightning protection of distributed base stations l ETSI EN 300 253 Environmental Engineering(EE): Earthing and bonding configuration inside telecommunications centers

3.2 BTS3900L Cabinet Description The BTS3900L cabinet applies to a BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of BTS3900L cabinets.

3.2.1 Exteriors of BTS3900Ls The BTS3900L cabinets is vertical cabinets, which are designed in compliance with the IEC297 standard.

Exteriors The following figure shows the exteriors of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


404



Figure 3-6 Cabinet exteriors

Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D). NOTE

A BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet and a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet have the same dimensions as a BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet. The following figure takes BTS3900L (Ver.D) DC cabinet as an example.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


405



Figure 3-7 Cabinet dimensions

3.2.2 Components in BTS3900L Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900L cabinets.

Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


406



Figure 3-8 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet. Table 3-11 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet No .

Module

Optio nal or Mand atory

Maxi mum Quant ity

Remarks

1

Filler panel

Manda tory

-


2

RFU

Manda tory

12

An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.B) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU..

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


407



No .

Module


Maxi mum Quant ity

Remarks

3

FAN

Manda tory

2

A FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN is configured with the FMUC, which monitors the fans and reports alarms.

4

Filler panel

Manda tory

2


5

DCDU-01

Manda tory

2

A DCDU-01 distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.

6

BBU

Manda tory

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.

7

Cable trough

Manda tory

1

-

8

BBU

Option al

1

This 2 U space can house a BBU in triple-mode base stations. It is recommended that this space be reserved even when only one BBU is installed.

9

Space for customer equipment

Option al

-

This 2 U space can house the GATM or transmission equipment. The GATM is preferentially installed in this space and is powered by the DCDU-01. If there is no GATM, the transmission equipment is installed in this space.

NOTE

The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside a cabinet. When the transmission equipment is installed in the cabinet in special situations, the following conditions must be met: l The transmission equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher. l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the DCDU-01 cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.

Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


408



Figure 3-9 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet. Table 3-12 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet No .

Mod ule


Maxi mum Quant ity

Remarks

1

Filler panel

Option al

-


2

RFU

Mandat ory

12

An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.C) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


409



No .

Mod ule


Maxi mum Quant ity

Remarks

3

FAN 03B

Mandat ory

2

A FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN is configured with the FMUE, which monitors the fans and reports alarms.

4

Filler panel

Mandat ory

2


5

DCD U-11 A

Mandat ory

2


6

BBU

Mandat ory

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.

7

Cable trough

Mandat ory

1

-

8

BBU

Option al

1


9

Space for custo mer equip ment

Option al

-

This 2 U space can house the GATM or transmission equipment. The GATM is preferentially installed in this space and is powered by the DCDU-11A. If there is no GATM, the transmission equipment is installed in this space.

NOTE

The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside a cabinet. When the transmission equipment is installed in the cabinet in special situations, the following conditions must be met: l The transmission equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher. l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the DCDU-11A cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.

Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) Cabinet The following figure shows the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


410



Figure 3-10 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. Table 3-13 Components in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Module


Maxi mum Quant ity

Remarks

1

Filler panel

Optio nal

-



411



No .

Module


Maxi mum Quant ity

Remarks

2

RFUs

Mand atory

12

An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.D) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..

3

FAN 03C

Mand atory

2

A FAN 03C dissipates heat from the cabinet. The FAN 03C is configured with the FMUEA, which monitors the fans and reports alarms.

4

Filler panel

Mand atory

2


5

DCDU-12A

Mand atory

2

A DCDU-12A distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet. If the cabinet is configured with more than six RFUs, two DCDU-12A modules are required.

6

BBU

Mand atory

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The BTS3900L (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

7

Cable trough

Mand atory

1

-

8

BBU

Optio nal

1


9

DCDU-12B

Optio nal

1

The 1 U space can house a DCDU-12B when the BTS3900L uses DC power and is configured with RFUs and RRUs. This DCDU-12B distributes DC power to RRUs.

10

Space for customer equipment

Optio nal

-

The 1 U space can house a GATM or a transmission device in DC input scenarios. The GATM is preferentially installed in this space and is powered by the DCDU-12A. If there is no GATM, the transmission equipment is installed in this space.

11

IMS06

Mand atory

1

An IMS06 is used to house an EPU05A-02.


412



No .

Module


Maxi mum Quant ity

Remarks

12

Filler panel

Optio nal

-

A filler panel is installed in each vacant slot for a PSU (R4850G2).

13

PSU (R4850G2)

Mand atory

5

A PSU (R4850G2) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

14

PMU 11A

Mand atory

1

A PMU 11A manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.

15

EPU05A-02 subrack

Mand atory

1

EPU05A-02 subracks are used in separated macro base station with different AC inputs to distribute DC power into components in a cabinet.

NOTE

The transmission equipment is preferentially installed outside a cabinet. When the transmission equipment is installed in the cabinet in special situations, the following conditions must be met: l The transmission equipment is able to work with an ambient temperature of 55oC or higher. l The transmission equipment is supplied with power by external power equipment because the DCDU-12A cannot provide power for the transmission equipment.

3.2.3 BTS3900L Engineering Specifications BTS3900L engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards that have been complied with.

Input Power Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets support the same power input, as provided in Table 3-14. Table 3-15 lists the input power specifications of the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets. NOTE

For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900L cabinet, see 2.2.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900L in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.

Table 3-14 Input power supported by the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Input Power

Voltage Range

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC


413



Table 3-15 Input power supported by the BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets Input Power

Voltage Range

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC




176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC

Equipment Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets have the same size and weight. Table 3-16 lists the equipment specifications of BTS3900L (Ver.B) or BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets. Table 3-17 lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet. Table 3-16 Equipment specifications of BTS3900L (Ver.B) or BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets Item

Specifications


1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm

Weight

≤ 235 kg (fully configured cabinet delivered with boards and modules: including 2 BBUs and 12 RFUs and excluding the transmission equipment)

Table 3-17 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet Item

Specifications


l DC: 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm l AC: 1950 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (with IMS06; Base: 40 mm x 600 mm x 420 mm)

Weight

l DC: ≤ 235 kg (fully configured cabinet delivered with boards and modules: including 2 BBUs and 12 RFUs and excluding the transmission equipment) l AC: ≤ 280 kg (fully configured cabinet delivered with boards and modules: including 2 BBUs, 12 RFUs, and the AC power supply, and excluding the transmission equipment)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


414



Environment Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the same environment specifications, as provided in the following table. Table 3-18 Environment specifications of the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets Item



-20°C to +55°C Short term: +50°C to +55°C NOTE Short term indicates that a base station does not work for over 15 days within a year or that a base station does not continuously work for over 72 hours.

Relative humidity

5% RH to 95% RH


70 kPa to 106 kPa


ETS300 753 3.1 ≤7.2bels

Storage Time


Biological environment

l The equipment room must be well-sealed and dustproof to prevent the growth of fungus or mildew. l Ensure that animals such as rodents (rats for example), ants, winged insects, or snakes cannot enter the equipment room.

Surge Protection Specifications The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets have the same surge protection specifications, as provided in Table 3-19. NOTE


Table 3-19 Surge protection specifications of ports on the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Port


Specification

DC power supply port

Surge

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)


415



Standards The BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets comply with the same standards, as provided in the following table. Table 3-20 Standards with which the BTS3900L (Ver.B), BTS3900L (Ver.C), and BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets comply Item

Standard

Security standards

l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/ SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/ SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/ SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/ SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/ SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions

Protection rating

IP20

Operating environment

ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1

Storage

ETSI EN300019-1-1V2.1.4 (2003-04) class1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations"

Transportation

ETSI EN300019-1-2V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"

Anti-seismic performance

IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff:Vibration -Time-history method YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)

Anti-earthquake performance

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



416



Item

Standard

EMC

NOTE The BTS3900L complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900L is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 The GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeB meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 The eNodeB has been certified by European standards. The eNodeB meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


417



Item

Standard l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l 3GPP TS 36.113 l ETSI EN 301489-1/23 l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10) l ITU-R SM.329-10

Surge protection


3.3 RFC Description The RFC applies to a BTS3900A. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of RFCs.

3.3.1 Exterior of the RFC This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an RFC. The following figure shows the exterior of an RFC.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


418



Figure 3-11 Exterior of an RFC

The following figure shows the dimensions of an RFC. Figure 3-12 Dimensions of an RFC

3.3.2 Components in RFCs This section describes module and board configurations in RFCs.

Components in an RFC (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.B).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


419



Figure 3-13 Components in an RFC (Ver.B)

The following table lists the components in an RFC (Ver.B). Table 3-21 Components in an RFC (Ver.B)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Module/ Board

Optional or Mandatory


Description

1

DCDU-01

Mandatory

1

A direct current distribution unit-01 (DCDU-01) distributes DC power to components in an RFC.

2

4.8.3 ELU

Mandatory

1

An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

3

4.7.1 Door Status Sensor

Mandatory

1

A door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.

4

FAN 01A

Mandatory

1

A FAN 01A is configured with the fans and CMUA. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.


420



No.

Module/ Board



Description

5

RFU

Mandatory

6

An RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.B) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU..

6

Filler panel

Optional

-


Components in an RFC (Ver.C) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 3-14 Components in an RFC (Ver.C)

The following table lists the components in an RFC (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


421



Table 3-22 Components in an RFC (Ver.C) No.

Module /Board


Maxi mum Quan tity in a Singl e Cabi net

Description

1

DCDU-1 1A

Mandat ory

1

A DCDU-11A distributes ten DC power outputs to components in an RFC.

2

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1

An ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

3


Mandat ory

1


4

FAN 01B

Mandat ory

1

A FAN 01B is configured with the fans and CMUE. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUE controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.

5

RFU

Mandat ory

6

RFUs are used in a distributed base station. RRUs modulate and demodulate baseband signals and RF signals, process data, amplify power, and conduct voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) detection. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.C) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..

6

Filler panel

Option al

-


7

4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC

Mandat ory

1

A DC junction box converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.

Components in an RFC (Ver.D) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.D).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


422



Figure 3-15 Components in an RFC (Ver.D)

The following table lists the components in an RFC (Ver.D). Table 3-23 Components in an RFC (Ver.D)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Module /Board


Maxi mum Qua ntity in a Singl e Cabi net

Description

1

DCDU-1 2B

Option al

1

A DCDU-12B provides ten DC power outputs for RRUs.

2

FAN 01C

Mandat ory

1

A FAN 01C is configured with the fans and CMUEA. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUEA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1


4


Mandat ory

1



423



No.

Module /Board



Description

5

DCDU-1 2A

Mandat ory

1

A DCDU-12A provides ten DC power outputs for all components in an RFC.

6

Filler panel

Option al

-


7

RFU

Mandat ory

6

RFUs are used in a distributed base station. RRUs modulate and demodulate baseband signals and RF signals, process data, amplify power, and conduct VSWR detection. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.D) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..

8


Mandat ory

1


Components in an RFC (Ver.E) The following figure shows the components in an RFC (Ver.E).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


424



Figure 3-16 Components in an RFC (Ver.E)

The following table describes the components in an RFC (Ver.E). Table 3-24 Components in an RFC (Ver.E)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Module /Board



Description

1

DCDU-1 2B

Option al

1

A DCDU-12B provides ten DC power outputs for RRUs in a DC scenario.

2

FAN 01D

Mandat ory

1

A FAN 01D is configured with the fans and CMUH. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUH controls temperature, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the ELU of the cabinet.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1


4


Mandat ory

1


5

DCDU-1 2A

Mandat ory

1

A DCDU-12A provides ten DC power outputs for all components in an RFC.


425



No.

Module /Board



Description

6

Filler panel

Option al

-


7

RFU

Mandat ory

6

RFUs are used in a distributed base station. RRUs modulate and demodulate baseband signals and RF signals, process data, amplify power, and conduct VSWR detection. For details, see RFU Hardware Description. The RFC (Ver.E) supports the following RFUs: MRFU, MRFUd, MRFUe, DRFU, GRFU, WRFU, WRFUa, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFU, LRFUe, CRFUd, and CRFUe..

8


Mandat ory

1


3.3.3 RFC Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of RFCs, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.

Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of an RFC. Table 3-25 Input power specifications Power Supply

Rated Voltage

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an RFC. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


426



Table 3-26 Equipment specifications of an RFC Item

Cabinet

Specifications

Remarks

Dimensio ns (H x W x D)

RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E)

l Cabinet: 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 18.90 in.)

-

RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E)

≤ 107 kg (235.89 lb)

Weight

l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Including six RFUs

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E). Table 3-27 Environmental specifications Item

Specifications


-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation)

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH


70 kPa to 106 kPa

Storage time

The product must be installed and put into use within a year after being delivered or it may malfunction.

Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of the ports in an RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), RFC (Ver.D), or RFC (Ver.E). Table 3-28 Surge protection specifications of the ports Port

-48 V DC input power port

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Specifications Surge

Surge Current

l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 us)

l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 us)

l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 us)

l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 us)


427



3.4 APM30H Description The APM30H applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of APM30Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment. NOTE

l APM30H cabinets are classified into two types: APM30H AC cabinets and APM30H DC (-48 V) cabinets. An APM30H DC (-48 V) cabinet is a TMC11H cabinet, which is described in 3.5 TMC11H Description. This section only describes an APM30H AC cabinet. l Unless otherwise specified, an APM30H cabinet mentioned in this document is an APM30H AC cabinet and a TMC11H cabinet mentioned in this document is an APM30H DC (-48 V) cabinet.

3.4.1 Exteriors of APM30Hs The advanced power module with heat exchanger (APM30H) is used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. It is small and easy to transport. The following figure shows the exteriors of APM30Hs. Figure 3-17 Exteriors of APM30Hs

The following figure shows the dimensions of an APM30H.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


428



Figure 3-18 Dimensions of an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.E), or APM30H (Ver.D)

3.4.2 Components in APM30Hs This section describes module and board configurations in APM30Hs. An APM30H houses a BBU and also provides 5 U installation space for customer equipment such as the EMUA or EMUB, AC heater, and service outlet unit (SOU), which are optional.

Components in an APM30H (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.B). Figure 3-19 Components in an APM30H (Ver.B)

The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.B).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


429



Table 3-29 Components in an APM30H (Ver.B) No.

Module/ Board



Description

1

FAN 02A

Mandatory

1

A FAN 02A is configured with the fans, Hert power monitoring interface unit (HPMI), and central monitoring unit type A (CMUA). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.

2

SLPU

Mandatory

2

To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP). To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandatory

1


4

PSU (EPW30-48 A)

Mandatory

3

A power supply unit (PSU) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

5


Mandatory

1



430



No.

Module/ Board



Description

6

EPS 01A or EPS 01C Subrackor EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack

Mandatory

1

The EPS 01 subrack distributes AC and DC power to components in a cabinet. l The EPS 01A applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPS 01B applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPS 01C applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPS 01D applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power.

7

BBU

Optional

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

8

GATM

Optional

2

A GSM antenna and TMA control module (GATM) supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to RET control signals, and monitors the feeder current.

9

EMUA/ EMUB

Optional

1

An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) or environment monitoring unit type B (EMUB) monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.


431



No.

Module/ Board



Description

10

AC Heater

Optional

1

An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space above the SOU.

11

SOU

Optional

1

An SOU transfers AC power supply to customer equipment. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.

12

4.6.7 Outer Air Circulation Assembly

Mandatory

1

An outer air circulation component includes a heat exchanger core and fans. l The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust. l The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.

13

4.3.20 AC Junction Box

Mandatory

1

When a heater or a heating film is configured, an AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film.

14

PMU 01B

Mandatory

1

A power monitoring unit 01B (PMU 01B) manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.

Components in an APM30H (Ver.C) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


432



Figure 3-20 Components in an APM30H (Ver.C)

The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.C). Table 3-30 Components in an APM30H (Ver.C) No .

Module /Board



Description

1

FAN 02B

Mandat ory

1

A FAN 02B is configured with the fans, HPMI, and central monitoring unit type E (CMUE). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.

2

SLPU

Mandat ory

2

l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1


4

PSU (PSU485 0A)

Mandat ory

3

A PSU converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.


433



No .

Module /Board



Description

5


Mandat ory

1


6

EPU03A -02 or EPU03A -04 Subrack or EPU03A -03 or EPU03A -05 Subrack

Mandat ory

1

The EPU subrack distributes AC and DC power to components in a cabinet.

BBU

Option al

7

l The EPU03A-02 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU03A-03 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU03A-04 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPU03A-05 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power. 1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

8

GATM

Option al

2

A GATM supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to the RET, and monitors the feeder current.

9

EMUA/ EMUB

Option al

1

An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.

10

Filler module

Option al

3

A filler module is a standard plastic component with a height of 1 U. A filler module is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet. Before installing other modules, remove the filler module.


434



No .

Module /Board



Description

11

AC Heater

Option al

1


12

SOU

Option al

1


13

4.6.7 Outer Air Circulati on Assembl y

Mandat ory

1


14


Mandat ory

1


15

PMU 01B

Mandat ory

1

A PMU 01B manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.

Components in an APM30H (Ver.D) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.D).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


435



Figure 3-21 Components in an APM30H (Ver.D)

The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.D). Table 3-31 Components in an APM30H (Ver.D) No.

Module/ Board



Description

1

4.6.7 Outer Air Circulatio n Assembly

Mandat ory

1


2

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Mandat ory

1



436



No.

Module/ Board



Description

3

FAN 02D

Mandat ory

1

A FAN 02D is configured with the fans and central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.

4

SLPU

Mandat ory

2


5

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1


6


Mandat ory

1


7

EPU05A-0 2 or EPU05A-0 4 Subrackor EPU05A-0 3 or EPU05A-0 5 Subrack

Mandat ory

1

An EPU05A subrack distributes AC and DC power to other components in a cabinet. l The EPU05A-02 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-03 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-04 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPU05A-05 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power.

8

BBU

Mandat ory

2

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

9

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

GATM

Option al

2

A GATM supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to RET control signals, and monitors the feeder current.


437



No.

Module/ Board



Description

10

EMUA/ EMUB

Option al

1

An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. When a GATM is configured, an EMUA or EMUB is installed below the GATM.

11

Air baffle

Mandat ory

5

An air baffle is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.

12

AC Heater

Option al

1


13

SOU

Option al

1


Components in an APM30H (Ver.E) The following figure shows the components in an APM30H (Ver.E).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


438



Figure 3-22 Components in an APM30H (Ver.E)

The following table lists the components in an APM30H (Ver.E). Table 3-32 Components in an APM30H (Ver.E) No.

Module/ Board



Description

1

Outer Air Circulatio n Assembly

Mandat ory

1


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


439



No.

Module/ Board



Description

2

AC Junction Box

Mandat ory

1


3

FAN 02E

Mandat ory

1

A FAN 02E is configured with fans and a cabinet control unit type B (CCUB). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.

4

SLPU

Mandat ory

2


5

ELU

Mandat ory

1


6

Door Status Sensor

Mandat ory

1


7

EPU05A-0 6/08 Subrackor EPU05A-0 7/09 Subrack

Mandat ory

1

An EPU05A subrack distributes AC and DC power to other components in a cabinet. l The EPU05A-06 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-07 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power. l The EPU05A-08 applies to a separated macro base station supplied with 110 V AC power. l The EPU05A-09 applies to a distributed base station supplied with 110 V AC power.

8

BBU

Mandat ory

2

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The APM30H (Ver.E) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


440



No.

Module/ Board



Description

9

GATM

Option al

2

A GATM supplies power to the TMA, reports alarms related to RET control signals, and monitors the feeder current.

10

EMUA/ EMUB

Option al

1

An EMUA or EMUB monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. When a GATM is configured, an EMUA or EMUB is installed below the GATM.

11

Air baffle

Mandat ory

5


12

AC Heater

Option al

1


13

SOU

Option al

1


14

PDU03D-0 2

Option al

3

A PDU03D-02 can supply power to three RRUs. l In a BTS3900A (Ver.E) where RFUs and RRUs are configured and the number of RRUs is less than or equal to 9, PDU03D-02s are configured to supply power to the RRUs. l In a DBS3900 where an APM30H (Ver.E) is configured and the number of RRUs ranges from 7 to 15, PDU03D-02s are configured to supply power to the RRUs.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


441



No.

Module/ Board



Description

15

PDU01D-0 1

Option al

1

A PDU01D-01 can be used together with an ODM to supply power to a maximum of 6 RRUs. l In a BTS3900A (Ver.E) where RFUs and RRUs are configured and the number of RRUs ranges from 10 to 15, PDU01D-01s are configured to supply power to the RRUs. l In a DBS3900 where an APM30H (Ver.E) is configured and the number of RRUs ranges from 16 to 21, PDU01D-01s are configured to supply power to the RRUs.

3.4.3 APM30H Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of APM30Hs, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.

Input Power Specifications An APM30H can be supplied with different power. Power equipment in the APM30H converts AC power into -48 V DC power for the base station. The following table lists the AC input power specifications of an APM30H. Table 3-33 AC input power specifications Power Supply

Rated Voltage

Operating Voltage




220 V AC threephase

l Line to neutral voltage: 200 V AC to 240 V AC


l Phase-to-phase voltage: 346 V AC to 415 V AC







Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


442



Power Supply

Rated Voltage

Operating Voltage

120 V AC duallive-wirea





a: APM30Hs (Ver.E), APM30Hs (Ver.D), APM30Hs (Ver.D_B), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A2), and APM30s (Ver.D_A1) can be supplied with 120 V AC dual-live-wire power, but APM30Hs (Ver.B) and APM30Hs (Ver.C) cannot.

Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an APM30H. Table 3-34 Equipment specifications of an APM30H Item

Cabinet

Specifications

Remarks


APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)


-


≤ 68 kg (149.91 lb)

APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or APM30H (Ver.D)

≤ 87 kg (191.80 lb)

Weight

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the cabinet frame, outer air circulation component (heat exchanger core and outer air circulation fan), inner air circulation fan assembly, and EPU l Excluding the BBU, customer transmission equipment, PMU, or PSU

Weight with the typical configurations l Including the cabinet, one PMU, three PSUs, and one BBU l Excluding transmission equipment


443


Item


Cabinet

Specifications

Remarks

APM30H (Ver.E)

≤ 87 kg (191.80 lb)

Weight with the typical configurations l Including the cabinet, two PSUs, and one BBU l Excluding transmission equipment

Heat dissipatio n capability of a cabinet

APM30H (Ver.B)

The maximum heat dissipation capability is 700 W when the ambient temperature is 50oC.

-

APM30H (Ver.C)


-

APM30H (Ver.D)


-

APM30H (Ver.E)

The maximum heat dissipation capability is 1800 W when the ambient temperature is 50°C.

-

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an APM30H. Table 3-35 Environmental specifications

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Cabinet

Specifications


APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C),

-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation). If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F), a heater is required.


444



Item

Cabinet

Specifications

Relative humidity

APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E)

5% RH to 100% RH

APM30H (Ver.B)

Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W

Atmospheric pressure Noise power level

70 kPa to 106 kPa

l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) APM30H (Ver.C)

l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is equal to 1050 W or between 700 W and 1050 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)

APM30H (Ver.D)


APM30H (Ver.E)

l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 1800 W or between 700 W and 1800 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


445



Item

Cabinet

Specifications

Storage time



Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of the ports in an APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), APM30H (Ver.D), or APM30H (Ver.E). Table 3-36 Surge protection specifications of the ports Specifications

Port

AC power port

Surge

Surge Current





3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet The equipment in a Huawei cabinet must meet the requirements for engineering specifications. The following conditions must be met when the customer equipment is installed in the following cabinets: APM30H (Ver.B)/APM30H (Ver.C)/APM30H (Ver.D)/APM30H (Ver.E)/ APM30H (Ver.D_B)/APM30H (Ver.D_A2)/APM30 (Ver.D_A1), TMC11H (Ver.B)/TMC11H (Ver.C)/TMC11H (Ver.D)/TMC11H (Ver.E)/TMC11H (Ver.D_B)/TMC11H (Ver.D_A2)/TMC (Ver.D_A1), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z), and BTS3900AL (Ver.A): l

Dimension requirements Figure 3-23 shows the dimension requirements.

l Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

–

The width is 19 inch.

–

The depth of the customer equipment which uses natural ventilation or supports heat dissipation from left to right is less than or equal to 280 mm (11.02 in.). The depth of the customer equipment which supports heat dissipation from front to rear is less than 250 mm (9.84 in.).

–

The cabling space in front of the front panel is less than or equal to 100 mm (3.94 in.).

Heat dissipation requirements Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

446


l


–

If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must dissipate heat out from left to right or from front to rear.

–

If the customer equipment does not have built-in fans but uses natural ventilation, a minimum of 1 U space must be reserved above and below the customer equipment to ensure heat dissipation.

Temperature requirements Temperature requirements for customer equipment are different in common areas and high-temperature areas. Figure 3-24 lists the detailed requirements.

Figure 3-23 Dimension requirements and heat dissipation requirements

(1) Equipment using natural ventilation

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(2) Equipment dissipating heat out from (3) Equipment dissipating heat out from left to right front to rear


447



Figure 3-24 Temperature requirements for the customer equipment

NOTE

l Common areas and high-temperature areas are differentiated as follows: l

Common areas: The highest ambient temperature is equal to or less than 40oC.

l

High-temperature areas: The highest ambient temperature exceeds 40oC.

l The following description illustrates the preceding figure using common areas as an example. If the operating temperature of the customer equipment ranges from -15oC to 60oC, the customer equipment meets requirements; if the operating temperature ranges from -5oC to 60oC, the customer equipment does not meet requirements.

The customer equipment to be installed in the APM30, APM30H (Ver.A), TMC, or TMC11H (Ver.A) must meet the following requirements: l

Dimension requirements Figure 3-25 shows the dimension requirements.

l

l Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

–


–

The depth of the customer equipment which uses natural ventilation or supports heat dissipation from left to right is less than or equal to 310 mm (12.20 in.). The depth of the customer equipment which supports heat dissipation from front to rear is less than 280 mm (11.02 in.).

–

The cabling space in front of the front panel is less than or equal to 70 mm (2.76 in.).

Heat dissipation requirements –

If the customer equipment has built-in fans, the fans must dissipate heat out from left to right or from front to rear.

–


Temperature requirements Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

448



Temperature requirements for customer equipment are different in common areas and high-temperature areas. Figure 3-26 lists the detailed requirements. Figure 3-25 Dimension requirements and heat dissipation requirements

(1) Equipment using natural ventilation

(2) Equipment dissipating heat out from (3) Equipment dissipating heat out from left to right front to rear

Figure 3-26 Temperature requirements for the customer equipment

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


449



NOTE

l Common areas and high-temperature areas are differentiated as follows: l

Common areas: The highest ambient temperature is equal to or less than 40oC.

l

High-temperature areas: The highest ambient temperature exceeds 40oC.

l The following description illustrates the preceding figure using common areas as an example. If the operating temperature of the customer equipment ranges from -15oC to 60oC, the customer equipment meets requirements; if the operating temperature ranges from -5oC to 60oC, the customer equipment does not meet requirements.

3.5 TMC11H Description The TMC11H applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of TMC11Hs, and specifications of configured customer equipment.

3.5.1 Exteriors of TMC11Hs The transmission cabinet of 11 U high with heat exchanger (TMC11H) is used for Huawei wireless products outdoors. It supplies DC power to the distributed or separated macro base station in outdoor scenarios. The following figure shows the exteriors of TMC11Hs. Figure 3-27 Exteriors of TMC11Hs

The following figure shows the dimensions of an TMC11H.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


450



Figure 3-28 Dimensions of an TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.E),or TMC11H (Ver.D)

3.5.2 Components in TMC11Hs This section describes module and board configurations in TMC11Hs.

Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.B): l

One type of TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.

l

The other type of TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


451



Figure 3-29 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B)

The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.B). Table 3-37 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.B)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Module/ Board



Description

1

FAN 02A

Mandatory

1

A FAN 02A is configured with the fans, HPMI, and CMUA. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.


452



No.

Module/ Board



Description

2

4.5.1 SLPU

Mandatory

2

To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP). To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two universal signal lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandatory

1


4

DCDU-03Bo r DCDU-03C

Mandatory

1

A direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) or direct current distribution unit-03C (DCDU-03C) distributes DC power to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03C.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


453



No.

Module/ Board



Description

5

BBU3900

Optional

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.B) supports the BBU3900.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

6


Mandatory

1


7

EMUA/ EMUB

Optional

1

An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) or environment monitoring unit type B (EMUB) monitors the environment variables in a cabinet and processes alarms. An EMUA or EMUB must be configured in the 1 U space below the BBU when more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs are required.

8

AC Heater

Optional

1

An AC heater ensures that components in a cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of the cabinet.

9

4.6.11 Heat Exchanger Core

Mandatory

1

A heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and accelerates internal and external air exchanges. This lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and protects a cabinet from dust.

10


Mandatory

1



454



Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.C): l

One type of TMC11H (Ver.C) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.

l

The other type of TMC11H (Ver.C) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.

Figure 3-30 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C)

The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


455



Table 3-38 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.C) No.

Module /Board



Description

1

FAN 02B

Mandat ory

1

A FAN 02B is configured with the fans, HPMI, and CMUE. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.

2

SLPU

Mandat ory

2

To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP. To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It is configured with two USLP2 boards.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1


4

DCDU-1 1Bor DCDU-1 1C

Mandat ory

1

A direct current distribution unit-11B (DCDU-11B) or direct current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) distributes ten DC power outputs to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-11B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-11C.

5

BBU390 0

Option al

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900.

6

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Mandat ory

1



456



No.

Module /Board



Description

7

4.7.4 (Optiona l) EMUA/ EMUB

Option al

1


8

Filler module

Option al

5

A filler module is a standard plastic component with a height of 1 U. A filler module is configured in the reserved space below the BBU to improve the dissipation capability of a cabinet.

9

AC Heater

Option al

1


10


Mandat ory

1


11


Mandat ory

1


Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.D): l

One type of TMC11H (Ver.D) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.

l

The other type of TMC11H (Ver.D) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


457



Figure 3-31 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D)

The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.D).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


458



Table 3-39 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.D) No.

Module/ Board



Description

1

FAN 02D

Mandat ory

1

A FAN 02D is configured with the fans and central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.

2

SLPU

Mandat ory

2


3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1


4

DCDU-1 2Bor DCDU-1 2C

Mandat ory

1

A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) or direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) distributes ten DC power outputs to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C is of 1 U high. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a DBS3900 supplied with -48 V DC power, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12B. l When a TMC11H is used as a power cabinet in a BTS3900A supplied with -48 V DC power or as a transmission cabinet, the TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-12C.

5

BBU390 0

Option al

2

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.D) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

6

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Mandat ory

1



459



No.

Module/ Board



Description

7

EMUA/ EMUB

Option al

1


8

Air baffle

Mandat ory

5


9

AC Heater

Option al

1


10


Mandat ory

1


11


Mandat ory

1


Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E) There are two types of TMC11Hs (Ver.E): l

One type of TMC11H (Ver.E) houses only transmission equipment, as shown by illustration A in the following figure.

l

The other type of TMC11H (Ver.E) houses the BBU and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown by illustration B in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


460



Figure 3-32 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E)

The following table lists the components in a TMC11H (Ver.E).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


461



Table 3-40 Components in a TMC11H (Ver.E) No.

Module/ Board



Description

1

FAN 02E

Mandat ory

1

A FAN 02E is configured with fans and a cabinet control unit type B (CCUB). The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet.

2

SLPU

Mandat ory

2


3

ELU

Mandat ory

1


4

DCDU-1 2B

Mandat ory

1

A DCDU-12B distributes ten DC power outputs to components in a TMC11H. The DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C is of 1 U high.

5

BBU

Option al

2

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The TMC11H (Ver.E) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

6

Door Status Sensor

Mandat ory

1


7

EMUA/ EMUB

Option al

1


8

Air baffle

Mandat ory

5



462



No.

Module/ Board



Description

9

AC Heater

Option al

1


10


Mandat ory

1


11


Mandat ory

1


3.5.3 TMC11H Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of TMC11Hs, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.

Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of a TMC11H. Table 3-41 Input power specifications Power Supply

Rated Voltage

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of a TMC11H. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


463



Table 3-42 Equipment specifications of a TMC11H Item

Cabinet

Specifications

Remarks


TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)


-

TMC11H (Ver.B)

≤ 57 kg (125.66 lb)

Weight

l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the cabinet frame, outer air circulation assembly (heat dissipation core and outer air circulation fan), inner air circulation fan assembly, DCDU, and cables l Excluding transmission equipment

TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E)

≤ 47 kg (103.62 lb)

Total weight of the equipment l Including the cabinet frame, outer air circulation assembly (heat dissipation core and outer air circulation fan), inner air circulation fan assembly, DCDU, and cables l Excluding transmission equipment

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of a TMC11H. Table 3-43 Environmental specifications Item

Cabinet

Specifications

Operating temperatur e


-40°C to +50°C (-40°C to 122°F) (1120 W/m2solar radiation). If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F), a heater is required.

Relative humidity Atmospher ic pressure

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

5% RH to 100% RH 70 kPa to 106 kPa


464



Item

Cabinet

Specifications

Noise power level

TMC11H (Ver.B)

Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)

TMC11H (Ver.C) or TMC11H (Ver.D)


TMC11H (Ver.E)

l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 700 W – ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F) l Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) if the heat consumption inside a cabinet is less than or equal to 1800 W or between 700 W and 1800 W – ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) – ≤ 7.6 bels@+45°C (113°F)

Storage time



Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of the ports in a TMC11H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.D), or TMC11H (Ver.E).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


465



Table 3-44 Surge protection specifications of the ports Port

-48 V DC input power port

Specifications Surge

Surge Current





3.5.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a TMC11H Customer equipment in TMC11Hs must meet the specifications. Customer equipment in TMC11Hs must meet the same specifications with the customer equipment an APM30H. For details, see 3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet.

3.6 IBBS200D Description The IBBS200D applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ds.

3.6.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds The integrated battery backup system with direct cooling (IBBS200D) applies to outdoor scenarios and uses fans to dissipate heat from the cabinet. The IBBS200D also can provide backup power for the APM30H. The following figure shows the exteriors of IBBS200Ds. Figure 3-33 Exteriors of IBBS200Ds

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


466



The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS200D. Figure 3-34 Dimensions of an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.E), or IBBS200D (Ver.D)

3.6.2 Components in IBBS200Ds This section describes module and board configurations in IBBS200Ds.

Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


467



Figure 3-35 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)

The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B). Table 3-45 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.B)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Module/ Board



Description

1

4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame

Mandatory

2

Fans are installed on the front door of a cabinet, dissipating heat from the cabinet.

2

4.4.1 CMUA

Mandatory

1

A central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandatory

1



468



No.

Module/ Board



Description

4

4.3.21 Storage Battery

Mandatory

8

12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).

5


Mandatory

1


6

Power Distribution Box

Mandatory

1

A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.

7

Junction terminal for the input power cable of a heating film

Mandatory

1

A junction terminal provides the input power port for a heating film.

8

Heating Film

Optional

2

IBBS200Ds must be configured with heating films in cold areas. Heating films are not required in general areas.

Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


469



Figure 3-36 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)

The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). Table 3-46 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.C)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Component

Option al or Manda tory

Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sin gle Cab inet

Description

1


Mandat ory

1

A fan mounting frame is installed on the front door of a cabinet, and configured with a fan and a CMUE.

2

4.4.2 CMUE

Mandat ory

1

A central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1



470



No .

Component



Description

4


Mandat ory

8

12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 287 mm x 108 mm x 393 mm (11.30 in. x 4.25 in. x 15.47 in.).

5


Mandat ory

1


6


Mandat ory

1


7


Mandat ory

1


8

Heating Film

Optiona l

2


Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


471



Figure 3-37 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)

The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D). Table 3-47 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.D)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Component



Description

1


Mandat ory

1

A fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the front door of a cabinet.

2

4.4.3 CMUEA

Mandat ory

1

A CMUEA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1


4


Mandat ory

8



472



No .

Component



Description

5


Mandat ory

1


6


Mandat ory

1


7

Heating Film

Optiona l

2


8


Mandat ory

1


Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


473



Figure 3-38 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)

The following table lists the components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E). Table 3-48 Components in an IBBS200D (Ver.E)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Component



Description

1

Fan Mounting Frame

Mandat ory

1


2

CMUH

Mandat ory

1

A central monitoring unit type H (CMUH) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.

3

ELU

Mandat ory

1



474



No .

Component



Description

4

Storage Battery

Mandat ory

8


5

eBat

Optiona l

8

An eBat is connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery and used together with a wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) to intelligently manage batteries.

6


Mandat ory

2

Two power distribution boxes are installed on the inner upper right wall and top of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.

7


Mandat ory

1


8

Heating Film

Optiona l

1


9


Mandat ory

1


10

WIUA

Optiona l

1

A WIUA is used together with eBats to intelligently manage batteries.

3.6.3 IBBS200D Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of IBBS200Ds, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


475



Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of an IBBS200D. Table 3-49 Input power specifications Power Supply

Rated Voltage

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS200D. Table 3-50 Equipment specifications of an IBBS200D Item

Cabinet

Specifications

Remarks


IBBS200 D (Ver.B), IBBS200 D (Ver.C), IBBS200 D (Ver.D), or IBBS200 D (Ver.E)


-

IBBS200 D (Ver.B)

≤ 50 kg (110.23 lb)

Weight

l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries

IBBS200 D (Ver.C), IBBS200 D (Ver.D), or IBBS200 D (Ver.E)

≤ 40 kg (88.18 lb)

Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), and IBBS200D (Ver.E). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


476



Table 3-51 Environmental specifications Item

Specifications



Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH


70 kPa to 106 kPa

Noise power level

Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural areas) l ≤ 6.1 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 6.7 bels@+45°C (113°F)

Storage time


3.7 IBBS200T Description The IBBS200T applies to a BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IBBS200Ts.

3.7.1 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts The integrated battery backup system with TEC (IBBS200T) applies to outdoor scenarios. The IBBS200T can provide backup power for the APM30H. The following figure shows the exteriors of IBBS200Ts. Figure 3-39 Exteriors of IBBS200Ts

The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS200T.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


477



Figure 3-40 Dimensions of an IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.E),or IBBS200T (Ver.D)

3.7.2 Components in IBBS200Ts This section describes module and board configurations in IBBS200Ts.

Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B) The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B). Figure 3-41 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B)

The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


478



Table 3-52 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.B) No.

Module/ Board



Description

1

TEC in an IBBS200T

Mandatory

1

A thermoelectric cooler (TEC) ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in hightemperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.

2

4.4.1 CMUA

Mandatory

1

A central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandatory

1


4


Mandatory

8


5


Mandatory

1


6


Mandatory

1


Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C) To improve the cooling efficiency of the TEC, the coverage of the heat insulation foam must be greater than 75% on the inner wall of an IBBS200T (Ver.C). The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


479



Figure 3-42 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C)

The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C). Table 3-53 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.C)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

N o.

Compone nt



Description

1

TEC in an IBBS200T

Mandat ory

1

A TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS200T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.

2

4.4.2 CMUE

Mandat ory

1

A CMUE controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1


4


Mandat ory

8



480



N o.

Compone nt



Description

5


Mandat ory

1


6

Power Distributi on Box

Mandat ory

1

A power distribution box is installed on the inner upper right wall of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and two storage battery packs in an IBBS200T.

Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D) To improve the cooling efficiency of the TEC, the coverage of the heat insulation foam must be greater than 75% on the inner wall of an IBBS200T (Ver.D). The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D). Figure 3-43 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D)

The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


481



Table 3-54 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.D) N o.

Compone nt



Description

1

TEC in an IBBS200T

Mandat ory

1


2

4.4.3 CMUEA

Mandat ory

1

A CMUEA controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1


4


Mandat ory

8


5


Mandat ory

1


6


Mandat ory

1


Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E) To improve the cooling efficiency of the TEC, the coverage of the heat insulation foam must be greater than 75% on the inner wall of an IBBS200T (Ver.E). The following figure shows the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


482



Figure 3-44 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E)

The following table lists the components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E). Table 3-55 Components in an IBBS200T (Ver.E)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

N o.

Compone nt



Description

1

TEC in an IBBS200T

Mandat ory

1


2

CMUH

Mandat ory

1

A central monitoring unit type H (CMUH) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies an ELU.

3

4.8.3 ELU

Mandat ory

1



483



N o.

Compone nt



Description

4


Mandat ory

8


5

eBat

Optiona l

8


6


Mandat ory

2

Two power distribution boxes are installed on the inner upper right wall and top of a cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the TEC or fans and storage batteries.

7


Mandat ory

1


8

WIUA

Optiona l

1


3.7.3 IBBS200T Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of IBBS200Ts, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, environmental specifications, and surge protection specifications of the ports.

Input Power Specifications The following table lists the -48 V DC input power specifications of an IBBS200T. Table 3-56 Input power specifications

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply

Rated Voltage

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC


484



Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS200T. Table 3-57 Equipment specifications of an IBBS200T Item

Cabinet

Specifications

Remarks


IBBS200 T (Ver.B), IBBS200 T (Ver.C), IBBS200 T (Ver.D), or IBBS200 T (Ver.E)


Excluding the protective cover for the TEC

IBBS200 T (Ver.B)

≤ 70 kg (154.32 lb)

Weight

l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 434 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.) Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries

IBBS200 T (Ver.C), IBBS200 T (Ver.D), or IBBS200 T (Ver.E)

≤ 45 kg (99.21 lb)

Total weight of the equipment l Including the monitoring board, power distribution box, and cables l Excluding storage batteries

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C), IBBS200T (Ver.D), and IBBS200T (Ver.E). Table 3-58 Environmental specifications

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Specifications



Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH


70 kPa to 106 kPa


485



Item

Specifications

Noise power level

Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban areas) l ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 7.6 bels@+25°C (77°F)

Storage time


3.8 IBBS300D Description The IBBS300D applies to a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300D.

3.8.1 Exterior of an IBBS300D An IBBS300D is a direct-ventilation outdoor battery cabinet using fans for forcible heat dissipation. It is used with an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.E), TS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power for the cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS300D (Ver.A). Figure 3-45 Exterior of an IBBS300D (Ver.A)

Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS300D (Ver.A). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


486



Figure 3-46 Dimensions of an IBBS300D (Ver.A)

3.8.2 Components in IBBS300Ds This section describes module and board configurations in an IBBS300D. The following figure shows the components in an IBBS300D (Ver.A) cabinet. NOTE

An IBBS300D can be configured with a BAU02D or with the eBat and WIUA to implement intelligent storage battery management, as shown by illustrations a and b in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


487



Figure 3-47 Components in an IBBS300D (Ver.A)

a: Scenario where the BAU02D is configured

b: Scenario where the eBat and WIUA are configured

The following table lists the components in an IBBS300D (Ver.A) cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


488



Table 3-59 Components in an IBBS300D (Ver.A)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Compone nt


Max imu m Qua ntit y in a Sing le Cab inet

Description

1

Fan mounting frame

Mandat ory

1


2

CCU01D-0 3

Mandat ory

1

A cabinet control unit type 01D-03 (CCU01D-03) monitors the temperature in a cabinet, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies an electronic label.

3

ELU

Mandat ory

1


4

AC Junction Box

Mandat ory

1

An AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for the heater.

5

Storage Battery

Mandat ory

8

12 V 150 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 561 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 x 22.09 in.).

6

Door Status Sensor

Mandat ory

1


7

DC Junction Box

Mandat ory

2

A DC junction box is installed on the inner left wall and a DC junction box is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. They transfer and distribute power to the TEC or fan and storage batteries.

8

Circuit breaker

Mandat ory

1

A circuit breaker is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. It connects or disconnects the positive wire of the storage battery power cable.

9

HAU01A-0 1

Optional

1

The heater assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) ensures that storage batteries in the cabinet stay and work within an acceptable temperature range when the ambient temperature is low. This allows the storage batteries to work properly.


489



No .

Compone nt



Description

10

BAU02D

Optional

1

The battery alarm unit type 02D (BAU02D) checks whether all storage batteries are properly installed and connected.

11

eBat

Optional

8


12

WIUA

Optional

1


NOTE

A battery temperature sensor is configured in a cabinet by default. For details about the position of a battery temperature sensor in a cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.

3.8.3 IBBS300D Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS300D, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.

Input Power Specifications An IBBS300D (Ver.A) supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS300D (Ver.A). Table 3-60 Input power specifications Power Supply

Rated Voltage

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS300D (Ver.A).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


490



Table 3-61 Equipment specifications Item

Specifications

Remarks

Dimension s (H x W x D)

l Cabinet (without a base): 704 mm x 600 mm x 750 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 29.53 in.)

-

l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 27.56 in.) Weight

≤ 40 kg (88.18 lb)

Excluding the storage batteries and base

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS300D (Ver.A). Table 3-62 Environmental specifications Item

Specifications

Remarks



If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F)a, a heater is required.

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH

-

Altitude

0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)

Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).

Storage/ transportati on temperatur e

-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)


Protection class

IP34

-

Noise

-


a: The temperature at which a heater is required is specified as the local average lowest temperature of each day in the coldest month of the year.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


491



3.9 IBBS300T Description An IBBS300T applies to the BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS300T.

3.9.1 Exterior of an IBBS300T The IBBS300T is an outdoor battery cabinet with a Thermal Electric Cooler (TEC). It is used with an APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.E), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power for the cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS300T (Ver.A). Figure 3-48 Exterior of an IBBS300T (Ver.A)

Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS300T (Ver.A).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


492



Figure 3-49 Dimensions of an IBBS300T (Ver.A)

3.9.2 Components in IBBS300Ts This section describes module and board configurations in an IBBS300T. The following figure shows the components in an IBBS300T (Ver.A).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


493



Figure 3-50 Components in an IBBS300T (Ver.A)

a: Scenario where the BAU02D is configured

b: Scenario where the eBat and WIUA are configured

The following table describes the components in an IBBS300T (Ver.A).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


494



Table 3-63 Components in an IBBS300T (Ver.A)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

N o.

Compone nt



Description

1

TEC

Mandat ory

1

A thermoelectric cooler (TEC) ensures the normal operation of an IBBS300T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat from the storage batteries.

2

CCU01D03

Mandat ory

1

A cabinet control unit type 01D-03 (CCU01D-03) monitors the temperature in a cabinet, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies an electronic label.

3

ELU

Mandat ory

1


4

Storage Battery

Mandat ory

8

12 V 150 Ah storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 561 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 x 22.09 in.).

5

Door Status Sensor

Mandat ory

1


6

DC Junction Box

Mandat ory

2

A DC junction box is installed on the inner left wall and a DC junction box is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. They transfer and distribute power to the TEC or fan and storage batteries.

7

Circuit breaker

Mandat ory

1

A circuit breaker is installed on the inner right wall of a cabinet. It connects or disconnects the positive wire of the storage battery power cable.

8

BAU02D

Optiona l

1

The battery alarm unit type 02D (BAU02D) checks whether all storage batteries are properly installed and connected.

9

eBat

Optiona l

8


10

WIUA

Optiona l

1



495



NOTE

A battery temperature sensor is configured in a cabinet by default. For details about the position of a battery temperature sensor in a cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.

3.9.3 IBBS300T Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS300T, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.

Input Power Specifications An IBBS300T (Ver.A) supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS300T (Ver.A). Table 3-64 Input power specifications Power Supply

Rated Voltage

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS300T (Ver.A). Table 3-65 Equipment specifications Item

Specifications

Remarks


l Cabinet (without a base): 700 mm x 600 mm x 750 mm (27.56 in. x 23.62 in. x 29.53 in.)

Excluding the protective cover for the TEC

l Base: 200 mm x 600 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 27.56 in.) Weight

≤ 50 kg (110.23 lb)

Excluding the storage batteries and base

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS300T (Ver.A). Table 3-66 Environmental specifications

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Specifications

Remarks



-


496



Item

Specifications

Remarks

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH

-

Altitude

0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)


Storage/ transportation temperature

-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)


Protection class

IP55

-

Noise

-

Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban areas) l ≤ 6.6 bels@+25°C (77°F) l ≤ 7.6 bels@+25°C (77°F)

3.10 IBBS20D Description An IBBS20D applies to the DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, configuration, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20D.

3.10.1 Exterior of an IBBS20D An IBBS20D, an integrated battery backup system with direct cooling, uses fans to dissipate heat from the cabinet. It can be used together with the RRU, BBU3910A, OPM50M, OMB (Ver.C), and IMB03 to provide backup power.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20D.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


497



Figure 3-51 Exterior of an IBBS20D

Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS20D. Figure 3-52 Dimensions of an IBBS20D

3.10.2 Components in an IBBS20D This section describes module and board configurations in an IBBS20D. The following figure shows components in an IBBS20D.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


498



Figure 3-53 Components in an IBBS20D

The following table describes the components in an IBBS20D. Table 3-67 Components in an IBBS20D

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Compone nt

Option al/ Manda tory


Description

1

Fan

Mandat ory

1

The fan is located on the front door of the cabinet. It promotes the inner and outer air circulation of the cabinet to ensure that the cabinet works within an acceptable temperature range. This allows the batteries to work properly.

2

Storage battery

Mandat ory

4

12 V 20 Ah storage batteries provide shortduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 76 mm x 166 mm x 181 mm (2.99 in. x 6.58 x 7.13 in.).


499



No .

Compone nt

Option al/ Manda tory


Description

3

Door Status Sensor

Mandat ory

1

The door status sensor monitors whether the cabinet door is open.

4

ELU

Mandat ory

1


5

CMUG

Mandat ory

1

The central monitoring unit type G (CMUG) monitors the temperature in the cabinet, detects Boolean alarms, and identifies the electronic label.

6

Power Distributio n Box in an IBBS20D

Mandat ory

1

The power distribution box is installed in the lower part of the inner right wall of the cabinet, transferring and distributing power to the fan and storage batteries in the cabinet.

7

(Optional) Heating Film

Optional

1

The heating film ensures that the storage batteries in the cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range when the environmental temperature is low. This allows the batteries to work properly.

3.10.3 IBBS20D Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS20D, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.

Input Power Specifications An IBBS20D supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS20D. Table 3-68 Input power specifications

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Power Supply

Rated Voltage

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC


500



Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS20D. Table 3-69 Equipment specifications Item

Specifications

Remarks

Dimension s (H x W x D)

400 mm x 240 mm x 300 mm (15.75 in. x 9.45 in. x 11.81 in.)

-

Weight

≤ 15 kg (33.07 lb)

Excluding storage batteries

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS20D. Table 3-70 Environmental specifications Item

Specifications

Remarks



l If the operating temperature is below -20°C (-4°F)a, a heater is required. l 16 Ah lead storage batteries are required when the temperature ranges from 40°C (104°F) to 50°C (122°F).

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH

-

Altitude

0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)


Storage time

-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to 158°F)


Protection class

IP34

-

Noise

-


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


501


Item


Specifications

Remarks

a: The temperature at which a heater is required is specified as the local average lowest temperature of each day in the coldest month of the year.

3.11 IBBS20L Description An IBBS20L can be used in a DBS3900. This section describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of an IBBS20L.

3.11.1 Exterior of an IBBS20L An IBBS20L is an integrated power backup module using a lithium battery. It is used together with the RRU, BBU3910A, and OPM50M and provides backup power for them.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an IBBS20L. Figure 3-54 Exterior of an IBBS20L

Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBBS20L.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


502



Figure 3-55 Dimensions of an IBBS20L

3.11.2 Ports and Indicators on an IBBS20L This section describes ports and indicators on an IBBS20L. The ports include those at the bottom of the IBBS20L and those in the cabling cavity of the IBBS20L. The following figure shows the ports on an IBBS20L. Figure 3-56 Ports on an IBBS20L

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


503



The following table describes the ports and indicators on an IBBS20L. Table 3-71 Ports and indicators on an IBBS20L Item

Silkscreen

Description

(1) Indicato rs

RUN

l Steady off: There is no power supply. l Steady on: The module is powered on. The module is performing startup, self-check, loading, or activation, or no software is loaded. l Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s): The module is registered, or the communication is normal. l Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s): The module is not registered, or the communication is interrupted.

ALM

l Steady off: There is no fault. l Steady on: An alarm is generated, and the module needs to be replaced. l Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s): An alarm is generated, and you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the module.

(2) Ports in the cabling cavity

BAT

Circuit breaker controlling the power to an IBBS20L

RTN(+) INPUT

DC power input ports connecting to upper-level power equipment (for example, OPM50M)

NEG(-) INPUT NEG(-) OUTPUT RTN(+) OUTPUT

DC power output ports connecting to a lower-level IBBS20L

COM_IN

RS485 signal port connecting to a PMU or OPM and reporting monitoring information

EXT_IN

Signal monitoring port monitoring one channel of CAN signals between IBBS20Ls. It communicates with and reports monitoring information to the upper-level IBBS20L.

EXT_OUT

Signal monitoring port monitoring one channel of CAN signals between IBBS20Ls. It communicates with and receives monitoring information from the lower-level IBBS20L.

3.11.3 IBBS20L Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS20L, including the input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


504



Input Power Specifications An IBBS20L supports -48 V DC input power. The following table lists the input power specifications of an IBBS20L. Table 3-72 Input power specifications Power Supply

Rated Voltage

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IBBS20L. Table 3-73 Equipment specifications Item

Specifications



Weight

19 kg (41.90 lb)

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IBBS20L. Table 3-74 Environmental specifications Item

Specifications



Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH

Altitude

0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.36 ft)

Storage environment

l -40°C to 40°C (-40°F to 104°F): An IBBS20L is charged every 12 months and has a lifespan of 3 years. l 40°C to 60°C (104°F to 140°F): An IBBS20L is charged every four months and has a lifespan of 1 year.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Protection class

IP65

Noise

An IBBS20L uses natural ventilation and does not generate noises.


505



3.12 IBBS20L-E User Manual IBBS20L-E provides power backup for communications devices so that power can be supplied to communications devices when no power inputs to power modules are available. This ensures normal service running and stable power supply. This manual describes the exterior, ports, indicators, and engineering specifications of IBBS20L-E.

3.12.1 Exterior IBBS20L-E is a power backup module integrated with lithium batteries. It provides power backup for RRUs, BBUs, and OPM30M.

Exterior The following figure shows the IBBS20L-E exterior. Figure 3-57 IBBS20L-E exterior

3.12.2 Ports and Indicators This chapter describes the physical ports, communications ports, and indicators on IBBS20LE. The following figure shows the physical ports on IBBS20L-E.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


506



Figure 3-58 Physical ports on IBBS20L-E

The following figure shows the communications ports on IBBS20L-E. Figure 3-59 Communications ports on IBBS20L-E

Table 3-75 Communications ports on IBBS20L-E Communications Port

Communications Protocol

Function

COM_IN and COM_OUT

CAN2.0 protocol

Communicates with power modules or cascaded lithium battery modules.

Table 3-76 Pins of the COM_IN and COM_OUT ports

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Pin

Signal Name

Signal Description

1 to 4

None

None

5

BMS_ON+

In-position signal of lithium battery modules

6

None

None

7

BMS_ON-

In-position signal of lithium battery modules


507



Pin

Signal Name

Signal Description

8

CANH

CAN data transmission/ reception H

9

CANL

CAN data transmission/ reception L

The following table describes the indicators on IBBS20L-E. Table 3-77 Indicators on IBBS20L-E Indicator Name

Color

Status

Description

Run indicator

Green

Steady off

There is no power supply, or IBBS20LE is faulty.

Blinking at 0.5 Hz

IBBS20L-E is communicating properly.

Blinking at 4 Hz

IBBS20L-E is communicating abnormally.

Steady off

No alarm is generated.

Steady on

An alarm is generated.

Steady off

No fault occurs.

Steady on

The module is faulty.

Alarm indicator

Fault indicator

Yellow

Red

3.12.3 Engineering Specifications This chapter describes the power input specifications, physical specifications, and environmental specifications of IBBS20L-E.

Power Input Specifications IBBS20L-E supports –48 V DC power input. The following table describes the power input specifications of IBBS20L-E.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


508



Table 3-78 Power input specifications Input Power

Rated Voltage

–48 V DC

–38.4 V DC to –57 V DC

Physical Specifications The following table provides the physical specifications of IBBS20L-E. Table 3-79 Physical specifications Item

Specifications



Weight

18 kg (39.69 lb)

Environmental Specifications The following table provides the environmental specifications of IBBS20L-E. Table 3-80 Environmental Specifications Item

Specifications


–40°C to +50°C (–40°F to +113°F) (with solar radiation of 1120 W/m2)

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH

Altitude

0 m to 4,000 m (0 ft. to 13123.2 ft.)

Storage environment

l –40°C to +40°C (–40°F to +104°F): Recharge the module every 12 months. The total storage duration cannot exceed three years. l 40°C to 60°C (104°F to 140°F): Recharge the module every four months. The total storage duration cannot exceed one year.

Ingress protection rating

IP65

Noise

Natural heat dissipation is adopted and no noise is generated.

3.13 IBBS700D Description The IBBS700D applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700D. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


509



3.13.1 Exterior of an IBBS700D The IBBS700D is an outdoor battery cabinet that uses fans to dissipate heat. It can be used with the APM30H (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS700D. Figure 3-60 Exterior of the IBBS700D

Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the IBBS700D.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


510



Figure 3-61 Dimensions of the IBBS700D

3.13.2 Components of an IBBS700D This section describes module and board configurations in the IBBS700D cabinet. The following figure shows the interior of the IBBS700D. Figure 3-62 Components of IBBS700D

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


511



The following table describes the components in the IBBS700D. Table 3-81 Components in the IBBS700D No .

Module



Description

1


Mandat ory

1

The fan mounting frame configured with fans is installed on the lower middle part in the front door of the cabinet.

2

CMUEA

Mandat ory

1

The central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.

3

ELU(1)

Mandat ory

1

The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

5

CCU

-(2)

1

The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the environment in a cabinet and manages devices.

6


Mandat ory

1

The AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for the heater.

7

HAU01A-0 1

Optional

1

The heater assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) is a heater. It functions in the low-temperature environment to provide the suitable storage and operating temperature for the storage batteries.

8

Storage batteries(3)

Mandat ory

16

Storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 528 mm (4.92 in. x 12.21 x 20.79 in.).

9


Mandat ory

1


4

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


512



No .

Module



Description

10

Power Distributio n Box in an IBBS700D or IBBS700T

Mandat ory

1

The power distribution box is installed in the middle of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or fan, CCU, and storage batteries.

NOTE

l (1) When a CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "4." When no CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "3." l (2) When the IBBS700D cabinet is used with an APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet, no CCU is required. When the IBBS700D cabinet is used with a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) or TP48600A-H17B1 cabinet, a CCU is required. l (3) The storage batteries provide current of 300 Ah, 450 Ah, or 600 Ah for a single cabinet and provide current of 150 Ah or 300 Ah for each one in a cabinet combination. l A battery temperature sensor is configured in the cabinet by default. For details about the position of the battery temperature sensor in the cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.

3.13.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700D This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS700D, including the electrical specifications, equipment specifications, and environment specifications.

Electrical Specifications The following table describes the electrical specifications of the IBBS700D. Table 3-82 Electrical specifications

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Specifications

Remarks

Input voltage range

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Rated voltage: -48 V DC

Maximum capacity of the storage batteries

600 Ah

-


513



Equipment Specifications The following table describes the equipment specifications of the IBBS700D. Table 3-83 Equipment specifications Item

Specifications

Remarks


Cabinet (without the base): 1725 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (67.91 in. x 30.31 in. x 29.53 in.)

-

Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 30.31 in. x 27.56 in.) Cabinet weight

≤ 110 kg (242.55 lb)

Not including the storage batteries and base

Battery weight

12 V 150 Ah storage battery: 60 kg (132.30 lb)(1)

The total capacity can be expanded to 48 V 600 Ah (by connecting four 48 V 150 Ah battery packs in parallel)

Installation and maintenance

l Installation mode: installed on the ground

-

l Maintenance mode: maintained from the front l Cooling method: natural ventilation

NOTE

(1) Storage batteries from different manufacturers have different specifications. The preceding specifications are from the commonly used storage batteries.

Environment Specifications The following table describes the environment specifications of the IBBS700D that can be used outdoors. Table 3-84 Environment specifications

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Specifications

Remarks


-40°C to +45°C (-40°F to +113°F)

When the cabinet works under -20°C (1), a heater needs to be configured.

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH

-


514



Item

Specifications

Remarks

Altitude

0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.20 ft)


Storage and transportation temperature

-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)


Protection class

IP34

-


-

Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (rural area) l ≤ 6.1bels@+25°C l ≤ 6.7bels@+45°C

NOTE

(1) The operating temperature for configuring a heater refers to the average of the local lowest temperatures for a month in a year.

3.14 IBBS700T Description The IBBSIBBS700T applies to a BTS3900AL, BTS3900A or DBS3900. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IBBS700T.

3.14.1 Exterior of an IBBS700T The IBBS700T is an outdoor battery cabinet with a thermal electric cooler (TEC). It can be used with the APM30H (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), or TP48600A-H17B1 to provide backup power.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the IBBS700T.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


515



Figure 3-63 Exterior of the IBBS700T

Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of the IBBS700T.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


516



Figure 3-64 Dimensions of the IBBS700T

3.14.2 Components of an IBBS700T This section describes module and board configurations in the IBBS700T cabinet. The following figure shows the interior of the IBBS700T.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


517



Figure 3-65 Components of IBBS700T

The following table describes the components in the IBBS700T. Table 3-85 Components in the IBBS700T

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Module



Description

1

4.6.8 Inner Air Circulation Fan

Mandat ory

1

The inner air circulation fan is installed in the upper part of the front door. It dissipates heat for the storage batteries.

2

4.6.5 TEC Cooler in an IBBS700T

Mandat ory

1

The TEC ensures the normal operation of an IBBS700T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat for the storage batteries.


518



No .

Module



Description

3

4.6.9 Outer Air Circulation Fan

Mandat ory

1

The outer air circulation fan is installed in the lower part of the front door. It dissipates heat for the TEC.

4

CMUF

Mandat ory

1

The central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) controls temperature, detects Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.

5

ELU(1)

Mandat ory

1

The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

7

CCU

-(2)

1

The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the environment in a cabinet and manages devices.

8


Mandat ory

1

The AC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of the cabinet and provides power for the heater.

9

(3)

Mandat ory

16

Storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 125 mm x 310 mm x 528 mm (4.92 in. x 12.21 x 20.79 in.).

10


Mandat ory

1


11

Power Distribution Box in an IBBS700D or IBBS700T

Mandat ory

1

The power distribution box is installed in the middle of the cabinet. It transfers and distributes power to the TEC or fan, CCU, and storage batteries.

6

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


519



NOTE

l (1) When a CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "6." When no CCU is configured, the ELU is installed in the position illustrated by "5." l (2) When the IBBS700T cabinet is used with an APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet, no CCU is required. When the IBBS700T cabinet is used with a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) or TP48600A-H17B1 cabinet, a CCU is required. l (3) The storage batteries provide current of 300 Ah, 450 Ah, or 600 Ah for a single cabinet and provide current of 150 Ah or 300 Ah for each one in a cabinet combination. l A battery temperature sensor is configured in the cabinet by default. For details about the position of the battery temperature sensor in the cabinet, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.

3.14.3 Engineering Specifications of an IBBS700T This section describes the engineering specifications of an IBBS700T, including the electrical specifications, equipment specifications, and environment specifications.

Electrical Specifications The following table describes the electrical specifications of the IBBS700T. Table 3-86 Electrical specifications Item

Specifications

Remarks

Input voltage range

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Rated voltage: -48 V DC

Maximum capacity of the storage batteries

600 Ah

-

Equipment Specifications The following table describes the equipment specifications of the IBBS700T. Table 3-87 Equipment specifications Item

Specifications

Remarks


Without the base: 1725 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (67.91 in. x 30.31 in. x 29.53 in.)

-

Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm (7.87 in. x 30.31 in. x 27.56 in.) Weight

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

≤ 150 kg (330.75 lb)


Not including the storage batteries and base

520



Item

Specifications

Remarks

Battery weight

12 V 150 Ah storage battery: 60 kg (132.30 lb)(1)

The total capacity can be expanded to 48 V 600 Ah (by connecting four 48 V 150 Ah battery packs in parallel)

Installation and maintenance

l Installation mode: installed on the ground

-

l Maintenance mode: maintained from the front l Cooling device: TEC

NOTE

(1) Storage batteries from different manufacturers have different specifications. The preceding specifications are from the commonly used storage batteries.

Environment Specifications The following table describes the environment specifications of the IBBS700T that can be used outdoors. Table 3-88 Environment specifications Item

Specifications

Remarks


-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F)

When the cabinet works under -20°C (1), a heater needs to be configured.

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH

-

Altitude

0 m to 4000 m (0 ft to 13123.20 ft)


Storage and transportation temperature

-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)


Dustproof and waterproof

IP55

-


-

Meeting the ETS 300 753 4.1E standard (urban area) l ≤ 6.6bels@+25°C l ≤ 7.6bels@+45°C

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


521



NOTE

(1) The operating temperature for configuring a heater refers to the average of the local lowest temperatures for a month in a year.

3.15 BTS3900AL Cabinet Description The BTS3900AL cabinet applies to a BTS3900AL. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of BTS3900AL cabinets, and specifications of configured customer equipment.

3.15.1 Exterior of the BTS3900AL Cabinet This section describes the exterior and dimensions of a BTS3900AL cabinet. The following figure shows the exterior of a BTS3900AL cabinet. Figure 3-66 Exterior of a BTS3900AL cabinet

The following figure shows the dimensions of a BTS3900AL cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


522



Figure 3-67 Dimensions of a BTS3900AL cabinet

3.15.2 Components of BTS3900AL Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900AL cabinets. The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


523



Figure 3-68 Components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet

The following table lists the components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet. Table 3-89 Components of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Nu mb er

Compo nent

Option al or Mandat ory


Description

1

ETP48 400

Mandato ry

1

The embedded telecommunication power 48400 (ETP48400) converts AC power into DC power and distributes the DC power to other components in the cabinet. The ETP48400 consists of the ETP48400 subrack, PMU, and PSUs.

2

PSU (R4850 G2)

Mandato ry

7

The power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

3

CCU

Mandato ry

1

The cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the operating environment and manages other components in the cabinet.


524


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Nu mb er

Compo nent



Description

4

ELU

Mandato ry

1

The electronic label unit (ELU) automatically reports the cabinet type. It is installed in a designated position on the inner right wall of the equipment compartment.

5

Surge protecti on area for transmi ssion signals

Mandato ry

1

The universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) can be installed in the surge protection area for transmission signals.

6

Door Status Sensor

Mandato ry

1

The door status sensor is installed on the cabinet door to monitor whether the cabinet door is open.

7 and 12

DCDU12C

Mandato ry

2

The direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) provides ten DC power outputs. The upper DCDU-12C provides power for components such as the BBU, CCU, and central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) in a cabinet. The lower DCDU-12C provides power for the RFUs and FAU.

8

PMU 11A

Mandato ry

1

The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system and storage batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.

9

BBU

Mandato ry

2

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller.For details, see BBU Hardware Description.

10

DCDU03B, DCDU11B, or DCDU12B

Optional

2

The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. When only one DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is required, it is preferentially installed in the left slot.


525



Nu mb er

Compo nent



Description

11


Optional

4

When a base station requires short-term backup power, one storage battery pack (including four storage batteries) is configured. 12 V 100 Ah storage batteries provide longduration backup power for a base station. Their maximum dimensions (H x W x D) are as follows: 290 mm x 110 mm x 398 mm (11.42 in. x 4.33 x 15.67 in.).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

13

FAU03 D-01

Mandato ry

1

The fan assembly unit 03D-01 (FAU03D-01), a fan assembly in the RF compartment, has three fans and one CMUF. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUF controls the temperature and detects Boolean alarms.

14

RFU

Mandato ry

9

The RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description.

15

PDU05 A-01

Mandato ry

1

The power distribution unit 05A-01 (PDU05A-01) distributes AC power to the ETP48400, AC service outlet unit (SOU), and HAU01A-01.

16

Temper ature sensor

Mandato ry

3

The temperature sensors are installed in the device compartment, RF compartment, and the front door of a cabinet to monitor the temperature in the cabinet.

17

AC SOU

Optional

1

The service outlet unit 01A-01 (SOU01A-01) transfers AC power to customer equipment. The SOU01A-01 is installed in the PDU05A-01 of a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.

18

CMUF

Mandato ry

1

The CMUF controls the heat exchanger, adjusts the fan speed, and controls the temperature in the cabinet.

19

HAU01 A-01

Optional

2

The heat assembly unit 01A-01 (HAU01A-01) ensures that components in the cabinet work within the acceptable temperature range when the ambient temperature is low. It can be installed in the cabinet door.


526



Nu mb er

Compo nent



Description

20

GPS surge protect or

Optional

1

The GPS surge protector provides surge protection for the satellite receiver. It can be installed in a designated position on the inner left wall of the RF compartment in the cabinet or installed outside the cabinet.

21

HEX

Mandato ry

1

The heat exchanger (HEX) ensures that components in the cabinet work within the acceptable temperature range. It consists of the inner air circulation fan, outer air circulation fan, and heat exchanger core.

The BTS3900AL DC cabinet has the same type of door as the BTS3900AL AC cabinet. The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. Figure 3-69 Components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet

The following table lists the components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


527



Table 3-90 Components of a BTS3900AL DC cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Nu mbe r

Compon ent



Description

1

Filler panel

Mandat ory

1

The filler panel is exclusively used for cabinets and cannot be disassembled or replaced.

2

CCU

Mandat ory

1

The CCU monitors the operating environment and manages other components in the cabinet.

3

ELU

Mandat ory

1

The ELU automatically reports the cabinet type. It is installed in a designated position on the inner right wall of the equipment compartment.

4

Surge protectio n area for transmiss ion signals

Mandat ory

1

The UELP or UFLP can be installed in the surge protection area for transmission signals.

5

Door status sensor

Mandat ory

1

The door status sensor is installed on the cabinet door to monitor whether the cabinet door is open.

6 and 9

DCDU-1 2C

Mandat ory

2

The DCDU-12C provides ten DC power outputs. The upper DCDU-12C provides power for components such as the BBU, CCU, and CMUF in a cabinet. The lower DCDU-12C provides power for the RFUs and FAU.

7

BBU

Mandat ory

2

The BBU is installed in a BTS3900AL DC cabinet for a BTS3900AL DC scenario, and the BBU is installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet for a BTS3900AL cabinet combination, which includes one BTS3900AL AC cabinet and one BTS3900AL DC cabinet.

8

DCDU-0 3B, DCDU-11 B, or DCDU-1 2B

Optiona l

2

The DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B provides power for RRUs. When only one DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B is required, it is preferentially installed in the left slot.


528



Nu mbe r

Compon ent



Description

10

FAU03D01

Mandat ory

1

The FAU, a fan assembly for the RF compartment, has three fans and one CMUF. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the CMUF controls the temperature, detects the Boolean alarm, and identifies the ELU.

11

RFU

Mandat ory

9

The RFU modulates and demodulates baseband signals and RF signals, processes data, and combines and divides signals. For details, see RFU Hardware Description.

12

PDU03D01

Mandat ory

1

The PDU03D-01 provides DC power for the DCDU-12C and BusBar.

13

Temperat ure sensor

Mandat ory

3

The temperature sensors are installed in the device compartment, RF compartment, and the front door of a cabinet to monitor the temperature in the cabinet.

14

GPS surge protector

Optiona l

1

The GPS surge protector provides surge protection for the satellite receiver. It can be installed in a designated position on the inner left wall of the RF compartment in the cabinet or installed outside the cabinet.

3.15.3 BTS3900AL Engineering Specifications BTS3900AL engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards that have been complied with.

Input Power Specifications The following table lists the input power specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. NOTE

For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900AL cabinet, see 2.4.3 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.

Table 3-91 Input power specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Input Power

Voltage Range




529



Input Power

Voltage Range


176/304 V AC to 290/500 V AC


105/176 V AC to 150/260 V AC


90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. Table 3-92 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Item

Specification

Dimension (H x W x D)

1925 mm x 770 mm x 750 mm (with the base) Base: 200 mm x 770 mm x 700 mm

Weight

≤ 550 kg (full configuration, with the base and full configuration of storage batteries, and without transmission devices)

Heat Dissipation Capabilities of the Cabinet

2200 W at 50°C

Environment Specifications The following table lists the environment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. Table 3-93 Environment specifications of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Item

Specification


l -40°C to +50°C (with 1120 W/M2 solar radiation and without storage batteries); an AC heater assembly unit (HAU) is required if the operating temperature is below -20°C. l -40°C to +40°C (with 1120 W/M2 solar radiation and storage batteries); an AC heater assembly unit (HAU) is required if the operating temperature is below -20°C.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


530



Item

Specification

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH


70 kPa to 106 kPa


l When the output power of an RF module is lower than or equal to 80 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural) standard. – ≤6.1bels@+25°C – ≤6.7bels@+45°C l When the output power of an RF module is higher than 80 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Urban) standard. – ≤6.6bels@+25°C – ≤7.6bels@+45°C

Storage Time


Surge Protection Specifications Table 3-94 lists the surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet. NOTE


Table 3-94 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet Port


Specification

AC input power port

Surge current

30 kA

Standards The following table lists the standards with which a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet complies.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


531



Table 3-95 Standards with which a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet complies Item

Standard

Security standards

l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Protectio n rating

IP55

Operating environm ent

ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1

Storage

ETSI EN300019-1-1V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations"

Transport ation


Antiseismic performa nce

IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57:Tests -Test Ff:Vibration Time-history method

Antiearthquak e performa nce


YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)


532



Item

Standard

EMC

NOTE The BTS3900AL complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900AL is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 The GBTS meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeB meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 The eNodeB has been certified by European standards. The eNodeB meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l 3GPP TS 36.113 Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


533


Item


Standard l ETSI EN 301489-1/23 l ETSI EN 301908-1 V2.2.1 (2003-10) l ITU-R SM.329-10

Surge protection


3.15.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in a BTS3900AL Cabinet Customer equipment in BTS3900AL cabinets must meet the specifications. Customer equipment in BTS3900AL cabinets must meet the same specifications with the customer equipment an APM30H. For details, see 3.4.4 Engineering Specifications of Customer Equipment in a Huawei cabinet.

3.16 BTS3900C Cabinet Description There are two types of BTS3900C cabinets: BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet and BTS3900C WCDMA cabinet. This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of two types of BTS3900C cabinets.

3.16.1 Exterior of the BTS3900C Cabinet This section describes the exteriors and dimensions of BTS3900C cabinets. The following figure shows the exteriors of BTS3900C cabinets.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


534



Figure 3-70 Exteriors of BTS3900C cabinets

The following figure shows the dimensions of BTS3900C cabinets. Figure 3-71 Dimensions of BTS3900C cabinets

3.16.2 Components of BTS3900C Cabinets This section describes module and board configurations in BTS3900C AC cabinets and BTS3900C DC cabinets.

Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


535



Figure 3-72 Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet. Table 3-96 Components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) AC cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

1

ELU

Mandatory

1

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

2

PMU 11A

Mandatory

1

The power monitoring unit 11A (PMU 11A) manages the power system, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.


536


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

3

HEUB

Mandatory

1

The heat exchange unit type B (HEUB) provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.

4

PSU (R4850G2)

Mandatory

2

A PSU converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.

5

BBU

Mandatory

1



537


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

6

FAU01D-01

Mandatory

2

An FAU dissipates heat from the cabinet. It includes an inner air circulation fan and an outer air circulation fan, which are located on the upper left wall and the lower left wall of an OMB interior, respectively.

7

PDU10D-01

Mandatory

1

The PDU10D-01 is a DC power distribution unit, supplying -48 V DC power to components in a cabinet.

8

RRU subrack

Mandatory

1

An RRU subrack houses an RRU.

9

RRUa

Mandatory

1

A remote radio unit (RRU) processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.

10

SPD

Mandatory

1

The surge protective device (SPD) provides surge protection for AC input power.


538



No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

11

ETP48100-A1

Mandatory

1

The embedded telecommunicat ion power ETP48100-A1 system converts AC power into DC power.

a: A BTS3900C (Ver.C) supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3908 V1, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, RRU3808, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3806, and RRU3926.

Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet. Figure 3-73 Components of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


539



Table 3-97 Components in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) DC cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

1

ELU

Mandatory

1

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

2

HEUB

Mandatory

1

The HEUB provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.

3

BBU

Mandatory

1



540



No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

4

FAU01D-01

Mandatory

2

An FAU dissipates heat from the cabinet. It includes an inner air circulation fan and an outer air circulation fan, which are located on the upper left wall and the lower left wall of an OMB interior, respectively.

5

RRU subrack

Mandatory

1


6

RRUa

Mandatory

1

An RRU processes and transmits RF signals between the BBU and the antenna system.

7

PDU10D-01

Mandatory

1

The PDU10D-01 provides -48 V DC power for the components in a cabinet.

a: A BTS3900C (Ver.C) supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3908 V1, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, RRU3808, RRU3929, RRU3942, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3806, and RRU3926.

Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


541



Figure 3-74 Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet. Table 3-98 Components in a BTS3900C WCDMA AC cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

1

BBU

Mandatory

1



542



No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

2

HEUA

Mandatory

1

The HEUA provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.

3

EPS30-4815AF

Mandatory

1

AnEPS30-4815 AF converts AC power into DC power, and distributes the DC power.

4

AC OMB

Mandatory

1

-

5

RRU subrack

Mandatory

1


6

RRUa

Mandatory

1


7

AC surge protection box

Mandatory

1

The AC surge protection box provides surge protection for AC input power.

a: A BTS3900C WCDMA supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, and RRU3801C.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


543



Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA DC Cabinet The following figure shows the components of a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet. Figure 3-75 Components of a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet

The following table lists the components in a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet. Table 3-99 Components in a BTS3900C WCDMA DC cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

1

BBU

Mandatory

1



544



No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

2

HEUA

Mandatory

1

The HEUA provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.

3

DCDU-03B

Mandatory

1

The DCDU-03B provides nine -48 V DC power outputs.

4

DC OMB

Mandatory

1

-

5

RRU subrack

Mandatory

1


6

RRUa

Mandatory

1


a: A BTS3900C WCDMA supports the following RRUs: RRU3804, RRU3801E, RRU3806, and RRU3801C.

3.16.3 BTS3900C Engineering Specifications BTS3900C engineering specifications include input power specifications, equipment specifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards that have been complied with.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


545



Input Power Specifications The BTS3900C and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets support the same power input, as provided in the following table. NOTE

For the configurations of upper-level circuit breakers and cross-sectional areas of power cables in a BTS3900C cabinet, see 2.6.2 Configurations of Upper-Level Circuit Breakers and Power Cables in a BTS3900C in 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description.

Table 3-100 Input power specifications of the BTS3900C and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets Input Power

Voltage Range

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC




90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC

Equipment Specifications Table 3-101 and Table 3-102 list the equipment specifications of a BTS3900C cabinet and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, respectively. Table 3-101 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900C cabinet Item

Specification


600 mm x 400 mm x 390 mm l OMB: 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm l RRU subrack: 600mm x 160 mm x 390 mm l AC cabinet: ≤ 28 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU)

Weight

l DC cabinet: ≤ 26 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU)

Table 3-102 Equipment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet Item

Specification


600 mm x 420 mm x 430 mm l OMB (Ver.C): 600 mm x 240 mm x 430 mm l RRU subrack: 600mm x 180 mm x 430 mm

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


546



Item

Specification

Weight

l AC cabinet: ≤ 32 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU) l DC cabinet: ≤ 28 kg (excluding the BBU and RRU)

Heat Dissipation Capabilities of the Cabinet

650 W at 50°C

Environment Specifications Table 3-103 and Table 3-104 list the environment specifications of a BTS3900C cabinet and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, respectively. Table 3-103 Environment specifications of a BTS3900C cabinet Item

Specification


l With solar radiation: -40°C to +45°C l Without solar radiation: -40°C to +50°C

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH


70 kPa to 106 kPa


ETS300 753 Rural area, Class 4.1E l ≤6.1bels@+25°C l ≤6.7bels@+45°C

Storage Time


Table 3-104 Environment specifications of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Specification


-33°C to +50°C

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH


70 kPa to 106 kPa


547



Item

Specification


l When the heat consumption of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) is lower than or equal to 300 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Rural) standard. – ≤6.1bels@+25°C – ≤6.7bels@+45°C l When the heat consumption of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) is higher than 300 W, the noise sound power level complies with the ETS 300 753 4.1E (Urban) standard. – ≤6.6bels@+25°C – ≤7.6bels@+45°C

Storage Time


Surge Protection Specifications Table 3-105 and Table 3-106 list the surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C cabinet and a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet, respectively. NOTE


Table 3-105 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C cabinet Port


Specification

DC port

Surge current

15 kA

AC port

Surge current

30 kA

Table 3-106 Surge protection specifications of ports on a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Port


Specification

DC port

Surge current

20 kA

AC port

Surge current

30 kA


548



Standards The BTS3900C and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets comply with the same standards, as provided in the following table. Table 3-107 Standards with which the BTS3900C and BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinets comply Item

Standard

Security standards

l X.509: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1825: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1826: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 1827: Supported in GBSS14.0/RAN14.0/eRAN3.0/SRAN7.0 and later versions l RFC 4492: Supported in all versions l RFC 5246: Supported in GBSS15.0/RAN15.0/eRAN6.0/SRAN8.0 and later versions l Secure Socket Layer (SSL): Supported in all versions

Protectio n rating

IP55

Operating environm ent

ETS 300 019-1-4 Class 4.1

Storage

ETSI EN300019-1-1V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations"

Transport ation


Antiseismic performa nce

IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57:Tests -Test Ff:Vibration Time-history method

Antiearthquak e performa nce


Noise

l ETS 300 753 4.1E (rural area)

YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)

l ETS 300 753 4.1E (urban area)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


549



Item

Standard

EMC

NOTE The BTS3900C complies with the following standards. If interference exists because the BTS3900C is installed near antennas or other radio receive devices, you are advised to extend the distance between them or adjust the location and direction of antennas.

The multi-mode base station meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements and complies with the following standards: l R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC l R&TTE Directive 89/336/EEC l ETSI EN 301489-1/8/23 l 3GPP TS 25.113 l ETSI EN 301908-1 l ITU-T SM 329-10 l FCC PART15 The NodeB has been certified by European standards. The NodeB meets the EMC requirements and complies with the following standards: l CISPR 22 (1997) l EN 55022 (1998) l EN 301 489-23 V1.2.1 (2002-11) l CISPR 24 (1998) l IEC 61000-4-2 l IEC 61000-4-3 l IEC 61000-4-4 l IEC 61000-4-5 l IEC 61000-4-6 l IEC 61000-4-29 l GB 9254-1998 l ETSI 301 489-1 V1.3.1 (2001-09) l FCC Part 15 Surge protection


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


550



3.17 OMB Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of OMBs.

3.17.1 Exterior of the OMB This section describes the exteriors and dimensions of outdoor mini boxes (OMBs). The following figure shows the exteriors of OMBs. Figure 3-76 Exteriors of OMBs

The following figure shows the dimensions of OMBs. Figure 3-77 Dimensions of OMBs

3.17.2 Components in OMBs This section describes module and board configurations in OMBs. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


551



Components in OMBs The following figure shows the components in OMBs, including an AC OMB and a DC OMB. Figure 3-78 Components in OMBs

The following table lists the components in an OMB. Table 3-108 Components in an OMB

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

1

HEUA

Mandatory

1

An HEUA provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.


552



No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

2

BBU

Mandatory

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The OMB supports the BBU3900.

3

AC surge protection box

Mandatory

1

An AC surge protection box provides surge protection for AC input power.

4

EPS30-4815AF

Mandatory

1

An EPS30-4815AF converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.

5

DCDU-03B

Mandatory

1

A DCDU-03B distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.

Components in OMBs (Ver.C) The following shows the components in OMBs (Ver.C), including an AC OMB (Ver.C) and a DC OMB (Ver.C).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


553



Figure 3-79 Components in OMBs (Ver.C)

The following table lists the components in an OMB (Ver.C). Table 3-109 Components in an OMB (Ver.C)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

1

ELU

Mandatory

1


2

PMU 11A

Mandatory

1

A PMU 11A manages the power system, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.


554



No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

3

HEUB

Mandatory

1

An HEUB provides power for fans, monitors the status of fans, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.

4

PSU (R4850G2)

Mandatory

2

A PSU converts 110 V or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.

5

BBU

Mandatory

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The OMB (Ver.C) supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


555



No.

Component

Optional/ Mandatory


Description

6

FAU01D-01

Mandatory

2

Fans dissipate heat from the cabinet. They are located on the upper left wall and the lower left wall of an OMB interior, respectively.

7

PDU10D-01

Mandatory

1

A PDU10D-01 is a DC power distribution unit, supplying -48 V DC power to other components in a cabinet.

8

SPD

Mandatory

1

An SPD provides surge protection for AC input power.

9

ETP48100-A1

Mandatory

1

An embedded telecommunicat ion power 48100-A1 (ETP48100-A1) converts external AC input power into DC power.

3.17.3 OMB Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an OMB and an OMB (Ver.C), such as dimensions, weight, ambient temperature, and relative humidity.

Engineering Specifications of an OMB The following table lists the engineering specifications of an OMB.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


556



Table 3-110 Engineering specifications of an OMB Item

Specifications


OMB: 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45 in. x 15.35 in.)

Weight

AC OMB: ≤ 25 kg (55.12 lb) DC OMB: ≤ 22.5 kg (49.60 lb)

Ambient temperature

Without solar radiation: -40oC to 50oC Short-term operation: 50oC to 55oC NOTE Short-term operation indicates that the continuous operation time does not exceed 96 hours or the accumulated operation time within a year does not exceed 15 days.


IP55

Installation mode

On a pole or wall

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH

Engineering Specifications of an OMB (Ver.C) The following table lists the engineering specifications of an OMB (Ver.C). Table 3-111 Engineering specifications of an OMB (Ver.C) Item

Specifications


OMB (Ver.C): 600 mm x 240 mm x 430 mm (23.62 in. x 9.45 in. x 16.93 in.)

Weight

AC OMB: ≤ 30 kg (66.14 lb) DC OMB: ≤ 21 kg (46.30 lb)

Ambient temperature

-33oC to 50oC NOTE The lower temperature alarm threshold is -33oC.


IP55

Installation mode

On a pole or wall

Relative humidity

5% RH to 100% RH

3.18 IMB03 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of IMB03s.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


557



3.18.1 Exterior of the IMB03 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor mini box 03 (IMB03). The following figure shows the exterior and dimensions of an IMB03. Figure 3-80 Exterior and dimensions of an IMB03

3.18.2 Components in IMB03 Cabinets This section describes the configurations of modules or boards in an IMB03.

Independent IMB03 Cabinets When the IMB03 is installed independently, the IMB03 can be supplied with AC or DC power. The following figure shows the components in IMB03 cabinets. Figure 3-81 Components in IMB03 cabinets

The following table describes the components in IMB03 cabinets. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


558



Table 3-112 Components in IMB03 cabinets Cabinet

No.

Componen t

Optional/ Mandatory


Descriptio n

AC IMB03

1

EPS30-4815 AFor ETP48100B1

Mandatory

1

An EPS30-4815 AF or ETP48100B1 converts 220 V AC power to -48 V DC power.

2

BBU

Mandatory

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The IMB03 supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

DC IMB03

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

1

DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B

Mandatory


1

A DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B distributes DC power to other components in a cabinet.

559


Cabinet


No.

Componen t

Optional/ Mandatory


Descriptio n

2

BBU

Mandatory

1

A BBU processes baseband signals and enables the base station to interact with the base station controller. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The IMB03 supports the BBU3900 and BBU3910.

IMB03+IFS06 When the IMB03 is installed on an IFS06, the components in an AC IMB03 or a DC IMB03 can be configured according to the instructions in DBS3900 (ICR) Installation Guide.

3.18.3 IMB03 Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IMB03, such as dimensions, weight, and ambient temperature. The following table lists the engineering specifications of an IMB03. Table 3-113 Engineering Specifications of an IMB03

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Specifications


IMB03: 560 mm x 425 mm x 180 mm (22.05 in. x 16.73 in. x 7.09 in.)

Weight

10 kg (22.05 lb)

Ambient temperature

-20oC to 50oC


560



3.19 IFS06 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an IFS06.

3.19.1 Exterior of the IFS06 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor floor installation support 06 (IFS06). The following figure shows the exterior and dimensions of an IFS06. Figure 3-82 Exterior and dimensions of an IFS06

3.19.2 Components of an IFS06 This section describes components of an IFS06. The following figure shows the exterior of an IFS06.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


561



Figure 3-83 Components of an IFS06

(1) Cable tray

(2) Ground bar 2

(3) Rear foot

(4) Front foot

(5) Adjustable beam

(6) Ground bar 1

(7) Main frame

-

3.19.3 IFS06 Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an IFS06, such as dimensions and weight. The following table lists the engineering specifications of an IFS06. Table 3-114 Engineering specifications of an IFS06 Item

Specifications



Weight

45 kg (99.21 lb)

3.20 INS12 Description This section describes component configurations and engineering specifications of an INS12.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


562



3.20.1 Exterior of the INS12 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor open rack 12 (INS12). The following figure shows the exterior and dimensions of an INS12. Figure 3-84 Exterior and dimensions of an INS12

3.20.2 Components of an INS12 This section describes components of an INS12. The following figure shows the components of an INS12.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


563



Figure 3-85 Components of an INS12

(1) Left frame

(2) Bottom beam assembly

(3) Right frame

(4) Top beam

3.20.3 INS12 Engineering Specifications This section describes the engineering specifications of an INS12, such as dimensions, weight, and space for customer equipment. The following table lists the engineering specifications of an INS12. Table 3-115 Engineering specifications of an INS12 Item

Specifications



Weight

12 kg (26.46 lb)

Space for customer equipment (H x W x D)

533.4 mm x 482.60 mm x 370 mm (21 in. x 19 in. x 14.57 in.)

3.21 IMS06 Description The IMS06 applies to a BTS3900 or BTS3900L. This section describes exteriors, component configurations, and engineering specifications of an IMS06. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


564



3.21.1 Exterior of an IMS06 An IMS06 is small and easy to transport. It applies to indoor scenarios and provides 6 U installation space.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an IMS06. Figure 3-86 Exterior of an IMS06

Dimensions The following figure shows the dimensions of an IMS06. Figure 3-87 Dimensions of an IMS06

3.21.2 Components of an IMS06 This section describes module and board configurations in an IMS06. Based on the cabinet stacked with an IMS06 and the function of the IMS06, there are four configuration types for an IMS06, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


565



Figure 3-88 IMS06 configurations

NOTE

l Configuration type a: The IMS06 distributes DC power and provides power supply to RRUs installed remotely in the scenario where RFUs and RRUs are configured. l Configuration type b: The IMS06 distributes DC power. l Configuration type a+c: The IMS06 distributes DC power and provides additional space for installing transmission equipment. l Configuration type a+d: The IMS06 distributes DC power and provides short-duration backup power for a base station.

The following table describes the configurations in an IMS06. Table 3-116 IMS06 configurations

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Module/ Board

Option al/ Mandat ory

Maxim um Quantit y Config ured in a Single Subrac k

Description

1

DCDU-12B

Optional

1

A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) provides -48 V DC power for other components. When the site is configured with RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is installed to provide DC power to RRUs.


566



No.

Module/ Board

Option al/ Mandat ory

Maxim um Quantit y Config ured in a Single Subrac k

Description

2

Filler panel

Optional

3

Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots in an EPU05A-02 subrack.

3

PMU 11A

Mandato ry

1

A power monitoring unit 11A (PMU11A) manages the power system and battery, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms.

4

PSU (R4850G2)

Mandato ry

5

A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC.

5

EPU05A-02 subrack

Mandato ry

1

An EPU05A-02 subrack is used in separated macro base stations with 110 V AC or 220 V AC power inputs. It distributes the DC power.

6

Storage battery

Optional

One pack (four)

Storage batteries must be configured for a site that requires short-term backup power. IMS06 support 48V 100Ah storage battery. The IMS06 provides the following dimensions (H x W x D) for installing storage batteries: 288.5 mm x 470 mm x 396 mm (11.36 in. x 18.50 in. x 15.59 in.).

7

Transmission equipment

Optional

2

The IMS06 provides additional space for installing the transmission equipment. The total power consumption of the transmission equipment in a single IMS06 must be less than or equal to 350 W. For the specifications of the transmission equipment, see 3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06.

NOTE

If the storage batteries are installed, a temperature sensor is required to monitor the temperature of these storage batteries. For the installation position of a temperature sensor, see 4.7.2 Temperature Sensor.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


567



3.21.3 Engineering Specifications of an IMS06 This section describes the engineering specifications of an IMS06, including input power specifications, equipment specifications, and environmental specifications.

Input Power Specifications An IMS06 can be supplied with different AC input power. Power equipment in the cabinet converts AC power into -48 V DC power for the base station. The following table lists the AC input power specifications of an IMS06. Table 3-117 Input power specifications of an IMS06 Power Supply

Rated Voltage

Operating Voltage




220 V AC threephase





Equipment Specifications The following table lists the equipment specifications of an IMS06. Table 3-118 Equipment specifications of an IMS06 Item

Specifications



Weight

≤ 21 kg (empty subrack)

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environmental specifications of an IMS06. Table 3-119 Environmental specifications of an IMS06

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Specifications

Noise

Meeting the ETS 300 753 3.1 standard


568



3.21.4 Specifications of Customer Equipment in an IMS06 The customer equipment installed in Huawei cabinets must meet the requirements for engineering specifications.

Dimensions l


l

The depth of the customer equipment which uses natural ventilation or supports heat dissipation from left to right cannot exceed 280 mm (11.02 in.). The depth of the customer equipment which supports heat dissipation from front to rear is less than 250 mm (9.84 in.).

l

When the front of the customer equipment aligns with the mounting bar of the IMS06, the routing space must not exceed 100 mm (3.94 in.). NOTE

When the front of the customer equipment exceeds the mounting bar of the IMS06, the routing space is reduced by the exceeding distance.

The following figure shows the dimensions and heat dissipation requirements for the customer equipment. Figure 3-89 Dimensions and heat dissipation requirements for the customer equipment

(1) Customer equipment using natural ventilation

(2) Customer equipment supporting heat dissipation from left to right

(3) Customer equipment supporting heat dissipation from front to rear

Heat Dissipation Requirements l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

If the customer equipment houses built-in fans, the fans must dissipate heat out from left to right or from front to rear. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

569


l



Temperature Requirements The temperature requirements for the customer equipment in IMS06 is -20 °C to +55 °C.

3.22 IBC10 Description This section describes the cabinet configuration and engineering specifications of an IBC10.

3.22.1 Exterior of the IBC10 This section describes the exterior and dimensions of an indoor BBU cabinet 10 (IBC10). The following figure shows the exterior of an IBC10. Figure 3-90 Exterior of an IBC10

The following figure shows the dimensions of an IBC10.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


570



Figure 3-91 Dimensions of an IBC10

3.22.2 Components in IBC10s This section describes module and board configurations in DC IBC10s.

Components in a DC IBC10 The following figure shows the components in a DC IBC10.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


571



Figure 3-92 Components in a DC IBC10

The following table describes the components in a DC IBC10.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


572



Table 3-120 Components in a DC IBC10 No.

Modul e



Remarks

1

Firstlevel USU

Option al

2

A first-level USU connects multiple BBUs to exchange data among the BBUs. For details, see USU3900 Hardware Description or USU3910 Hardware Description.

2

Tempera ture sensor at the air intake vent of the BBU

Manda tory

2

A temperature sensor monitors the temperature at the air intake vent of the BBU.

3

ELU

Manda tory

1

An ELU automatically reports the cabinet type.

4

BBU

Option al

10

A BBU processes baseband signals. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. The IBC10 supports the BBU3900.

5

DCDU12C

Manda tory

3

A DCDU-12C provides DC power for other components in a cabinet. DCDU-12C modules are numbered 0#, 1#, and 2# from the top down.

6

FAU03 D

Manda tory

2

A DC cabinet can be configured with two fan assemblies. A fan assembly is configured with one FMUEA and three fans. The fans dissipate heat from the cabinet, and the FMUEA monitors the fans and reports alarms.

7

Secondlevel USU

Option al

1

A second-level USU manages first-level USUs. For details, see USU3900 Hardware Description or USU3910 Hardware Description.

3.22.3 Engineering Specifications IBC10 engineering specifications include power specifications, equipment specifications, environment specifications, surge protection specifications, and standards that an IBC10 needs to comply with.

Power Supply The following table lists input power supported by an IBC10. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


573



Table 3-121 Input power for an IBC10 Input Power

Voltage Range

-48 V DC

-38.4 V DC to -57 V DC

Equipment Specifications The following table lists dimensions and the weight of an IBC10. Table 3-122 Equipment specifications of an IBC10 Cabinet Name


Weight

IBC10 DC

2,000 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm (78.74 in. x 23.62 in. x 23.62 in.)

≤ 105 kg (excluding USU and BBU)

Environmental Specifications The following table lists the environment specifications of an IBC10. Table 3-123 Environment specifications of an IBC10 Item

Specifications


-5°C to +50°C

Relative humidity

5% RH to 95% RH


70 kPa to 106 kPa

Surge Protection Specifications of the Ports The following table lists the surge protection specifications of an IBC10. NOTE

l Unless otherwise specified, the surge protection specifications pertain to the surge waveform of 8/20 μs. l All the surge current items, unless otherwise specified as Maximum discharge current, refer to Nominal discharge current.

Table 3-124 Surge protection specifications of the ports on an IBC10

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Port


Specifications

DC power port

Differential mode

2 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Common mode

4 kV (1.2/50 μs)


574



Standards The following table lists the standards that an IBC10 needs to comply with. Table 3-125 Standards for an IBC10

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Standard

Security standard

l IEC 60950-1: 2005 (2nd Edition) + A1: 2009

Protectio n rating

IP20

Operatin g environm ent

ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1

Storage environm ent

ETSI EN300019-1-1 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 1.2 "Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage locations"

Transport ation environm ent

ETSI EN300019-1-2 V2.1.4 (2003-04) class 2.3 "Public transportation"

Antiseismic protectio n

l IEC 60068-2-57: Environmental testing -Part 2-57: Tests -Test Ff: Vibration -Time-history method

Earthqua ke


Noise

ETS 300 753 3.1

l EN 60950-1: 2006 + A11: 2009 + A1: 2010 + A12: 2011

l YD5083: Interim Provisions for Test of Anti-seismic Performances of Telecommunications Equipment (telecom industry standard in People's Republic of China)


575


4 Component Description

4

Component Description

About This Chapter Components in a cabinet can be classified into BBU, RF modules, power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, temperature control devices, environment monitoring devices, and other devices, in terms of function. 4.1 BBU The BBU is used to process baseband signals in 3900 series base stations. For details, see BBU Hardware Description. 4.2 RF Modules In 3900 series base stations, an RFU or RRU can be configured to meet RF module configuration requirements in different scenarios. 4.3 Power Equipment This section describes all types of power equipment and types of cabinets supported by the power equipment. 4.4 Monitoring Devices This section describes monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the monitoring devices. For specific monitoring schemes in base stations, see Monitor Management. 4.5 Surge Protection Devices This section describes surge protection devices and types of cabinets supported by the surge protection devices. 4.6 Temperature Control Devices This section describes temperature control devices and types of cabinets supported by the temperature control devices. 4.7 Environment Monitoring Device This section describes environment monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the environment monitoring devices. 4.8 Other Devices This section describes other devices besides power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, and temperature control devices, and environment monitoring devices, and types of cabinets supported by the other devices. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


576



4.1 BBU The BBU is used to process baseband signals in 3900 series base stations. For details, see BBU Hardware Description.

4.2 RF Modules In 3900 series base stations, an RFU or RRU can be configured to meet RF module configuration requirements in different scenarios. l

For details about the RFU hardware, see RFU Hardware Description.

l

For details about the RRU hardware, see the related manual of RRU hardware description, such as RRU3926 Hardware Description.

4.3 Power Equipment This section describes all types of power equipment and types of cabinets supported by the power equipment.

4.3.1 EPS 01 An EPS 01 converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power, it can be used in an APM30H(Ver.B) cabinet. The EPS 01 is classified into four types: EPS 01A, EPS 01B, EPS 01C, and EPS 01D. An EPS 01A or EPS 01C applies to a separated macro base station, and an EPS 01B or EPS 01D applies to a distributed base station.

Components of an EPS 01 An EPS 01 consists of an EPS 01 subrack, a PMU 01B, and PSUs (EPW30-48A).

Components of an EPS 01A or EPS 01C The following figure shows the components of an EPS 01A or EPS 01C.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


577



Figure 4-1 Components of an EPS 01A or EPS 01C

(1) PMU 01B

(2) PSU (EPW30-48A)

(3) EPS 01A or EPS 01C Subrack

Components of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D The following figure shows the components of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D. Figure 4-2 Components of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D

(1) PMU 01B

(2) PSU (EPW30-48A)

(3) EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack

EPS 01A or EPS 01C Subrack An EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes AC or DC power to other components. An EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack applies to the separated macro base station in different AC input scenarios.

Types and Applications of Subracks The following table lists the types and applications of EPS 01A and EPS 01C subracks. Table 4-1 Types and applications of EPS 01A and EPS 01C subracks

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Subrack

Application

Remarks

EPS 01A

Separated macro base station with external 220 V AC input

It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs


578



Subrack

Application

Remarks

EPS 01C


(EPW30-48A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and smallcapacity DC power.

Exterior Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-4 show the exteriors of an EPS 01A subrack and an EPS 01C subrack, respectively. Figure 4-3 Exterior of an EPS 01A subrack

(1) AC OUTPUT

(2) AC INPUT

(3) Short-circuiting bara

(6) AC OUTPUT circuit breaker

(7) Circuit breaker (8) Circuit breaker for (9) Circuit breaker for storage batteries RFC 1 for RFC 2

(11) Fuses

(12) DC output ports

(13) Output port for RFC 1

(16) Circuit breaker (17) Spare fuse box (18) Extraction tool for lithium batteriesb

(4) AC surge protector

(5) Circuit breakers for PSUs (10) TMC circuit breaker

(14) Output port for (15) Output port RFC 2 for storage batteries -

-

NOTE

a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed. b: The control switch for lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


579



Figure 4-4 Exterior of an EPS 01C subrack

(1) AC OUTPUT

(2) AC INPUT


(6) Circuit breaker for storage batteries

(7) Circuit breaker for (8) Circuit breaker RFC 1 for RFC 2

(4) Circuit breakers (5) AC OUTPUT for PSUs circuit breaker (9) TMC circuit breaker

(10) Fuses

(11) DC output ports (12) Output port for RFC 1

(13) Output port for (14) Output port (15) Circuit breaker RFC 2 for storage batteries for lithium batteriesa

(16) Spare fuse box

-

(17) Extraction tool

-

-

NOTE

a: The control switch for lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.

Functions The EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack distributes AC and DC power. l

l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

The EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –

Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.

–

Reports AC input surge protection alarms.

The EPS 01A or EPS 01C provides 12 DC outputs for a separated macro base station.


580



Ports The following figure shows the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack. Table 4-2and Table 4-3list the specifications of the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack. Figure 4-5 Input terminals and output terminals on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack

Table 4-2 AC input terminals and output terminals on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack AC Input Terminal or Output Terminal

Wiring Terminal

Connector

AC INPUT

L1, L2, L3, and N

OT terminal (M6)

AC OUTPUT

L1, N1, L2, and N2

Table 4-3 DC output terminals or ports on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

DC Output Terminal or Port

DC Power Supply Unit

Protector

Specifications of the Protector

Connector

TMC

TMC

Breaker

1x25 A

LOAD0

Fan

Fuse

1x15 A

Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)

LOAD1 and LOAD2

BBU

2x15 A

LOAD3

IBBSa

1x15 A

One of the LOAD4 to LOAD7 ports

TMb

4x5 A

NAc

RFC 1

Breaker

1x80 A


Power series 120 connector 581





NAc

RFC 2

NAc

BAT

Protector


Connector

1x100 A

NOTE

l a: IBBS is the IBBS200D or IBBS200T. When an IBBS200D is configured, LOAD3 is the DC output port for the fan power cable in the IBBS200D. When an IBBS200T is configured, LOAD3 is the DC output port for the TEC power cable in the IBBS200T. l b: TM is the customer transmission equipment. The LOAD4 to LOAD7 ports are DC output ports for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. l c: Power ports for RFC 1, RFC 2, and storage batteries are the connectors from the EPS subrack, and there is no silkscreen for them on the panels.

Circuit Breaker There are multiple circuit breakers on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack to control DC outputs. Figure 4-6shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-4lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 4-6 Circuit breakers on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


582



Table 4-4 Circuit breakers on an EPS 01A or EPS 01C subrack Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen on the Panel

Requirements for the Circuit Breaker

Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPS 01A

PSU

3x16 A

Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPS 01C

PSU

1x40 A

AC output circuit breaker

AC OUTPUT

1x16 A

Circuit breaker for storage batteries

BAT

1x100 A

RFC circuit breaker

RFC 1 and RFC 2

2x80 A

TMC circuit breaker

TMC

1x25 A

EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes AC and DC power. An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack applies to a distributed base station in different AC input scenarios.

Applications of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D Subrack The following table lists the applications of an EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack. Table 4-5 Applications of the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack Type

Application

Description

EPS 01B

Distributed base station supplied with 220 V AC power

EPS 01D


It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (EPW30-48A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and smallcapacity DC power.

Exteriors Figure 4-7and Figure 4-8show the exteriors of the EPS 01B and EPS 01D subracks, respectively.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


583



Figure 4-7 Exterior of the EPS 01B subrack

(1) AC OUTPUT

(2) AC INPUT

(3) Short-circuiting bar(1) (4) AC surge protector

(5) PSU circuit breaker

(6) AC OUTPUT circuit (7) TMC circuit breaker (8) Circuit breaker for breaker storage batteries

(9) Breakers

(10) Fuses

(11) DC output terminals (12) Output terminal for storage batteries

(13) Circuit breaker for lithium batteries(2)

(14) Spare fuse box


-

NOTE

a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When an EPS subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed. b: The control switch for lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.

Figure 4-8 Exterior of the EPS 01D subrack

(1) AC OUTPUT

(2) AC INPUT


(6) TMC circuit breaker (7) Circuit breaker for storage batteries

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



(4) PSU circuit breaker (8) Breakers

584



(9) Fuses

(10) DC output terminals (11) Output terminal for storage batteries

(12) Circuit breaker for lithium batteriesa

(13) Spare fuse box


-

-

NOTE

a: The circuit breaker for the lithium batteries is not in use, and its default setting (O:VRLA) is used.

Function An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack distributes AC and DC power. l

l

An EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –

Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet interior, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided to the heater or heating film.

–


The EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack provides 16 DC outputs for a distributed base station.

Figure 4-9shows the input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack. Table 4-6and Table 4-7list the specifications of the input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack. Figure 4-9 Input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack

Table 4-6 AC input and output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

AC Input/Output Terminal

Wiring Terminal

Connector

AC INPUT

L1, L2, L3, N

OT terminal (M6)

AC OUTPUT

L1, N1, L2, N2


585



Table 4-7 DC output terminals on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack DC Output Terminal


Protector

Protector Specification

Connector

LOAD 8 to LOAD 13

RRU

Breaker

6x20 A

TMC

TMC


LOAD 0

FAN

LOAD 1 and LOAD 2

BBU

2x15 A

LOAD 3

IBBS

1x15 A

LOAD 4 to LOAD 7

TM

4x5 A

-

BAT

1x25 A Fuse

Breaker

1x15 A

1x100 A

Power series 120 connector (gray)

Circuit Breakers There are several circuit breakers on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack to control the DC outputs. Figure 4-10shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-8lists the specifications of the circuit breakers.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


586



Figure 4-10 Circuit breakers on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack

Table 4-8 Specifications of the circuit breakers on the EPS 01B or EPS 01D subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen

Requirement for the Circuit Breaker

PSU circuit breakers (EPS 01B)

PSU

3x16 A

PSU circuit breaker (EPS 01D)

PSU

1x40 A

AC output circuit breaker

AC OUTPUT

1x16 A


BAT

1x100 A

TMC circuit breaker

TMC

1x25 A


587



4.3.2 EPS30-4815AF An EPS30-4815AF converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in IMB03 and OMB cabinets.

Components of an EPS30-4815AF An EPS30-4815AF consists of the EPS30-4815AF subrack, DCDU-05, PMU (EPMU03), and PSUs (GERM4815T). The following figure shows the components of an EPS30-4815AF. Figure 4-11 Components of an EPS30-4815AF

(1) DCDU-05

(2) PSU (GERM4815T)

(3) PMU (EPMU03)

(4) EPS30-4815AF Subrack

EPS30-4815AF Subrack An EPS30-4815AF subrack houses the PMU (EPMU03), PSUs (GERM4815T), and DCDU-05 and distributes AC and DC power to other components.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an EPS30-4815AF subrack. Figure 4-12 Exterior of an EPS30-4815AF subrack

Ports The following figure shows the ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


588



Figure 4-13 Ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack

The following table describes the ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack. Table 4-9 Ports and terminals on an EPS30-4815AF subrack Port or Terminal

Silkscreen

Connector

Remarks

(1) AC input port

INPUT

C13 connector

AC power input port

(2) Power input port for the BBU and fan

LOAD1

H4 connector

Input port (10 A) for the BBU and HEUA

(3) Power input port for the DCDU-05

LOAD2

H4 connector

Input port (20 A) for the transmission equipment

(4) Power input port for the storage batteries

BATT

H4 connector

Input port (20 A) for the storage batteries

Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of an EPS30-4815AF. Table 4-10 Technical specifications of an EPS30-4815AF Item

Specifications

Input voltage

220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC 110 V AC dual-live-wire voltage range: 90/180 V AC to 135/270 V AC

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Input voltage frequency

45 Hz to 65 Hz

Output voltage

Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC


589



Item

Specifications

Output current

15 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power 7.5 A for the 110 V AC dual-live-wire input power

Surge protection capability

2 kV in differential mode 4 kV in common mode

4.3.3 EPS4890 An EPS4890 converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B) and IMB03(ICR scenario) cabinets.

Components of an EPS4890 An EPS4890 consists of the EPS4890 subrack, PMU 01B, and PSUs (EPW30-48A). The following figure shows the components of an EPS4890. Figure 4-14 Components of an EPS4890

(1) PMU 01B

(2) PSU (EPW30-48A)

(3) EPS4890 Subrack

EPS4890 Subrack An EPS4890 subrack houses the PMU 01B and PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes DC power to other components.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an EPS4890 subrack. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


590



Figure 4-15 Exterior of an EPS4890 subrack

Port The following figure shows the terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack. Figure 4-16 Terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack

The following table describes the terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack. Table 4-11 Terminals and circuit breaker on an EPS4890 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Terminal/Circuit Breaker

Remarks

(1) Power input terminals

Connects to the AC input power cable.

(2) Circuit breakers for the storage batteries

Controls power supply to the storage batteries.

(3) Power input terminal for the storage batteries

The BAT(-) terminal connects to the negative poles of the storage batteries, and the BAT(+) terminal connects to the positive poles of the storage batteries.

(4) Power output terminals

LOAD1(-) and LOAD2(-) wiring terminals connect to NEG(-) power cables, and RTN(+) wiring terminals connect to RTN(+) power cables.


591



4.3.4 EPS24S48100DC An EPS24S48100DC converts +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.B), and IMB03(ICR scenario) cabinets.

Components of an EPS24S48100DC An EPS24S48100DC consists of the EPS24S48100DC subrack and PSUs (EPW25-24S48D). The following figure shows the components of an EPS24S48100DC. Figure 4-17 Components of an EPS24S48100DC

(1) PSU (EPW25-24S48D)

(2) EPS24S48100DC Subrack

EPS24S48100DC Subrack An EPS24S48100DC subrack houses the PSUs (EPW30-48A) and distributes DC power to other components.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an EPS24S48100DC subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


592



Figure 4-18 Exterior of an EPS24S48100DC subrack

Ports The following figure shows the ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack. Figure 4-19 Ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack

The following table describes the ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack. Table 4-12 Ports and terminals on an EPS24S48100DC subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Port or Terminal

Silkscre en

Conne ctor

Remarks


DC INPUT

OT terminal

The + wiring terminal connects to the +24 V power cable, and the - wiring terminal connects to the +24 V RTN cable.

(2) Alarm port

ALM

Cord end terminal

Connects to the PSU monitoring signal cable.

(3) In-position signal port

PRESEN T

RJ45 connect or

Connects to the PSU in-position signal cable.


593



Port or Terminal

Silkscre en

Conne ctor

Remarks


DC OUTPU T

OT terminal

The LOAD(-) terminal connects to the -48 V power cable, and the RTN(+) terminal connects to the -48 V RTN cable.

4.3.5 EPU03A An EPU03A converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power, it can be used in an APM30H(Ver.C) cabinet. The EPU03A is classified into four types: EPU03A-02, EPU03A-03, EPU03A-04, and EPU03A-05. An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 applies to a separated macro base station, and an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 applies to a distributed base station.

Components of an EPU03A An EPU03A consists of an EPU03A subrack, a PMU 01B, and PSUs (PSU4850A).

Components of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 The following figure shows the components of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04. Figure 4-20 Components of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04

(1) PMU 01B

(2) PSU (PSU4850A)

(3) EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 Subrack

Components of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 The following figure describes the components of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


594



Figure 4-21 Components of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05

(1) PMU 01B

(2) PSU (PSU4850A)

(3) EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 Subrack

EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 Subrack An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (PSU4850A) and distributes AC or DC power to other components. An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack applies to a separated macro base station in different AC input scenarios.

Types and Applications of Subracks The following table lists the types and applications of EPU03A-02 and EPU03A-04 subracks. Table 4-13 Types and applications of EPU03A-02 and EPU03A-04 subracks Subrack

Application

Remarks

EPU03A-02


EPU03A-04


It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (PSU4850A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and smallcapacity DC power.

Exterior Figure 4-22 and Figure 4-23 show the exteriors of an EPU03A-02 subrack and an EPU03A-04 subrack, respectively.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


595



Figure 4-22 Exterior of an EPU03A-02 subrack

(1) AC INPUT

(2) AC OUTPUT (3) Circuit breakers for (4) AC OUTPUT PSU 1 to PSU 3 circuit breaker


(6) TMC circuit breaker

(7) BBU_0 circuit (8) BBU_1 circuit breaker breaker

(9) RFC 1 circuit breaker


(11) Extraction tool (12) Spare fuse box

(13) Output port for storage batteries






-

(17) Fuses

NOTE

a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPU03A-02 subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When an EPU03A-02 subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


596




(1) AC INPUT

(2) AC OUTPUT

(3) Circuit breaker for the PSU

(4) AC OUTPUT1 circuit breaker

(5) AC OUTPUT2 circuit breaker



(8) BBU_0 circuit (9) BBU_1 circuit breaker breaker



(12) Extraction tool (13) Spare fuse box

(16) Output port for (17) DC output RFC 1 ports

(18) Fuses

(14) Output port for storage batteries



-

Functions An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack distributes AC and DC power. l

l

An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 performs the following AC power distribution functions: –

Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the junction box on the left side of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.

–


An EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 provides 12 DC outputs for a separated macro base station.

Ports The following figure shows the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack. Table 4-14and Table 4-15list the specifications of the input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


597



Figure 4-24 Input terminals and output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack

Table 4-14 AC input terminals and output terminals on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack AC Input Terminal or Output Terminal

Wiring Terminal

Connector

AC INPUT

L1, L2, L3, and N

OT terminal (M6)

AC OUTPUT

L1, N1, L2, and N2

Table 4-15 DC output terminals/ports on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



Protector

Specification s of the Protector

Connector

TMC

TMC

Breaker

1x30 A

BBU_0 and BBU_1

BBU


LOAD0 and LOAD1

TMa

LOAD2

TMa

LOAD3

Fan or TECb

LOAD4

TM or EMUA or EMUBc

LOAD5

Fand

2x25 A Fuse

2x5 A 4x15 A


598





Protector

Specification s of the Protector

Connector

NAe

RFC 1 and RFC 2

Breaker

2x125 A

Power series 120 connector (blue) on a power cable with a crosssectional area of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2)

1x160 A

Power series 175 connector (gray) on a power cable with a crosssectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in. 2)

BAT

NOTE

a: TM is the customer transmission equipment. The LOAD0, LOAD1, LOAD2, and LOAD4 ports are DC output ports for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. b: When an IBBS200D is configured, the LOAD3 port is the DC output port for the fan power cable in the IBBS200D. When an IBBS200T is configured, the LOAD3 port is the DC output port for the TEC power cable in the IBBS200T. c: When an EMUA or EMUB is configured, the LOAD4 port is the DC output port for the EMUA or EMUB. When no EMUA or EMUB is configured, the LOAD4 port can supply power to the transmission equipment. d: The LOAD5 port is the DC output port for the fan assembly in the APM30H. e: Power ports for RFC 1, RFC 2, and storage batteries are the connectors from the EPU subrack, and there is no silkscreen for them on the panels.

Circuit Breaker There are multiple circuit breakers on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack to control DC outputs. Figure 4-25shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-16lists the specifications of the circuit breakers.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


599



Figure 4-25 Circuit breakers on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack

Table 4-16 Circuit breakers on an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Circuit Breaker



Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPU03A-02

PSU 1 to PSU 3

3x20 A

Circuit breakers for PSUs in the EPU03A-04

PSUs

1x63 A

AC output circuit breaker in the EPU03A-02

AC OUTPUT

1x15 A

AC output circuit breaker in the EPU03A-04

AC OUTPUT1 and AC OUTPUT2

2x15 A


600



Circuit Breaker




BAT

1x160 A

TMC circuit breaker

TMC

1x30 A

BBU circuit breaker

BBU_0 and BBU_1

2x25 A

RFC circuit breaker

RFC 1 and RFC 2

2x125 A

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack. Table 4-17 Technical specifications of an EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 subrack Power Supply

Specifications

Output voltage

-44 V DC to -58 V DC

Rated voltage

-53.5 V DC

Output current

0 A to 150 A

EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 Subrack An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack provides slots for a PMU 01B and PSUs (PSU4850A) and distributes AC or DC power to components in the cabinet. An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack applies to a distributed base station in different AC input scenarios.

Applications of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 Subrack The following table describes the applications of an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack. Table 4-18 Applications of the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Type

Application

Description

EPU03A-03


EPU03A-05


It is a 5 U subrack, housing a maximum of three PSUs (PSU4850A) and one PMU 01B. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.


601



Exteriors Figure 4-26 and Figure 4-27 show the exteriors of the EPU03A-03 and EPU03A-05 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-26 Exterior of the EPU03A-03 subrack

(1) AC INPUT

(2) AC OUTPUT

(3) Circuit breakers for PSU 1 to PSU 3




(7) BBU_0 circuit breaker (8) BBU_1 circuit breaker

(9) Circuit breakers for RRU 0 to RRU 5


(11) Spare fuse box

(12) Output terminal for storage batteries

(13) DC output terminals

(14) Fuses



NOTE

a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC single-phase power. When the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


602



Figure 4-27 Exterior of the EPU03A-05 subrack

(1) AC INPUT

(2) AC OUTPUT


(4) AC OUTPUT 1 circuit breaker

(5) AC OUTPUT 2 circuit (6) Circuit breaker for (7) TMC circuit breaker breaker storage batteries

(8) BBU_0 circuit breaker

(9) BBU_1 circuit breaker (10) Circuit breakers for RRU 0 to RRU 5


(12) Spare fuse box


(15) Fuses


(14) DC output terminals

Function An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 distributes AC and DC power. l

l

An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack performs the following AC power distribution functions: –


–


An EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack provides 16 DC outputs for a distributed base station.

Terminals The following figure shows the power input and output terminals on an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack. For details, see Table 4-19 and Table 4-20.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


603



Figure 4-28 Power input and output terminals on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack

Table 4-19 AC input and output terminals on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack AC Input/Output Terminal

Wiring Terminal

Connector

AC INPUT

L1, L2, L3, N

OT terminal (M6)

AC OUTPUT

L1, N1, L2, N2

Table 4-20 DC input and output terminals on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

DC Output Terminal


Protector


Connector

RRU 0 to RRU 5

RRU

Breaker

6x25 A

TMC

TMC

1x30 A


BBU_0 and BBU_1

BBU

2x25 A

LOAD 0 and LOAD 1

TM

LOAD 2

TM

LOAD 3

TEC/FAN (battery cabinet)

LOAD 4

EMUA or EMUB

LOAD 5

FAN

Fusea

2x5 A 4x15 A


604



DC Output Terminal


Protector


Connector

-

BAT

Breaker

1x160 A

Power series 175 connector (gray) on a power cable with a crosssectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in. 2)

NOTE

a: The spare fuse box can provide 5 A and 15 A fuses, which can be used to replace broken ones onsite.

Circuit Breakers There are several circuit breakers on an EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack to control the DC outputs. The following figure shows the positions of the circuit breakers. Table 4-21 lists the specifications of the circuit breakers. Figure 4-29 Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


605



Table 4-21 Specifications of the circuit breakers on the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen


PSU circuit breakers (EPU03A-03)

PSU1 to PSU3

3x20 A

PSU circuit breaker (EPU03A-05)

PSU

1x63 A

AC output circuit breaker (EPU03A-03)

AC OUTPUT

1x15 A

AC output circuit breakers (EPU03A-05)


2x15 A


BAT

1x160 A

TMC circuit breaker

TMC

1x30 A

BBU circuit breakers

BBU_0 and BBU_1

2x25 A

RRU circuit breakers

RRU0 to RRU5

6x25 A

Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack. Table 4-22 Technical specifications of the EPU03A-03 or EPU03A-05 subrack Component

Specifications

Output voltage


Rated voltage

-53.5 V DC

Output current

0 A to 150 A

4.3.6 EPU05A An EPU05A converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. EPU05A types include EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, EPU05A-05, EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, and EPU05A-09. The EPU05A-02, EPU05A-04, EPU05A-06, and EPU05A-08 can be used in macro base stations, and the EPU05A-03, EPU05A-05, EPU05A-07, and EPU05A-09 can be used in distributed base stations. The EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, and EPU05A-05 can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets, APM30Hs (Ver.D), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A1), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A2), APM30Hs (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinets, and BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinets, or IMS06s. The EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, and EPU05A-09 can be used in APM30Hs (Ver.E). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


606



Components in an EPU05A An EPU05A-02, EPU05A-03, EPU05A-04, or EPU05A-05 consists of an EPU05A subrack, a PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). An EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 consists of an EPU05A subrack, PSUs (R4850G2), a PDU03D-02, and a PDU01D-01.

Components of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04. Figure 4-30 Components of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04

No.

Component

Description

(1)

PMU 11A

It is always installed in slot 0.

(2)

PSU (R4850G2)

The number of PSUs ranges from 2 to 5. PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots in the sequence from slot 1 to slot 5.

(3)

Filler panel

Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots.

(4)

EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Subrack

-

Components of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


607



Figure 4-31 Components of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05

No.

Component

Description

(1)

PMU 11A

It is always installed in slot 0.

(2)

PSU (R4850G2)


(3)

Filler panel

Filler panels must be installed in vacant slots.

(4)

EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack

-

Components of an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


608




No.

Component

Description

(1)

PSU (R4850G2)


(2)

PDU01D-01

It is optional and can be installed in slot 6.

(3)

PDU03D-02

It is optional and can be installed in slot 7, 8, or 9.

(4)

EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 Subracks

-

-

Filler panel

Filler panels must be installed in any of vacant slots 1 to 9.

Components of an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 The following figure shows the components of an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


609




No.

Component

Description

(1)

PSU (R4850G2)


(2)

PDU01D-01

It is optional and can be installed in slot 6.

(3)

PDU03D-02

It is optional and can be installed in slot 7, 8, or 9.

(4)

EPU05A-07 and EPU05A-09 Subracks

-

-

Filler panel

Filler panels must be installed in any of vacant slots 1 to 9.

EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Subrack An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2). It also distributes AC input power and DC output power. An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 applies to a macro base station in different AC input scenarios.

Application of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 Subrack The following table describes the application of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack. Table 4-23 Application of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Type

Application

Description

EPU05A-02

Macro base station with external 220 V AC input

It is a 5 U subrack and houses a maximum of five PSUs (R4850G2)


610



Type

Application

Description

EPU05A-04

Macro base station with external 110 V AC input

and one PMU. It distributes largeand small-capacity DC power.

Exterior Figure 4-34 and Figure 4-35 show the exteriors of EPU05A-02 and EPU05A-04 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-34 Exterior of an EPU05A-02 subrack


(2) PSU1/4 circuit breaker, PSU2/5 circuit breaker, and PSU3 circuit breaker


(4) BAT circuit breaker

(5) Circuit breaker for RFC1


(7) Output port for the storage battery

(8) RFC1 output port


(10) LOAD0 to LOAD8 output (11) Spare fuse box ports


(13) AC INPUT

(14) AC OUTPUT

-

-

NOTE

a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. When the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


611






(3) AC OUTPUT1/AC OUTPUT2 circuit breaker




(7) Output port for the storage battery



(10) LOAD0 to LOAD8 (11) Spare fuse box output ports

(12) AC INPUT

(13) AC OUTPUT

-

-

-

Function An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack distributes AC and DC power. l

l


Provides two AC outputs. One is used for the service outlet unit (SOU). The other one is connected to the AC junction box on the left of the cabinet, and divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or heating film.

–


An EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack provides 12 DC outputs for a separated macro base station.

Port The following figure shows the power input and output ports on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack. Table 4-24 and Table 4-25 list the ports in detail.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


612



Figure 4-36 Power input and output ports on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack

Table 4-24 AC input and output ports on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack AC Input/Output Terminal

Wiring Terminal

Connector

AC INPUT (EPU05A-02)

L1, L2, L3, N

OT terminal (M6)


L1, L2, N, PE

AC OUTPUT

L1, N1, L2, N2

Table 4-25 DC input and output ports and terminals on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

DC output ports


Protector


Connector

LOAD0 and LOAD1

BBU

Fusec

9x30 A

EPC4

LOAD2

FAN

LOAD3

TM_0a

LOAD4

TM_1

LOAD5

TM_2 or EMUA or EMUB

LOAD6

TM_3 or BBU

LOAD7

TMC

LOAD8

IBBSb Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

613



DC output ports


Protector


Connector

RFC1

RFC1

Breaker

2x125 A

RFC2

RFC2

OT terminal (M6)

BAT

BAT

1x250 A

OT terminal (M8)

NOTE

a: TM is the customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC output terminals for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. b: When the IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output port for the IBBS200D fan power cable. When IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output port for the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: The spare fuse box contains five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses for onsite replacement.

Circuit Breaker There are several circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack panel to control the DC outputs. The following figure shows the positions of circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of circuit breakers. Figure 4-37 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


614



Table 4-26 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack Circuit Breaker




PSU1/4

1x40 A/1 P

PSU2/5

1x40 A/1 P

PSU3

1x25 A/1 P


PSU

1x100 A/2 P


AC OUTPUT

1x16 A/2 P



2x16 A/1 P

Storage battery circuit breaker

BAT

1x125 A/2 P

RFC circuit breaker

RFC 1 and RFC 2

2x125 A/1 P

Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack. Table 4-27 Technical specifications of an EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 subrack Component

Specifications

Output voltage


Rated voltage

-53.5 V DC

Output current

0 A to 250 A

EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 Subrack An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2). It also distributes AC and DC power. The EPU05A-03 and EPU05A-05 subrack applies to a distributed base station in different AC input scenarios.

Applications of an EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 Subrack The following table describes the applications of an EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


615



Table 4-28 Applications of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack Type

Application

Description

EPU05A-03


EPU05A-05


It is a 5 U subrack and houses a maximum of five PSUs (R4850G2) and one PMU 11A. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.

Exteriors Figure 4-38and Figure 4-39show the exteriors of the EPU05A-03 and EPU05A-05 subracks, respectively. Figure 4-38 Exterior of the EPU05A-03 subrack


(2) PSU1/4 circuit breaker, (3) AC OUTPUT circuit (4) BAT circuit breaker PSU2/5 circuit breaker, and breaker PSU3 circuit breaker

(5) Circuit breaker for RFC 1


(7) Output terminal for RFC 1

(8) Output terminals for LOAD 0 to LOAD 8

(9) Output terminals for RRU 0 to RRU 5

(10) Spare fuse box


(12) AC INPUT

(13) AC OUTPUT

-

-

-

NOTE

a: When a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC single-phase power. When the EPU subrack supports 220 V AC three-phase power, the short-circuiting bar needs to be removed.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


616



Figure 4-39 Exterior of the EPU05A-05 subrack


(2) PSU circuit breaker (3) AC OUTPUT 1 or AC OUTPUT 2 circuit breaker


(5) Circuit breaker for RFC (6) Output terminal for (7) Output terminal for RFC (8) LOAD 0 to LOAD 8 1 storage batteries 1 output terminals (9) Output terminals for RRU 0 to RRU 5

(10) Spare fuse box

(11) AC INPUT

(12) AC OUTPUT

Function An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 distributes AC and DC power. l

l



–


An EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack provides 17 DC outputs for a distributed base station.

Terminals The following figure shows the power input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack, as shown in Table 4-29, Table 4-30.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


617



Figure 4-40 Power input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack

Table 4-29 AC input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack AC Input/Output Terminal

Wiring Terminal

Connector


L1, L2, L3, N

OT terminal (M6)


L1, L2, N, PE

AC OUTPUT

L1, N1, L2, N2

Table 4-30 DC input and output terminals on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

DC Output Terminal


Protector


Connector

LOAD 0 and LOAD 1

BBU

Fusec

15x30 A

EPC 4

LOAD 2

FAN

LOAD 3

TM_0a

LOAD 4

TM_1

LOAD 5

TM_2 or EMUA or EMUB


618



DC Output Terminal


LOAD 6

TM_3 or BBU

LOAD 7

TMC

LOAD 8

IBBSb

RRU 0 to RRU 5

RRU

RFC 1

RFC

BAT

BAT

Protector


Connector

EPC 5 Breaker

1x125 A

OT terminal (M6)

1x250 A

OT terminal (M8)

NOTE

a: TM is the customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC output terminals for the transmission equipment, supporting four DC outputs. b: When the IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output terminal connecting to the IBBS200D fan power cable. When IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is the DC output terminal connecting to the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: The spare fuse box can provide five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses, which can be used to replace broken ones onsite.

Circuit Breakers There are several circuit breakers on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack panel to control the DC outputs. The following figure shows the positions of the circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of the circuit breakers.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


619



Figure 4-41 Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack

Table 4-31 Specifications of the circuit breakers on the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen



PSU1/4

1x40 A/1 P

PSU2/5

1x40 A/1 P

PSU3

1x25 A/1 P

PSU circuit breaker (EPU05A-05)

PSU

1x100 A/2 P


AC OUTPUT

1x16 A/2 P

AC output circuit breakers (EPU05A-05)


2x16 A/1 P


BAT

1x125 A/2 P

RFC circuit breaker

RFC1

1x125 A/1 P


620



Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack. Table 4-32 Technical specifications of the EPU05A-03 or EPU05A-05 subrack Component

Specifications

Output voltage


Rated voltage

-53.5 V DC

Output current

0 A to 250 A

EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 Subracks An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack houses PSUs (R4850G2), a PDU03D-02, and a PDU01D-01. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power. EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 subracks can be used in separated macro base stations with different AC power inputs.

Types and Applications of Subracks The following table describes the applications of an EPU05A-06 subrack and an EPU05A-08 subrack. Table 4-33 Applications of an EPU05A-06 subrack and an EPU05A-08 subrack Model

Application

Description

EPU05A-06


EPU05A-08

Separated macro base station with an external 110 V AC power input

It is 5 U high and can house five PSUs (R4850G2) with 3000 W power of each PSU, three PDU03D-02s, and one PDU01D-01. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.

Exterior Figure 4-42 and Figure 4-43 show the exteriors of EPU05A-06 and EPU05A-08 subracks, respectively.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


621






(4) Output port and circuit breaker for RFC 1

(5) Output port and circuit (6) Output terminals for breaker for RFC 2 storage batteries

(7) Indicator for the storage battery circuit status

(8) Button switch for the storage battery circuit

(9) LOAD0 to LOAD8 power output terminals

(10) PMIU

(11) Spare fuse box

(12) AC OUTPUT port

(13) AC INPUT port

(14) Short-circuiting bar

-

-

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5


622







(4) Output port and circuit breaker for RFC 1

(5) Output port and circuit (6) Output terminals for breaker for RFC 2 storage batteries




(10) Power monitoring interface unit (PMIU)

(11) Spare fuse box

(12) AC OUTPUT port

(13) AC INPUT port

-

-

-

NOTE

l If a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. If the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, you must remove the short-circuiting bar. l Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 220 V AC power are gray. Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 110 V AC power are blue. l The button switch for storage battery circuit controls the power supply of the storage batteries. If the indicator for storage battery circuit status is steady off, the storage battery circuit is interrupted. If the indicator is steady on, the storage battery circuit is normal. l Before maintaining storage batteries, turn off the switch for storage battery circuit.

Function An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 distributes AC input power and DC output power. l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Provides two AC power outputs (one for an SOU and one for the AC junction box on the left of a cabinet). The AC junction box provides four AC power outputs for heaters or heating films.

–

Reports AC input surge protection alarms. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

623



– l

Provides a circuit breaker for each of five PSUs.

An EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 provides 12 DC power outputs by default and can be configured with a PDU01D-01 and a PDU03D-02 to provide a maximum of 22 power outputs to meet DC power distribution requirements in a separated macro base station.

Port The following figure shows AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack. Table 4-34and Table 4-35list the specifications of AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports. Figure 4-44 AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack

Table 4-34 AC power input and output terminals on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

AC Input or Output Terminal

Wiring Terminal

Connector

AC INPUT terminal (EPU05A-06)

L1, L2, L3, and N

OT terminal (M6)


L1, L2, N, and PE

AC OUTPUT terminal

L1, N1, L2, and N2


624



Table 4-35 DC power output ports on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack DC Power Output Port


Protector


Connector

LOAD0 and LOAD1

BBU

Fusec

9x30 A

EPC4

LOAD2

FAN

LOAD3

TM_0a

LOAD4

TM_1

LOAD5

TM_2, EMUA, or EMUB

LOAD6

TM_3 or BBU

LOAD7

TMC

LOAD8

IBBSb

RFC 1

RFC 1

Breaker

2x100 A

RFC 2

RFC 2

OT terminal (M6)

BATd

BAT

-

-

-

a: TM is customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC power output terminals for transmission equipment, supporting four DC power outputs. b: If an IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200D fan power cable. If an IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: A spare fuse box contains five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses for onsite replacement. d: The BAT port in an EPU subrack does not have a protective component. The circuit breaker BAT in a battery cabinet requires 250 A current.

Circuit Breaker There are several circuit breakers on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack to control DC power outputs. The following figure shows the positions of circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of circuit breakers. Figure 4-45 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-06 or EPU05A-08 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


625




Silkscreen


Circuit breakers for PSUs

PSU1/2/3/4/5

5x32 A

AC power output circuit breaker (EPU05A-06)

AC OUTPUT

1x16 A


AC OUTPUT

1x16 A

Circuit breakers for RFCs

RFC1 and RFC2

2x100 A

EPU05A-07 and EPU05A-09 Subracks An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack houses PSUs (R4850G2), a PDU03D-02, and a PDU01D-01. It also distributes AC input power and DC output power. EPU05A-07 and EPU05A-09 subracks can be used in distributed base stations with different AC power inputs.

Types and Applications of Subracks The following table describes the applications of an EPU05A-07 subrack and an EPU05A-09 subrack. Table 4-37 Applications of an EPU05A-07 subrack and an EPU05A-09 subrack Model

Application

Description

EPU05A-07

Distributed base station with an external 220 V AC power input

EPU05A-09

Distributed base station with an external 110 V AC power input

It is 5 U high and can house five PSUs (R4850G2) with 3000 W power of each PSU, three PDU03D-02s, and one PDU01D-01. It distributes large- and small-capacity DC power.

Exterior Figure 4-46 and Figure 4-47 show the exteriors of an EPU05A-07 subrack and an EPU05A-09 subrack.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


626



Figure 4-46 Exterior of EPU05A-07 subrack



(3) AC OUTPUT circuit (4) LOAD9 to LOAD14 breaker power output terminals

(5) Power output terminals (6) Indicator for the storage (7) Button switch for the (8) LOAD0 to LOAD8 for storage batteries battery circuit status storage battery circuit power output terminals (9) Power monitoring interface unit (PMIU)

(10) Spare fuse box

(11) AC OUTPUT terminal

(12) AC INPUT terminal

(13) Short-circuiting bar

-

-

-

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


627





(2) Circuit breakers for PSUs (3) AC OUTPUT circuit 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 breaker


(5) Power output terminals for storage batteries




(9) PMIU

(10) Spare fuse box

(11) AC OUTPUT terminal

(12) AC INPUT terminal

NOTE

l If a short-circuiting bar is installed on the AC INPUT wiring terminal to connect the L1, L2, and L3 terminals, an EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC single-phase power. If the EPU subrack supplies 220 V AC three-phase power, you must remove the short-circuiting bar. l Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 220 V AC power are gray. Circuit breakers in an EPU supplying 110 V AC power are blue. l The button switch for storage battery circuit controls the power supply of the storage batteries. If the indicator for storage battery circuit status is steady off, the storage battery circuit is interrupted. If the indicator is steady on, the storage battery circuit is normal. l Before maintaining storage batteries, turn off the switch for storage battery circuit.

Function An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 distributes AC input power and DC output power. l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Provides two AC power outputs (one for an SOU and one for the AC junction box on the left of a cabinet). The AC junction box provides four AC power outputs for heaters or heating films.

–


–

Provides a circuit breaker for each of five PSUs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

628


l


An EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 provides 16 DC power outputs by default and can be configured with a PDU01D-01 and a PDU03D-02 to provide a maximum of 26 DC power outputs to meet DC power distribution requirements in a distributed base station.

Port The following figure shows AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack. Table 4-38 and Table 4-39 list the specifications of AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports. Figure 4-48 AC power input and output terminals as well as DC power output ports on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack

Table 4-38 AC power input and output terminals on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

AC Input or Output Terminal

Wiring Terminal

Connector


L1, L2, L3, and N

OT terminal (M6)


L1, L2, N, and PE

AC OUTPUT terminal

L1, N1, L2, and N2


629



Table 4-39 DC power output ports on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack DC Power Output Port


Protector


Connector

LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports

BBU

Fusec

9x30 A

EPC4

LOAD2 port

FAN

LOAD3 port

TM_0a

LOAD4 port

TM_1

LOAD5 port

TM_2, EMUA, or EMUB

LOAD6 port

TM_3 or BBU

LOAD7

TMC

LOAD8 port

IBBSb

LOAD9 to LOAD14 portsd

RRUs

Fuse

6x30 A

EPC5

BATe

BAT

-

-

-

a: TM is customer transmission equipment. LOAD3, LOAD4, LOAD5, and LOAD6 are DC power output terminals for transmission equipment, supporting four DC power outputs. b: If an IBBS200D is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200D fan power cable. If an IBBS200T is configured, LOAD8 is a DC power output terminal for the IBBS200T TEC power cable. c: A spare fuse box contains five 5 A fuses and three 30 A fuses for onsite replacement. d: LOAD9 to LOAD14 ports configured with EPC5 connectors supply power to RRUs. e: The BAT port in an EPU subrack does not have a protective component. The circuit breaker BAT in a battery cabinet requires 250 A current.

Circuit Breaker There are several circuit breakers on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack to control DC power outputs. The following figure shows the positions of circuit breakers and the following table describes the specifications of circuit breakers. Figure 4-49 Circuit breakers on an EPU05A-07 or EPU05A-09 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


630




Silkscreen


Circuit breakers for PSUs

PSU1/2/3/4/5

5x32 A


AC OUTPUT

1x16 A


AC OUTPUT

1x16 A

4.3.7 ETP48150-A3 The ETP48150-A3 converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. It can be used in a BTS3900(Ver.C) cabinet.

Components of an ETP48150-A3 The ETP48150-A3 consists of the ETP48150-A3 subrack, PMU 01B, and PSUs (PSU4850A). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48150-A3. Figure 4-50 Components of an ETP48150-A3

(1) PMU 01B

(2) PSU (PSU4850A)

(3) ETP48150-A3 Subrack

ETP48150-A3 Subrack The ETP48150-A3 subrack provides slots for the PMU 01B and PSUs (PSU4850A) and distributes DC power to other components.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48150-A3 subrack. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


631



Figure 4-51 Exterior of an ETP48150-A3 subrack

Ports The following figure shows the components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack. Figure 4-52 Components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack

The following table describes the components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack. Table 4-41 Components on the panel of an ETP48150-A3 subrack Component

Connector

Remarks


OT terminals

Connect to the AC input power cables.

(2) Circuit breakers

-

Control the power output.


OT terminals

The positive pole is connected to the RTN(+) terminal on the DCDU-11A. The negative pole is connected to the NEG(-) terminal on the DCDU-11A.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


632



4.3.8 ETP48400 The ETP48400 converts AC power into DC power and distributes power. It can be used in a BTS3900AL(Ver.A) cabinet.

Components of an ETP48400 The ETP48400 consists of the ETP48400 subrack, PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48400. Figure 4-53 Components of an ETP48400

(1) PMU 11A or PMU 11B

(2) PSU (R4850G2)

(3) ETP48400 Subrack

The following table describes the components of an ETP48400. Table 4-42 Components of an ETP48400 Component

Description

ETP48400 subrack

Figure 4-53shows how slots are numbered in an ETP48400 subrack.

PMU 11A

It is installed in slot 0.

PSU (R4850G2)

A minimum of two PSUs must be configured. The PSUs must be installed in adjacent slots from slot 1 to slot 7.

ETP48400 Subrack The ETP48400 subrack distributes AC input power and DC output power, and provides slots for a PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2) and communication interfaces between the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


633



Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48400 subrack. Figure 4-54 Exterior of an ETP48400 subrack

(1) Power supply terminal (2) Power supply terminal for DCDU-12C module 0 for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet

(3) Power supply terminal for the TMC11H (Ver.D)

(4) AC input wiring terminal

(5) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12C module 0

(6) Circuit breaker for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet

(7) Circuit breaker for the TMC11H (Ver.D)

(8) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12B module 2

(9) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12C module 1

(10) Circuit breaker for DCDU-12B module 3

(11) Circuit breaker for the built-in storage batteries, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T


NOTE

(1) The following provides colors of wires in the cables connecting to the power supply terminals on a DCDU-12C, a BTS3900AL DC cabinet, and a TMC11H (Ver.D). l In most regions, the RTN(+) wire is black and the NEG(-) wire is blue. l In UK, the RTN(+) wire is blue and the NEG(-) wire is gray.

Functions An ETP48400 subrack can house one PMU 11A and seven PSUs (R4850G2) and provides the following DC power outputs: l

Three DC power outputs of 100 A: One power output is supplied to the DCDU-12C, and the other two power outputs are designated for the BTS3900AL DC cabinet and TMC11H (Ver.D).

l

Three DC power outputs of 200 A: One power output is supplied to the DCDU-12C, and the other two power outputs are supplied to the DCDU-12B.

l

One DC power output of 400 A: It is supplied to the built-in storage battery pack, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T.

4.3.9 ETP48100-A1 An ETP48100-A1 converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in an OMB(Ver.C) cabinet. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


634



Components of an ETP48100-A1 An ETP48100-A1 consists of the ETP48100-A1 subrack, PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48100-A1. Figure 4-55 Components of an ETP48100-A1


(2) PSU (R4850G2)

(3) ETP48100-A1 Subrack

ETP48100-A1 Subrack An ETP48100-A1 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2) and distributes AC and DC power to other components.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48100-A1 subrack. Figure 4-56 Exterior of an ETP48100-A1 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


635



Port The following figure shows the terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack. Figure 4-57 Terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack

The following table describes the terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack. Table 4-43 Terminals and circuit breaker on an ETP48100-A1 subrack Terminal or Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen

Connector

Remarks

(1) AC input terminal

INPUT

OT terminal


(2) Circuit breaker

LOAD0 or LOAD1

-

Controls the power output.

(3) DC output terminal

OUTPUT

OT terminal

The positive wire is connected to the RTN(+) terminal on the PDU10D-01. The negative wire is connected to the NEG(-) terminal on the PDU10D-01.

4.3.10 ETP48100-B1 An ETP48100-B1 converts AC power into DC power and distributes the power. It can be used in an IMB03 cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


636



Components of an ETP48100-B1 An ETP48100-B1 consists of the ETP48100-B1 subrack, PMU 11A, and PSUs (R4850G2). The following figure shows the components of an ETP48100-B1. Figure 4-58 Components of an ETP48100-B1


(2) PSU (R4850G2)

(3) ETP48100-B1 Subrack

ETP48100-B1 Subrack An ETP48100-B1 subrack houses the PMU 11A and PSUs (R4850G2) and distributes AC and DC power to other components.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ETP48100-B1 subrack. Figure 4-59 Exterior of an ETP48100-B1 subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


637



Ports The following figure shows the ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack. Figure 4-60 Ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack

The following table describes the ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack. Table 4-44 Ports and terminals on an ETP48100-B1 subrack Port or Terminal

Silkscreen

Connector

Remarks

(1) AC input terminal

INPUT

OT terminal


(2) DC output port

OUTPUT

EPC5 connector

The LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports feed power to RRUs. The LOAD3 port feeds power to the BBU.

Technical Specifications The following table describes the technical specifications of an ETP48100-B1. Table 4-45 Technical specifications of an ETP48100-B1

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Specifications

Input voltage

220 V AC single-phase voltage range: 176 V AC to 290 V AC

Input voltage frequency

45 Hz to 65 Hz

Output voltage

Voltage range: -42 V DC to -58 V DC

Output current

30 A for the 220 V AC single-phase input power Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

638



Item

Specifications

Surge protection capability

2 kV in differential mode 4 kV in common mode

4.3.11 PMU This section describes PMUs and types of cabinets supported by the PMUs.

PMU 11A or PMU 11B A power monitoring unit 11A/11B (PMU 11A or PMU 11B) manages the power system and battery, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900AL (Ver.A), OMB (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A), BTS3900 (Ver.D_B), APM30H (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_A2), APM30H (Ver.E_A1), APM30H (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z), BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinets and IMS06 subrack.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. NOTE

On the lower left of a PMU 11A and a PMU 11B, there are silkscreens PMU 11A and PMU 11B, respectively.

Figure 4-61 Exterior of a PMU 11A or PMU 11B

Function A PMU 11A or PMU 11B performs the following functions: l Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

639



l

Manages the power system and the charge and discharge of storage batteries.

l

Monitors the door status and the temperature of storage batteries.

l

Monitors power distribution and reports alarms.

l

Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 port.

Port The following figure shows the ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. Figure 4-62 Ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B

The following table describes the ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B. Table 4-46 Ports on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B No.

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

1

GATE

2-pin connector

Connects to a door status sensor.

2

TEM_BAT

2-pin connector

Connects to a battery temperature sensor.

3

COM_IN

RJ45 connector

Connects to the BBU or communicates with the upper-level monitoring board.

4

COM_OUT

RJ45 connector

Communicates with the lower-level monitoring board.

5

COM_485

RJ45 connector

Connects to the monitoring board in the battery cabinet, and receives monitoring signals from the battery cabinet.

Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


640



Table 4-47 Indicators on a PMU 11A or PMU 11B Silksc reen

Meanin g

Color

State

Description

RUN

Running indicator

Green

Steady on

The module is performing startup, selfcheck, loading, and activation.

Blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s)

The PMU 11A or PMU 11B is functional and communicating with the main control board in the BBU properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)

The PMU 11A or PMU 11B is functional but unable to communicate properly.

Steady off

The module is faulty or there is no DC power supply.

Steady on

Alarms are generated, and the module must be replaced.

Steady off



An alarm is generated and you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the module.

ALM

Alarm indicator

Red

DIP Switch There is a DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B. The DIP switch has eight bits, where the four least significant bits 1, 2, 3, and 4 define the monitoring address of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B, and the four most significant bits 5, 6, 7, and 8 are not defined but reserved for future use. ON is indicated by 1, and OFF is indicated by 0. The monitoring address of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B is set to 3 by default before delivery, as shown in the following figure. Figure 4-63 DIP switch on the left panel of the PMU 11A or PMU 11B

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


641



NOTE

At a site configured with two or more APM30Hs, if two PMU units are connected to one RS485 bus for the BBU, the monitoring address of the other PMU is set to 4. That is, the lower four bits of the DIP switch are set to 0010.

PMU 01B A power monitoring unit 01B (PMU 01B) manages the power system and batteries, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B), BTS3900(Ver.C), APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), and IMB03 cabinets.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMU 01B. Figure 4-64 Exterior of a PMU 01B

Functions A PMU 01B performs the following functions: NOTE

PMUs of different versions have different functions. If new functions are required, manually upgrade the PMU software version online.

l

Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port.

l


l

Reports alarms related to the door status, standby Boolean detection, ambient humidity and temperature, battery temperature, and standby analog values.

l

Monitors power distribution and reports dry contact alarms.

l

Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 port.

Ports The following figure shows the ports and indicators on a PMU 01B. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


642



Figure 4-65 Ports and indicators on a PMU 01B

(1) PMU status indicator (2) Power test ports (3) Circuit breaker for storage batteries (4) COM port (5) COM_485 port

(6) COM_OUT port (7) COM_IN port

(8) Backplane port

The following table describes the ports and circuit breaker on a PMU 01B. Table 4-48 Ports and circuit breaker on a PMU 01B Port or Circuit Breake r

Silkscreen

Remarks

Power test ports

-48 V/+24 V and 0V

Used for measuring the PMU 01B output voltage.

Circuit breaker for storage batterie s

BAT (ON and OFF)

Used for powering on and off storage batteries through the ON and OFF ports. l Insert a round stick into the ON port and hold down it for 5s to 10s. If you hear a click, the storage batteries are connected and the power-on operation is successful. l Insert a round stick into the OFF port and hold down it for 5s to 10s. If you hear a click, the storage batteries are disconnected and the power-off operation is successful.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

COM port

COM

Connects to the HPMI, and receives alarm signals from the HPMI.

COM_ 485 port

COM_485

Connects to the monitoring board in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, and receives monitoring signals from the battery cabinet.

COM_ OUT port

COM_OUT

Connects to the lower-level device, such as the EMUA or EMUB, and collects alarm signals from the lower-level device.


643



Port or Circuit Breake r

Silkscreen

Remarks

COM_I N port

COM_IN

Connects to the BBU or upper-level device, and reports alarm signals to the BBU.

Backpl ane port

-

Connects to the connector on the backplane in the power subrack.

Indicators The following table describes the indicators on a PMU 01B. Table 4-49 Indicators on a PMU 01B

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Silksc reen

Mean ing

Color

State

Description

RUN

Runni ng indica tor

Green


The module is functional and communicating with the main control board in the BBU properly. (This status does not necessarily mean that the main control board has been configured with the PMU.)


The module is functional but fails to communicate with the main control board. If the PMU 01B has not communicated with the main control board for one minute, this situation is regarded as a communication failure.

Steady on or off

The module is faulty (if it is not in the power-on check state).


644



Silksc reen

Mean ing

Color

State

Description

ALM

Alarm indica tor

Red

Steady on

The base station reports at least one of the following alarms: l Mains power supply failure alarm (including mains phase loss) l Mains power overvoltage or undervoltage alarm l Busbar overvoltage or undervoltage alarm l Charging overcurrent l Battery power-off alarm l Battery group circuit failure alarm l Ambient temperature alarm l Ambient humidity alarm l Power module alarm l Load power-off

Steady off


NOTE

Within 3s to 5s after the PMU 01B is powered on, the ALM and RUN indicators are on for about 3s.

DIP Switch There is a DIP switch on the right side of the PMU 01B panel. The DIP switch has eight bits, where the four bits 1, 2, 3, and 4 define the monitoring address of the PMU 01B, and the four bits 5, 6, 7, and 8 are not defined and reserved for future use. ON is indicated by 1, and OFF is indicated by 0. The monitoring address of the PMU 01B is set to 3 by default before delivery, as shown in the following figure. Figure 4-66 DIP switch on the right side of the PMU 01B panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


645



NOTE

At a site configured with two or more APM30Hs, if two PMU units are connected to one RS485 bus for the BBU, the monitoring address of the other PMU is set to 4. That is, the lower four bits of the DIP switch are set to 0010.

PMU (EPMU03) A power monitoring unit (PMU) (EPMU03) manages the power system, monitors power distribution, and reports alarms. It can be used in OMB and IMB03 cabinets.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMU (EPMU03). Figure 4-67 Exterior of a PMU (EPMU03)

Functions The PMU (EPMU03) performs the following functions: l

Communicates with the upper-level device through an RS485 port.

l


l

Reports alarms related to the door status, standby Boolean detection, ambient humidity and temperature, battery temperature, and standby analog values.

l

Monitors power distribution and reports dry contact alarms.

l

Communicates with the battery cabinet through an RS485 serial port.

Port Figure 4-68shows the ports on the PMU (EPMU03) panel and Table 4-50describes these ports.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


646



Figure 4-68 Ports on the PMU (EPMU03) panel

Table 4-50 Ports on the PMU (EPMU03) panel No.

Silkscreen

Connector

Remarks

1

RS232/RS485

RJ45 connector

Active communication port

2

RS232/RS485

RJ45 connector

Standby communication port

3

COM

-

Reserved

Indicator The following table describes the indicators on the PMU (EPMU03) panel. Table 4-51 Indicators on the PMU (EPMU03) panel Silkscre en

Meani ng

Color

State

Remarks

RUN

Runnin g indicato r

Green


The module is running properly.


The PMU (EPMU03) is functional but unable to communicate properly.

Alarm indicato r

Red

Steady on

An alarm is generated.

Steady off


ALM

DIP Switch The following figure shows the DIP switch on the PMU (EPMU03). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


647



Figure 4-69 DIP switch on the PMU (EPMU03)

The following table describes the settings of the DIP switch on the PMU (EPMU03). Table 4-52 Settings of the DIP switch DIP Bit

Function

Setting Rule

1 to 5

Define the communication address of the PMU.

(1) 1 to 5 correspond to bit 0 to bit 4, respectively. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0. For example, if the communication address of the PMU is 3, 1 and 2 are set to ON, and 3, 4, and 5 are set to OFF. (2) The default settings are as follows: 1 (bit 0) is set to ON. 2 (bit 1) is set to ON. 3 (bit 2) is set to OFF. 4 (bit 3) is set to OFF. 5 (bit 4) is set to OFF.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

6

Selects a baud rate for communicating with the main control unit.

When 6 is set to ON, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s. When 6 is set to OFF, the baud rate is 19200 bit/s.

7 and 8

Reserved and undefined.

7 and 8 are set to OFF.


648



PMIU A power monitoring interface unit (PMIU) transfers monitoring signals from an EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 to a CCUB. It can be used in APM30H (Ver.E) or APM30H (Ver.E_A2).

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PMIU. Figure 4-70 Exterior of a PMIU

(1) STATE indicator

(2) RJ45 port

Function A PMIU performs the following functions: l

Communicates with a CCUB, manages the power system, and charges and discharges batteries

l

Monitors power distribution analog signals, including DC voltage, battery current, battery circuit status, and AC SPD status.

l

Controls battery and load contactors.

l

Identifies whether pluggable modules are in position.

Port The following table describes the ports on a PMIU. Table 4-53 Port on a PMIU Silkscreen

Connector

Description

PMI

RJ45 connector

Connecting to the PMI port on the CCUB in a cabinet and reporting monitoring information about the power subrack to the CCUB.

Indicator The following table describes the indicator on a PMIU. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


649



Table 4-54 Indicator on a PMIU Silkscr een

Color

Status

Description

STATE

-

Steady off

There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

Green

Steady on

Communications are normal and no alarm is reported.

Red

Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the module must be replaced.

4.3.12 PSU This section describes PSUs and types of cabinets supported by the PSUs.

PSU (R4850G2) A power supply unit (PSU) (R4850G2) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. PSUs (R4850G2) can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinets, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets, BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinets, OMBs (Ver.C), BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinets, BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinets, APM30Hs (Ver.D), APM30Hs (Ver.E), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A1), APM30Hs (Ver.D_A2), APM30Hs (Ver.E_A1), APM30Hs (Ver.E_A2), APM30Hs (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinets, BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinets, or IMS06s.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (R4850G2). Figure 4-71 Exterior of a PSU (R4850G2)

Function A PSU (R4850G2) performs the following functions: l Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC and adjusts the output voltage. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

650



l

Provides protection against overcurrent, overvoltage, and overtemperature for its DC outputs.

l

Dissipates heat using its built-in fans.

Indicator The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (R4850G2). Figure 4-72 Indicators on a PSU (R4850G2)

The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (R4850G2). Table 4-55 Indicators on a PSU (R4850G2) Indicatora

Color

Status

Description

(1) Power indicator

Green

Steady on

The board is functional.


The PSU is loading software online.

Steady off

The mains supply or the module is faulty.

Steady off

Yes

Steady on

An alarm triggered by an external factorb is generated.


The communication between the module and the PMU is interrupted.

Steady off

Yes

Steady on

The module is faulty or is shut down in an emergency. Locate the fault and replace the module.

(2) Protection indicator

(3) Fault indicator

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Yellow

Red


651



NOTE

a: If the red indicator and green indicator are steady on and the yellow indicator is blinking, PSUs not securely installed in the slots. b: An alarm can be triggered by the following external factors: l

The rectifier generates a prewarning for power limiting due to overtemperature.

l

The rectifier generates an alarm for shutdown due to ambient overtemperature protection.

l

The rectifier generates an alarm due to AC input overvoltage or undervoltage protection.

l

The rectifier is hibernated.

PSU (PSU4850A) A power supply unit (PSU) (PSU4850A) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.C) and APM30H(Ver.C) cabinets.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (PSU4850A). Figure 4-73 Exterior of a PSU (PSU4850A)

Functions A PSU (PSU4850A) performs the following functions: l

Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and distributes the -48 V DC power.

l

Monitors and reports alarms related to module faults (such as output overvoltage, no output, and fan failure), alarms related to module protection (such as overtemperature protection and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and module not-in-position alarm.

Indicators The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


652



Figure 4-74 Indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A)

(1) Power indicator


(3) Fault indicator

The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A). Table 4-56 Indicators on a PSU (PSU4850A) Silkscreen

Color

State

Remarks

(1) Power indicator

Green

Steady on

Normal

Steady off

l Mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input) l No output from PSUs


Yellow

(3) Fault indicator

Red

Steady off

Normal

Steady on

Temperature prewarning

Steady off

l Normal l No output from PSUs due to mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


653



Silkscreen

Color

State

Remarks

Steady on

l No output from PSUs due to output overvoltage shutdown, fan fault, overtemperature shutdown, or remote shutdown l No output from PSUs due to other internal problems

PSU (EPW30-48A) A power supply unit (PSU) (EPW30-48A) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It can be used in BTS3900(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.B), and IMB03 cabinets.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (EPW30-48A). Figure 4-75 Exterior of a PSU (EPW30-48A)

Functions A PSU (EPW30-48A) performs the following functions: l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and distributes the -48 V DC power. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

654


l



Indicators The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A). Figure 4-76 Indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A)

(1) Power indicator


(3) Fault indicator

The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A). Table 4-57 Indicators on a PSU (EPW30-48A) Silkscreen

Color

State

Remarks

(1) Power indicator

Green

Steady on

Normal

Steady off

l Mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input) l No output from PSUs (EPW30-48A)


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Yellow

Steady off

Normal

Steady on

Temperature prewarning


655



Silkscreen

Color

State

Remarks

(3) Fault indicator

Red

Steady off

l Normal l No output from PSUs (EPW30-48A) due to mains power supply faults (such as no AC input and overvoltage or undervoltage of AC input)

Steady on

l No output from PSUs due to output overvoltage shutdown, fan fault, overtemperature shutdown, or remote shutdown l No output from PSUs (EPW30-48A) due to other internal problems

PSU (GERM4815T) A power supply unit (PSU) (GERM4815T) converts 110 V AC or 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power. It can be used in OMB and IMB03 cabinets.

Functions A PSU (GERM4815T) performs the following functions: l

Converts 220 V AC power to -48 V DC power, and provides the DC power to the customer equipment.

l


Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (GERM4815T).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


656



Figure 4-77 Exterior of a PSU (GERM4815T)

Indicator The following figure shows the indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel. Figure 4-78 Indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel

The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel. Table 4-58 Indicators on a PSU (GERM4815T) panel Silkscre en

Meani ng

Color

State

Remarks

RUN

Runnin g indicato r

Green

Steady on


Steady off

An error occurs during the running of the module.

Alarm indicato r

Yellow

Steady on

An output overcurrent alarm or overtemperature alarm is generated.

Blinking

The communication is interrupted.

Steady off


ALARM

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


657



Silkscre en

Meani ng

Color

State

Remarks

FAULT

Fault indicato r

Red

Steady on

A fan fault, output overvoltage, or external short circuit occurs.

Steady off


PSU (EPW25-24S48D) A power supply unit (PSU) (EPW25-24S48D) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC. It can be used in an IMB03 cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PSU (EPW25-24S48D). Figure 4-79 Exterior of a PSU (EPW25-24S48D)

(1) Power indicator


(3) Fault indicator

Functions A PSU (EPW25-24S48D) performs the following functions: l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Converts +24 V DC power to -48 V DC power and provides the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

658


l



Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a PSU (EPW25-24S48D). Table 4-59 Indicators on a PSU (EPW25-24S48D) Indicator

Color

State

Meaning

(1) Power indicator

Green

Steady on

Normal

Steady off

There is no power supply, or input fuses are damaged.

Steady off

Normal

Steady on

The DC input or output voltage exceeds the normal range, overtemperature occurs in the module, or the module is not installed properly.

Steady off

Normal

Blinking

The fan is faulty.


Yellow

(3) Fault indicator

Red

4.3.13 DCDU This section describes DCDUs and types of cabinets supported by the DCDUs.

DCDU-01 A direct current distribution unit-01 (DCDU-01) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-01 is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet, or RFC (Ver.B).

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-01.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


659



Figure 4-80 Exterior of a DCDU-01

Function A DCDU-01 has the following functions: l

Provides one -48 V DC input.

l

Provides ten -48 V DC outputs. The input of the SPARE2 port is 25 A and other nine inputs are 12 A.

l

Provides power only for the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly in a cabinet. NOTE

When a BTS3900A is configured with a DCDU-01, the SPARE2 port feeds power to the TMC11H and the maximum output power is 800 W.

Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


660



Figure 4-81 Terminals, ports. and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel

The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel. Table 4-60 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-01 panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Termina l/Port/ Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen

Description

Application Scenario

(1)

DC input terminals

NEG(-)

It is a negative power input terminal.

RTN(+)

It is a positive power input terminal.

l RFC (Ver.B) in a DC-powered BTS3900A (Ver.B) l RFC (Ver.B) in an AC-powered BTS3900A (Ver.B) l BTS3900 (Ver.B) DC cabinet l BTS3900 (Ver.B) AC cabinet l BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet

(2)

Circuit breakers

SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU5 to RFU0

They are ten power output circuit breakers which control power supply to the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly.

(3)

DC output ports

SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU5 to RFU0

They are ten power output ports which feed power to the BBU, RFUs, and fan assembly.


661



No.


Silkscreen

Description

(4)

DC SPD alarm port

SPD ALM

It is not available.


Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-01. Table 4-61 Technical specifications of a DCDU-01 Item

Specifications


A DCDU-01 is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)

Input voltage and current

Input voltage: -48 V DC Input current: 100 A

Surge protection specifications of ports

Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs) Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)

DCDU-03B A direct current distribution unit-03B (DCDU-03B) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-03B is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinet, RFC (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IMB03, or OMB.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-03B. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


662



Figure 4-82 Exterior of a DCDU-03B

Function A DCDU-03B provides nine -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.

Port The following figure shows the ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel. Figure 4-83 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel

The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


663



Table 4-62 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03B panel No.

Terminal/ Port/ Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen

Matched Connector and Cable

Remarks

(1)

DC input terminals

NEG(-)

It supports a two-hole OT terminal (M6).


RTN(+)

It supports the cable with a maximum cross-sectional area of 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2). The default cross-sectional area is 16 mm2(0.025 in. 2).


(2)

Circuit breakers

SW0 to SW9

-

The DC circuit breakers control power supplies to the BBU, RRUs, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.

(3)

DC output ports

LOAD0 to LOAD8

Nine one-hole OT terminals (M4). The maximum cross-sectional area of the cable supported is 6 mm2(0.009 in. 2).

l The specifications of output power cables depend on power-consuming devices to be connected to. For example, the cross-sectional area of a fan power cable is 2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2).

-


(4)

DC SPD alarm port

SPD ALM

l There are three rows of output wiring terminals: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND. The last three groups of terminals in the PGND row support twohole OT terminals (M4).

The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03B.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


664



Table 4-63 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03B Base Station Type


DC Output Port

PowerConsumi ng Device

Specifi cations of the Circuit Breake r

Circui t Break er

l DBS3900

l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a DBS3900

LOAD0 to LOAD5

RRU 0 to RRU 5

6x20 A

SW0 to SW5

l DBS3900 where the BBU is installed on a wall, 19-inch rack, IMB03, or OMB

LOAD6 to LOAD8

BBU and customer transmissi on equipment

3x12 A

SW6 to SW8

LOAD0 to LOAD5

RRU 0 to RRU 5

6x20 A

SW0 to SW5

LOAD6 to LOAD8

Reserved

3x12 A

SW6 to SW8

l BTS3900C

l OMB in a BTS3900C l BTS3900 A (Ver.B) l BTS3900 (Ver.B) l BTS3900L (Ver.B) l BTS3900 AL (Ver.A)

l Cabinet in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900 (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900L (Ver.B) configured with RFUs and RRUs l Cabinet in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) configured with RFUs and RRUs

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-03B.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


665



Table 4-64 Technical specifications of a DCDU-03B Item

Specifications


A DCDU-03B is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)





DCDU-03C A direct current distribution unit-03C (DCDU-03C) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-03C is 1 U high and can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.B).

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-03C. Figure 4-84 Exterior of a DCDU-03C

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


666



Function A DCDU-03C provides nine -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.

Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel. Figure 4-85 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel

The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel. Table 4-65 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-03C panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.


Silkscreen


Remarks

(1)

DC input terminals

NEG(-)

It supports a two-hole OT terminal (M6). If a DCDU-03C is installed in a power cabinet TMC11H, the cross-sectional area of its input power cable is 2.5



667


No.



Silkscreen


Remarks

RTN(+)

mm2(0.004 in. 2). If a DCDU-03C is installed in a transmission cabinet TMC11H, the cross-sectional area of its input power cable is 4 mm2(0.006 in. 2).


(2)

Circuit breakers

SW0 to SW9

-

The DC circuit breakers control power supplies to the BBU, RRUs, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.

(3)

DC output ports

LOAD0 to LOAD8

They support nine one-hole OT terminals (M4) and the cable with a maximum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2(0.009 in. 2).

l The specifications of output power cables depend on power-consuming devices to be connected to. For example, the cross-sectional area of a fan power cable is 2.5 mm2(0.004 in.2).

-


(4)

DC SPD alarm port

SPD ALM

l There are three rows of output wiring terminals: NEG(-), RTN(+), and PGND. The last three groups of terminals in the PGND row support twohole OT terminals (M4), as shown in the red lines in Figure 4-85.

The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03C.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


668



Table 4-66 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-03C Base Station Type


DC Output Port

PowerConsum ing Device

Specific ations of the Circuit Breaker

Circuit Breake r

l BTS3900 A (Ver.B)

l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a BTS3900A (Ver.B) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.B) in a DBS3900 configured with an APM30H (Ver.B)

LOAD0 to LOAD5

Transmis sion equipme nt

6x12 A

SW0 to SW5

LOAD6

BBU

1x12 A

SW6

LOAD7

Transmis sion equipme nt

1x6 A

SW7

LOAD8

Fan assembly

1x6 A

SW8

l DBS3900

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-03C. Table 4-67 Technical specifications of a DCDU-03C Item

Specifications


A DCDU-03C is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


669



DCDU-05 A direct current distribution unit-05 (DCDU-05) is installed in an EPS30-4815AF subrack and provides -48 V DC power for RRUs and transmission equipment. A DCDU-05 can be installed in an OMB or IMB03.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-05. Figure 4-86 Exterior of a DCDU-05

Function l

Supports -48 V and 20 A DC power inputs.

l

Provides two -48 V DC power outputs (one for RRUs and another for transmission equipment).

Port The following figure shows the terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel. Figure 4-87 Terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel

The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel. Table 4-68 Terminals and circuit breakers on a DCDU-05 panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


Connector

(1) Wiring terminal for the RRU power cable (12 A)

OT terminal


670




Connector

(2) Wiring terminal for the power cable (4 A) of the transmission equipment

OT terminal

(3) Circuit breaker for the RRU

-

(4) Circuit breaker for the transmission equipment

-

DCDU-11A A direct current distribution unit-11A (DCDU-11A) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-11A is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet, or RFC (Ver.C).

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-11A. Figure 4-88 Exterior of a DCDU-11A

(1) Equipotential ground points

(2) Ground points

Function A DCDU-11A has the following functions: l

Provides one -48 V DC input of 160 A or two -48 V DC inputs of 80 A.

l

Provides ten -48 V DC outputs with a maximum of 25 A for each output.

l

Provides power to the RFUs and fan assembly in the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


671



Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel. Figure 4-89 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel

Table 4-69 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11A panel No.

Port/ Terminal/ Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen


Description

(1)

DC input terminals

NEG(-)

Two onehole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 25 mm2(0.039 in.2).


-

The DC output circuit breakers control power supplies to RFUs and fan assemblies by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.

RTN(+)

(2)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Circuit breakers

SW0 to SW9



672



No.

Port/ Terminal/ Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen


Description

(3)

DC output ports

LOAD0 to LOAD9

Figure 4-90shows the exterior of a toolless female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).

For the specifications of DC outputs, see Table 4-70.

Figure 4-90 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)

The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11A.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


673



Table 4-70 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11A Base Station Type


DC Output Port

PowerConsumin g Device

Specif icatio ns of the Circui t Break er

Circuit Breake r

BTS3900A (Ver.C)

l RFC (Ver.C) in a DC BTS3900A (Ver.C) l RFC (Ver.C) in an AC BTS3900A (Ver.C)

LOAD0 to LOAD5

RFU 0 to RFU 5

10x25 A

SW0 to SW5

LOAD6

FAN 01B

SW6

LOAD7 to LOAD9

Reserved

SW7 to SW9

l BTS3900 (Ver.C) DC cabinet l BTS3900 (Ver.C) AC cabinet l BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinet

LOAD0 to LOAD5

RFU 0 to RFU 5

LOAD6

FAN 03B

SW6

LOAD7 and LOAD8

BBU

SW7 and SW8

LOAD9

Reserved

SW9

l BTS3900 (Ver.C) l BTS3900L (Ver.C)

10x25 A

SW0 to SW5

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-11A. Table 4-71 Technical specifications of a DCDU-11A Item

Specifications


A DCDU-11A is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 8.66 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 220 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) (with mounting ears)



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


674



Item

Specifications



DCDU-11B A direct current distribution unit-11B (DCDU-11B) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-11B is 1 U high and can be installed in an RFC (Ver.C), TMC11H (Ver.C), BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IMB03, or OMB.

Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear views of a DCDU-11B. Figure 4-91 Front and rear views of a DCDU-11B


(2) Ground points

NOTE

A DCDU-11B uses ground points and equipotential ground points in the following scenarios: l Scenario 1: A DCDU-11B is installed on an open rack. In this scenario, an equipotential cable connects the equipotential ground point near the mounting ear on the DCDU-11B to the ground bar on the open rack. l Scenario 2: A DCDU-11B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. In this scenario, the ground points at the rear of the DCDU-11B are connected to the ground bar in the equipment room.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


675



Function A DCDU-11B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.

Port The following figure shows the ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel. Figure 4-92 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel

The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel. Table 4-72 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11B panel N o.

Port/ Termina l/Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen


Description

(1)

DC input terminals

NEG(-)

Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the cable supported is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) for one input or 25 mm2(0.039 in.2) for two inputs.


RTN(+)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)



676



N o.

Port/ Termina l/Circuit Breaker

Silkscreen


Description

(2)

Circuit breakers

SW0 to SW9

-

DC output circuit breakers control power supplies to BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.

(3)

DC output ports

LOAD0 to LOAD9

l Figure 4-93shows the exterior of a toolless female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 3.3 mm2(0.005 in.2) to 10 mm2(0.016 in.2).


l Figure 4-94shows the exterior of a toolless female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD6 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


677



Figure 4-93 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (matching the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports)

Figure 4-94 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type) (matching the LOAD6 to LOAD9 ports)

The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11B. Table 4-73 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11B Base Station Type


DC Output Port



Circuit Breake r

l DBS3900

l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a DBS3900 l Wall, 19-inch rack, or IMB03 in a DBS3900 l Cabinet in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs l OMB in a BTS3900C

LOAD0 to LOAD5

RRU 0 to RRU 5

10x25 A

SW0 to SW5

LOAD6 and LOAD7

Transmissi on equipment or BBU

SW6 and SW7

LOAD8

Transmissi on equipment, EMUA, or EMUB

SW8

LOAD9

FAN 02B

SW9

l BTS3900 A (Ver.C) l BTS3900 C

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


678



Base Station Type


DC Output Port



Circuit Breake r

l BTS3900 (Ver.C)

l Cabinet in a BTS3900 (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs

LOAD0 to LOAD5

RRU 0 to RRU 5

10x25 A

SW0 to SW5

l Cabinet in a BTS3900L (Ver.C) configured with RFUs and RRUs

LOAD6 to LOAD9

Reserved

l BTS3900 L (Ver.C) l BTS3900 AL (Ver.A)

SW6 to SW9

l Cabinet in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) configured with RFUs and RRUs

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-11B. Table 4-74 Technical specifications of a DCDU-11B Item

Specifications







Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


679



DCDU-11C A direct current distribution unit-11C (DCDU-11C) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-11C is 1 U high and can be installed in a TMC11H (Ver.C).

Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear views of a DCDU-11C. Figure 4-95 Front and rear views of a DCDU-11C


(2) Ground points

NOTE

The ground points and equipotential ground points on a DCDU-11C are not used.

Function A DCDU-11C provides ten -48 V DC outputs using different circuit breaker configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed and separated base stations.

Port The following figure shows the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


680



Figure 4-96 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel

The following table describes the terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel. Table 4-75 Terminals, ports, and circuit breakers on a DCDU-11C panel N o.


Silkscreen


Description

(1)

DC input terminals

NEG(-)



-

DC output circuit breakers control power supplies to BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment by controlling the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, respectively.

RTN(+)

(2)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Circuit breakers

SW0 to SW9



681



N o.


Silkscreen


Description

(3)

DC output ports

LOAD0 to LOAD9

Figure 4-97shows the exterior of a tool-less female connector (pressfit type), which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.002 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).


Figure 4-97 Tool-less female connector (pressfit type)

The following table describes the power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11C. Table 4-76 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-11C Base Station Type


DC Output Port



Circuit Breake r

l BTS3900 A (Ver.C)

l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a BTS3900A (Ver.C) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.C) in a DBS3900 configured

LOAD0 and LOAD1

Transmis sion equipmen t

2x6 A

SW0 and SW1

LOAD2 and LOAD3


2x12 A

SW2 and SW3

l DBS3900

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


682


Base Station Type



DC Output Port



Circuit Breake r

with an APM30H (Ver.C)

LOAD4 and LOAD5


2x25 A

SW4 and SW5

LOAD6 and LOAD7

Transmis sion equipmen t or BBU

2x25 A

SW6 and SW7

LOAD8

Transmis sion equipmen t, EMUA, or EMUB

1x25 A

SW8

LOAD9

FAN 02B

1x25 A

SW9


Specifications






Surge on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 2 kV (1.2/50 μs) l Common mode: 4 kV (1.2/50 μs)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


683



Item

Specifications Surge current on the -48 V DC power port l Differential mode: 10 kA (8/20 μs) l Common mode: 20 kA (8/20 μs)

DCDU-12A A direct current distribution unit-12A (DCDU-12A) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-12A is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) cabinet, RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.E), RFC (Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, or BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear views of a DCDU-12A. Figure 4-98 Front and rear views of a DCDU-12A


(2) Ground points

Function A DCDU-12A provides ten -48 V DC outputs using the same fuse configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of different indoor and outdoor macro base stations.

Port The following figure shows the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


684



Figure 4-99 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A

The following table describes the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A. Table 4-78 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12A N o.

Port or Termina l

Silkscreen


Description

(1)

DC power input terminals

NEG(-)



Fuse block

LOAD0 to LOAD9

-

It controls the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, and therefore controls the power supply to modules such as RFUs and fan assemblies.

(2)

RTN(+)


The indicator on the fuse block indicates the status of the fuse. l When the indicator is steady on, the fuse is faulty and must be replaced. l When the indicator is steady off, the fuse is working properly.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


685



N o.

Port or Termina l

Silkscreen


Description

(3)

DC power output ports

LOAD0 to LOAD9

EPC4 connectors are used on the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. Figure 4-100shows the exterior of an EPC4 connector. The cross-sectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).


(4)

Spare fuse box

-

-

It contains three 30 A spare fuses.

NOTE

A fuse block and a DC power output port are jointly called a fuse terminal block.

Figure 4-100 Exterior of an EPC4 connector

The following table describes the power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12A. Table 4-79 Power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12A

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Base Station


DC Power Output Port

PowerConsuming Device

Fuse Specificat ions

l BTS3900 A (Ver.D) l BTS3900 A (Ver.E) l BTS3012 AE (Ver.D_Z)

l RFC (Ver.D) in a DC BTS3900A (Ver.D) l RFC (Ver.D) in an AC BTS3900A (Ver.D)

LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports

RFU 0 to RFU 5

10x30 A

LOAD6 port

FAN 01C


686


Base Station

l BTS3900 (Ver.D) l BTS3900L (Ver.D) l BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)





l RFC (Ver.E) in a DC BTS3900A (Ver.E) l RFC (Ver.E) in an AC BTS3900A (Ver.E) l BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet in a DC scenario l BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet in an AC scenario


Reserved

l BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in a DC scenario l BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet in an AC scenario l BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet l BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet


RFU 0 to RFU 5

LOAD6 port

FAN 03C


BBU

LOAD9 port

Reserved

Fuse Specificat ions

10x30 A

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12A. Table 4-80 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12A Item

Specifications


A DCDU-12A is 1 U high and can be installed in a 19-inch cabinet or rack. Its dimensions are as follows: l 42 mm x 442 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 17.40 in. x 2.56 in.) (without mounting ears) l 42 mm x 482.6 mm x 65 mm (1.65 in. x 19 in. x 2.56 in.) (with mounting ears)



Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


687



Item

Specifications

Surge protection specifications of the ports


DCDU-12B A direct current distribution unit-12B (DCDU-12B) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-12B is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_A) cabinet, BTS3900 (Ver.D_B) cabinet, BTS3900L (Ver.D_B) cabinet, RFC (Ver.D), RFC (Ver.E), RFC (Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_B), BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.E), BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, IMB03, or IMS06.

Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear of a DCDU-12B. Figure 4-101 Front and rear of a DCDU-12B


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


(2) Ground points

688



NOTE

A DCDU-12B uses ground points and equipotential ground points in the following scenarios: l Scenario 1: A DCDU-12B is installed on an open rack. In this scenario, an equipotential cable connects the equipotential ground point near the mounting ear on the DCDU-12B to the ground bar on the open rack. l Scenario 2: A DCDU-12B is installed on a wall as a standalone power distribution device. In this scenario, the ground points at the rear of the DCDU-12B are connected to the ground bar in the equipment room.

Function The DCDU-12B provides ten -48 V DC outputs using the same fuse configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of indoor and outdoor macro base stations, micro base stations, and distributed base stations.

Port The following figure shows the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B. Figure 4-102 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B

The following table describes the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B. Table 4-81 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12B

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

N o.

Port or Termina l

Silkscreen


Description

(1)


NEG(-)

Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). If one group of power cables are used, the maximum crosssectional area of each power cable is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).



689


N o.

(2)


Port or Termina l

Fuse block

Silkscreen


Description

RTN(+)

If two groups of power cables are used, the maximum cross-sectional area of each power cable is 25 mm2(0.039 in. 2).


LOAD0 to LOAD9

-

It controls the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, and therefore controls the power supply to modules such as BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment. The indicator on the fuse block indicates the status of the fuse. l When the indicator is steady on, the fuse is faulty and must be replaced. l When the indicator is steady off, the fuse is working properly.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


690



N o.

Port or Termina l

Silkscreen


Description

(3)


LOAD0 to LOAD9

l Figure 4-103 shows the exterior of an EPC5 connector which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 3.3 mm2(0.005 in.2) to 10 mm2(0.016 in.2).


l Figure 4-104 shows the exterior of an EPC4 connector which applies to any of the LOAD6 to LOAD9 ports. The crosssectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2). NOTE EPC4 and EPC5 connectors must be connected to cables onsite.

(4)

Spare fuse box

-

-


NOTE


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


691





The following table describes the power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12B. Table 4-82 Power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12B Base Station




Fuse Specifi cations

DBS3900

l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) or TMC11H (Ver.E) in a DBS3900


RRU

10x30 A


Transmission equipment, BBU, or RRUa

LOAD8 port

Transmission equipment or RRUa

LOAD9 port

FAN 02D/FAN 02E

Cabinet in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) configured with RFUs and RRUs


RRU 0 to RRU 8

LOAD9 port

Reserved

l RFC (Ver.D) in a BTS3900A (Ver.D)


RRU 0 to RRU 8

l Wall, 19-inch rack, or IMB03 in a DBS3900

BTS3900AL (Ver.A)

l BTS3900A (Ver.D)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


10x30 A

10x30 A

692



Base Station


l BTS3900A (Ver.E) l BTS3900 (Ver.D) l BTS3900L (Ver.D) l BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) l BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z)

l

l

l

l

l

configured with RFUs and RRUs RFC (Ver.E) in a BTS3900A (Ver.E) configured with RFUs and RRUs Cabinet in a BTS3900 (Ver.D) configured with RFUs and RRUs Cabinet in a BTS3900L (Ver.D) configured with RFUs and RRUs Cabinet in a BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) configured with RFUs and RRUs Cabinet in a BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) configured with RFUs and RRUs



LOAD9 port

Reserved

Fuse Specifi cations

a: When six or fewer RRUs are configured, connect the RRUs preferentially to ports LOAD0 to LOAD5 for power input. Ports LOAD6 to LOAD8 only supply power to the seventh to ninth RRUs when more than six RRUs are configured.

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DCDU-12B. Table 4-83 Technical specifications of a DCDU-12B Item

Specifications





Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


693



Item

Specifications



DCDU-12C A direct current distribution unit-12C (DCDU-12C) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-12C is 1 U high and can be installed in a BTS3012 (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet, TMC11H (Ver.D), TMC11H (Ver.D_A1), TMC11H (Ver.D_A2), TMC11H (Ver.D_B), IBC10, or BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the front and rear of a DCDU-12C. Figure 4-105 Front and rear of a DCDU-12C


(2) Ground points

NOTE

The ground points and equipotential ground points on a DCDU-12C are not used.

Function A DCDU-12C provides ten -48 V DC outputs using the same fuse configurations to meet the power distribution requirements of distributed base stations and outdoor macro base stations. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


694



Port or Terminal The following table describes the ports and terminals on a DCDU-12C. Figure 4-106 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12C

The following table describes the terminals and ports on a DCDU-12C. Table 4-84 Ports and terminals on a DCDU-12C N o.

Port or Termina l

Silkscreen


Description

(1)


NEG(-)

Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The cross-sectional area of the cable is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2) by default.


Fuse block

LOAD0 to LOAD9

-

It controls the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports, and therefore controls the power supply to modules such as BBUs, fan assemblies, and transmission equipment.

(2)

RTN(+)


The indicator on the fuse block indicates the status of the fuse. l When the indicator is steady on, the fuse is faulty and must be replaced. l When the indicator is steady off, the fuse is working properly. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


695



N o.

Port or Termina l

Silkscreen


Description

(3)


LOAD0 to LOAD9

Figure 4-107 shows the exterior of an EPC4 connector which applies to any of the LOAD0 to LOAD9 ports. The cross-sectional area of the cable supported ranges from 1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) to 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).


(4)

Spare fuse box

-

-


NOTE



The following table describes the power distribution of the DC power output ports on a DCDU-12C. Table 4-85 Power distribution of the DC output ports on a DCDU-12C Base Station




Fuse Specif ication s

l BTS3900 A (Ver.D)

l Power cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) in a BTS3900A (Ver.D) l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) in a BTS3900A (Ver.D)

LOAD0 to LOAD5 and LOAD8 ports


10x30 A


Transmission equipment or BBU

l DBS3900

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


696


Base Station

BTS3900AL (Ver.A)





l Transmission cabinet TMC11H (Ver.D) in a DBS3900 configured with an APM30H (Ver.D)

LOAD9 port

FAN 02D

Equipment compartment of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

LOAD0 port

CCU

LOAD1 port

Reserved



LOAD4

Battery cabinet


BBU

LOAD9 port

HEX


RFU

LOAD9 port

FAU




Transmission equipment or BBU

LOAD8 port

Transmission equipment or EMUA

LOAD9 port

Reserved

LOAD0 and LOAD1 ports on 0# DCDU-12C

USU

LOAD2 and LOAD3 ports on 0# DCDU-12C

FAU03D

LOAD0 to LOAD4 ports on 1# DCDU-12C

BBU

RF compartment of a BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z)

DBS3900

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

BTS3012AE (Ver.D_Z) cabinet in a DC scenario

IBC10 in a DC DBS3900



10x30 A

10x30 A

10x30 A

10x30 A

697


Base Station






LOAD0 to LOAD4 ports on 2# DCDU-12C


Specifications







DCDU-13A A direct current distribution unit-13A (DCDU-13A) provides -48 V DC power for other components in a cabinet. A DCDU-13A is 1 U high and can be installed in an RFC (Ver.D_A).

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DCDU-13A. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


698



Figure 4-108 Exterior of a DCDU-13A

Function A DCDU-13A has the following functions: l

Supports -48 V and 80 A DC power inputs.

l

Provides four -48 V DC power outputs for other boards or modules in the cabinet.

l

Provides surge protection of 10 kA in differential mode and 20 kA in common mode and dry contacts for reporting the surge protection failure alarm.

Port The following figure shows the terminals and ports on a DCDU-13A panel. Figure 4-109 Terminals and ports on a DCDU-13A panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Terminal/Port

Silkscree n


Description

1

Dry contact output port

DC_SPD

-

Dry contact alarm output port


699



No.

Terminal/Port

Silkscree n


Description

2

DC output ports

LOAD0 to LOAD3

EPC4 connector (as shown in the following figure)

l The LOAD0 to LOAD3 ports on the left DCDU-13A in the cabinet provide power for the CMUEA and RFU 0 to RFU 2. l The LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the right DCDU-13A in the cabinet provide power for RFU 3 to RFU 5. The LOAD3 port is reserved.

3

DC input terminals

NEG(-)

RTN(+)

Two one-hole OT terminals (M6). The maximum crosssectional area of the single cable is 35 mm2(0.054 in.2) and each maximum cross-sectional area of the two pairs of cables is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2). The default crosssectional area is 25 mm2(0.039 in.2).

It is a negative power input terminal. It is a positive power input terminal.

Figure 4-110 EPC4 connector

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


700



4.3.14 PDU This section describes PDUs and types of cabinets supported by the PDUs.

PDU05A-01 The power distribution unit 05A-01 (PDU05A-01) distributes AC power into the PSUs, AC service outlet unit (SOU), and heater. The PDU05A-01 must be installed in a BTS3900AL AC cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an PDU05A-01, and the following table describes an PDU05A-01. Figure 4-111 Exterior of an PDU05A-01

Table 4-87 Exterior description of an PDU05A-01

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Compon ent

Silkscreen

Description

(1)

AC SOU

SERVICE OUTLET 10A MAX

The AC SOU is an optional AC device. It complies with the European standard.

(2)

Decoupli ng coil

-

-

(3)

HAU circuit breaker

HEATER

The HAU circuit breaker controls the power supply to the HAU.


701



No.

Compon ent

Silkscreen

Description

(4)

PSU circuit breaker

PSU1/5

PSU circuit breakers control the power supply to the PSUs.

PSU3/4/7

The PSU circuit breakers are bipolar circuit breakers. The rated current of PSU1/5 and PSU2/6 is 40 A, and the rated current of the PSU3/4/7 is 63 A.

(5)

AC surge protector

-

The AC surge protector reports AC input surge protection alarms.

(6)

AC input terminal

L1

AC input terminals are used for 110 V AC duallive-wire, 220 V AC single-phase, and 220 V AC three-phase power inputs.

PSU2/6

L2 L3 N PE

Functions The PDU05A-01 performs the following functions: l

Provides five AC outputs. Three outputs are supplied to PSUs, one output is supplied to the heater assembly unit (HAU) after transferred by the AC junction box, and one output is supplied to the SOU.

l

Provides cord end terminals, through which the 110 V AC dual-live-wire, 220 V AC single-phase, and 220 V AC three-phase power can be supplied to the PDU05A-01.

l

Provides an SOU which is optional. The SOU transfers AC power to customer equipment.

Specifications of an SOU The following table lists the specifications of an SOU. Table 4-88 Specifications of an SOU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Parameter

Counter

Rated current

5A

Rated voltage



-40oC to +55oC (-40oF to 131oF)

Protection class

IP20


702



PDU03D-01 The power distribution unit 03D-01 (PDU03D-01) provides -48 V DC power output ports for power distribution to a BTS3900AL DC cabinet. It is used in a BTS3900AL DC cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the PDU03D-01, and the following table describes the PDU03D-01. Figure 4-112 PDU03D-01

Table 4-89 PDU03D-01 No.

Compon ent

Silkscreen

(1)

DC input terminals

INPUT0

INPUT1

INPUT2

(2)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

DC output terminals

OUTPUT0

Description RTN(+)_0


NEG(-)_0


RTN(+)_1


NEG(-)_1


RTN(+)_2


NEG(-)_2


RTN(+)_0


NEG(-)_0



703



No.

Compon ent

Silkscreen OUTPUT1

OUTPUT2

Description RTN(+)_1


NEG(-)_1


RTN(+)_2


NEG(-)_2


Function The PDU03D-01 performs the following functions: l

Has three groups of transfer terminals, which can provide single-output power supply and dual-output power supply simultaneously.

l

Supports the maximum external DC power of one 100 A input (INPUT2) and two 200 A inputs (INPUT0 and INPUT1).

PDU10D-01 The power distributed unit-01 (PDU10D-01) distributes -48 V DC power for all components in the OMB (Ver.C). It can be used in an OMB(Ver.C) cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PDU10D-01. Figure 4-113 Exterior of a PDU10D-01

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


704



Functions The PDU10D-01 performs the following functions: l

Supports a maximum of two -48 V DC inputs and a maximum of 160 A input current.

l

Provides ten DC outputs, with six for the RRUs, one for the BBU, one for the HEUB, and two reserved.

Ports Figure 4-114shows the ports and terminals on the PDU10D-01 panel and Table 4-90describes these ports and terminals. Figure 4-114 Ports and terminals on the PDU10D-01 panel

Table 4-90 Ports and terminals on the PDU10D-01 panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Port or Terminal

Silkscreen

Connector and Cable

Remarks

1

DC input terminal

NEG(-)

It supports a onehole OT terminal (M6). When one group of input power cables is used, the maximum cross-sectional area of each cable is 25 mm2(0.039 in.2). When two groups



705


No .


Port or Terminal

Silkscreen

Connector and Cable

Remarks

RTN(+)

of input power cables are used, the maximum crosssectional area of each cable is 16 mm2(0.025 in.2).


2

AC input terminals

L, N, and PE

They support onehole OT terminals (M4). Each cable has a maximum cross-sectional area of 4 mm2(0.006 2).

The maximum current for each power input is 30 A.

3

DC output terminals

LOAD0 to LOAD5

Figure 4-115shows the EPC5 connectors for ports LOAD0 to LOAD5. The maximum cross-sectional area of the cable is 10 mm2(0.016 in.2).

The output current is 30 A.

4

DC output terminals

LOAD6 to LOAD9

Figure 4-116shows an EPC4 connector, which applies to any one among ports LOAD6 to LOAD9. The maximum crosssectional area of the cable is 4 mm2(0.006 in.2).

The output current is 30 A.

5

Spare fuse box

-

-

There are three fuses in the spare fuse box: l Two 5 A spare fuses, each used for transferring power less than 150 W. l One 30 A spare fuse, used for the 30 A output power ports on the PDU10D-01.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


706





PDU01D-01 A power distribution unit 01D-01 (PDU01D-01) can be used in an EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 and be connected to an outdoor distribution module (ODM) to provide power for RRUs.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PDU01D-01. Figure 4-117 Exterior of a PDU01D-01

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


707



Function A PDU01D-01 performs the following functions: l

Provides one -48 V DC power output.

l

Provides power for a maximum of six RRUs if being used together with an ODM.

Port The following figure shows the port on a PDU01D-01. The following table describes the port on a PDU01D-01. Figure 4-118 Port on a PDU01D-01

Table 4-91 Port on a PDU01D-01 DC Power Output Port


Protector


Connector

LOAD port

ODM

Circuit breaker

1x100 A

OT terminal (M6)

PDU03D-02 A power distribution unit 03D-02 (PDU03D-02) can be used in an EPU05A-06, EPU05A-07, EPU05A-08, or EPU05A-09 to provide power for RRUs.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a PDU03D-02.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


708



Figure 4-119 Exterior of a PDU03D-02

Function A PDU03D-02 performs the following functions: l

Provides three -48 V DC power outputs.

l

Provides power for a maximum of three RRUs.

Port The following figure shows the ports on a PDU03D-02. The following table describes the ports on a PDU03D-02. Figure 4-120 Ports on a PDU03D-02

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


709



Table 4-92 Ports on a PDU03D-02 DC Power Output Port


Protector


Connector

LOAD0, LOAD1, and LOAD2 ports

RRUs

Fuse

3x30 A

EPC5 connector

4.3.15 Power Distribution Box in a Battery Cabinet This section describes the exteriors of and ports on power distribution boxes in battery cabinets.

Power Distribution Box in an IBBS200D(Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) The power distribution box of an IBBS200D(Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) is located on the upper inner right wall of the cabinet, which transfers and distributes power to the TEC or fan and storage batteries.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Figure 4-121 Exterior of a power distribution box

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


710



Ports The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-93 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box No.

Silkscreen

(1)

BAT

Description RTN(+) NEG(-)

(2)

FAN/TEC

RTN(+) NEG(-)

(3)

BAT_SW0

ON OFF

(4)

BAT_SW1

ON OFF

(5)

(6)

FAN/ TEC_SW2

ON

FAN/TEC

RTN(+)

OFF

NEG(-) (7)

BAT

RTN(+) NEG(-)

Upper power terminals for storage batteries, which connect to input power cables for the storage batteries Upper power terminals for the fan or TEC, which connect to input power cables for the fan or TEC Circuit breaker for upper storage battery group, which controls power supply to the upper storage battery group Circuit breaker for lower storage battery group, which controls power supply to the lower storage battery group Circuit breaker for the fan or TEC, which controls power supply to the fan in a IBBS200D or the TEC in a IBBS200T. Lower power terminals for the fan or TEC, which connect to input power cables for the fan or TEC Lower power terminals for storage batteries, which connect to input power cables for the storage batteries

NOTE

Power can be supplied to the storage batteries, fan, or TEC from the upper or lower power terminals on a power distribution box according to cabinet configurations. Power is supplied from the lower power terminals on a power distribution box by default.

Cables The following figure shows the cables for a power distribution box.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


711



Figure 4-122 Cables for a power distribution box

(1) RTN(+) power cable for the upper storage battery group

(2) Input power cable for the storage batteries. It connects to the upper terminals on a power distribution box.

(3) Input power cable for the fan or TEC. It connects to the upper terminals on a power distribution box.

(4) Input power cable for the fan or TEC. It connects to the lower terminals on a power distribution box.

(5) Input power cable for the storage batteries. It connects to the lower terminals on a power distribution box.

(6) Power transfer cable for the fan or TEC

(7) NEG(-) power cable for the lower storage battery group

(8) NEG(-) power cable for the upper storage battery group

(9) RTN(+) power cable for the lower storage battery group

-

Power Distribution Box in an IBBS200D(Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C) The power distribution box of an IBBS200D(Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C) is located on the upper right inner wall of the cabinet, which controls the two storage battery groups separately and controls DC power supply to the fan or TEC.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a power distribution box. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


712



Figure 4-123 Exterior of a power distribution box

Ports The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-94 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Silkscreen

Terminal or Circuit Breaker

Description

(1)

BAT

Power input terminals for storage batteries

A one-hole OT terminal (M8) supports the cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).

(2)

FAN/TEC

FAN/TEC power input terminal

It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M4).

(3)

BAT_SW0

Circuit breaker for upper storage batteries

It controls power supply to the upper storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 160 A current.

(4)

BAT_SW1

Circuit breaker for lower storage batteries

It controls power supply to the lower storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 160 A current.

(5)

FAN/ TEC_SW

Circuit breaker for the FAN/TEC power port

The circuit breaker requires 15 A current.

(6)

FAN/TEC


It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M4).


713



No.

Silkscreen

Terminal or Circuit Breaker

Description

(7)

BAT


A one-hole OT terminal (M8) supports the cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).

NOTE

A power distribution box provides two groups of power input ports for the storage batteries labeled 1 and 7 and two groups of FAN/TEC power ports labeled 2 and 6. Ports to be connected depend on configuration scenarios. 1. When an APM30H is stacked with an IBBS200D or IBBS200T, input power cables for storage batteries and fan or TEC are connected to the upper part of the storage batteries. 2. When an APM30H and an IBBS200D or IBBS200T are installed side by side, input power cables for storage batteries and fan or TEC are connected to the lower part of the storage batteries.

Cables The following figure shows the cables for a power distribution box. Figure 4-124 Cables for a power distribution box

(1) RTN(+) cable for upper storage batteries

(2) Power transfer cable for the TEC or (3) -48 V cable for lower fan storage batteries

(4) -48 V cable for upper storage batteries

(5) RTN(+) cable for lower storage batteries

-

Power Distribution Box in an IBBS200D(Ver.D) or IBBS200T(Ver.D) The power distribution box of an IBBS200D(Ver.D) or IBBS200T(Ver.D) is located on the upper right inner wall of the cabinet, which controls the two storage battery groups separately and controls DC power supply to the fan or TEC. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


714




Port The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-95 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Silkscreen

Description

Note

(1)

BAT


They support one-hole OT terminals (M8) installed on cables with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2).

(2)

BAT_SW0

Circuit breaker for upper storage batteries

It controls power supply to the upper storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 250 A current.

(3)

FAN/ TEC_OUTPU T

Power output port for a fan or TEC

It supports EPC4 connectors and requires 30 A current.

(4)

BAT_SW1

Circuit breaker for lower storage batteries

It controls power supply to the lower storage batteries in the cabinet. The circuit breaker requires 250 A current.

(5)

BAT


They support one-hole OT terminals (M8) installed on cables with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2 (0.054 in.2).

(6)

FAN/ TEC_INPUT


It supports EPC4 connectors and requires 30 A current.


715



Wire The following figure shows the input and output power cables for a power distribution box. Figure 4-126 Cables for a power distribution box

(1) RTN(+) wire for upper storage batteries

(2) Power transfer cable for the TEC or fan

(3) NEG(-) wire for lower storage batteries

(4) NEG(-) wire for upper storage batteries

(5) RTN(+) cable for lower storage batteries

-

Power Distribution Boxes in an IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E) Two power distribution boxes are installed on the inner upper right wall and top of an IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E), controlling power supply of two storage battery packs and DC power supply to the TEC or fan.


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


716



Port The following table describes the terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-96 Terminals and circuit breakers on a power distribution box No.

Silkscreen

Meaning

Description

(1)

BAT ON/OFF

Storage battery circuit breakers

Controlling power supply of the storage batteries in a cabinet. A circuit breaker requires 250 A current.

(2)

FAN/TEC OUTPUT

Power output port for a fan or TEC

Connecting to an EPC4 connector and requiring fuses of 30 A current

(3)

FAN/TEC INPUT


Connecting to an EPC4 connector and requiring fuses of 30 A current

(4)

BAT


One-hole OT terminal (M8) supporting the cable with a cross-sectional area of 50 mm2(0.078 in.2)

(5)

BAT


One-hole OT terminal (M8) supporting the cable with a cross-sectional area of 50 mm2(0.078 in.2)

Cable The following figure shows the input and output power cables for a power distribution box.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


717



Figure 4-128 Cables for a power distribution box

(1) Power transfer cable for a power distribution box

(2) RTN(+) wire for upper storage batteries

(4) NEG(-) wire for lower storage batteries (5) NEG(-) wire for upper storage batteries

(3) RTN(+) cable for lower storage batteries -

Power Distribution Box in an IBBS700D or IBBS700T The power distribution box of an IBBS700D or IBBS700T is in the middle of the cabinet. It controls the DC output, and the DC power supply to the CCU, FAN or TEC.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the power distribution box.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


718



Figure 4-129 Exterior of the power distribution box

Port The following table describes the ports on the power distribution box. Table 4-97 Ports on the power distribution box

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Silkscreen

Meaning

Description

(1)

BAT(-)

Negative input pole for storage batteries

It supports a one-hole OT terminal (M8) installed on a cable with a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2(0.054 in.2).

(2)

NEG(-)

Negative input pole for the power distribution box


(3)

-

Fuse box

It provides overcurrent protection for the cabinet.

(4)

DC INPUT

Power input port for the temperature control system

It supports an EPC4 connector and is used to supply power for the temperature control system in the cabinet.

(5)

DC OUTPUT

-

It supports an EPC4 connector and is reserved.

(6)

RTN(+)

Positive input pole for the power distribution box


(7)

BAT(+)

Positive input pole for storage batteries



719



No.

Silkscreen

Meaning

Description

(8)

CCU

Power input port for the CCU

EPC4 connector

(9)

-

Switch

It controls the power supply to the CCU and fan or TEC.

(10)

FAN/TEC

Power input port for a fan or TEC

EPC4 connector

Wire The following figure shows the input and output power cables for a power distribution box. Figure 4-130 Cables for a power distribution box

(1) NEG(-) cable for storage batteries in the first upper layer

(2) NEG(-) cable for storage batteriesin the second upper layer

(3) NEG(-) cable for (4) NEG(-) cable for storage batteriesin the first storage batteriesin the lower layer second lower layer

(5) RTN(+) cable for storage batteries in the second lower layer

(6) RTN(+) cable for (7) RTN(+) cable for storage batteriesin the first storage batteriesin the lower layer second upper layer

(8) RTN(+) cable for storage batteriesin the first upper layer

Power Distribution Box in an IBBS20D The power distribution box in an IBBS20D is located in the lower right part of the cabinet, which is used to control DC power to the storage batteries, CMUG, and fan in the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


720




Ports, Terminals, and Circuit Breakers The following table describes ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a power distribution box. Table 4-98 Ports, terminals, and circuit breakers on a power distribution box

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Silkscreen

Description

Description

(1)

NEG(-)

Negative input terminal

Two terminals, each using a one-hole OT (M6) terminal and connecting to a 10 mm2power cable

RTN(+)

Positive input terminal

Two terminals, each using a one-hole OT (M6) terminal and connecting to a 10 mm2power cable

(2)

-

Switch

Controls the DC input power (80 A) to the battery cabinet

(3)

-

Ground copper bar

Used for grounding the insulation layer of a shielded cable

(4)

LOAD FUSE30A

Fuse terminal block

Connects to an EPC4 connector. The fuse protects the cabinet from overcurrent.


721



4.3.16 OPM15M, OPM50M, or OPM30M An Outdoor Power Module 15M (OPM15M) an Outdoor Power Module 50M (OPM50M), or an Outdoor Power Module 30M (OPM30M) is an auxiliary product specially designed for Huawei Blade Site and used to convert external AC input power into -48 V DC. For details about the OPM15M hardware, see OPM15M User Guide. For details about the OPM50M hardware, see OPM50M User Guide. For details about the OPM30M hardware, see OPM30M User Guide.

4.3.17 DC Junction Box in an RFC A DC junction box is installed in an RFC, and it converts one or two power inputs into two DC power outputs.

Exterior A DC junction box is installed on the left inner wall of an RFC. The following figure shows the exterior of a DC junction box. Figure 4-132 Exterior of a DC junction box

Function l

In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DC junction box, which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.

l

In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box, which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.

Interior The following figure shows the interior of a DC junction box.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


722



Figure 4-133 Interior of a DC junction box

(1) Cable holes for input/ (2) One-hole input/output (3) One-hole input/output (4) Cable holes for input/ output power cables terminals (M6) terminals (M6) output power cables NOTE

In AC scenarios, input/output power cables have been installed in the DC junction box before delivery. In DC scenarios, input power cables must be installed onsite according to the following requirements: l When one group of input power cables are used, connect the cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals (M6) in the lower of the two rows indicated by illustration 3 in Figure 4-133. l When two groups of input power cables are used, connect the cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals (M6) in the two rows indicated by illustration 3 in Figure 4-133.

4.3.18 DC Junction Box in a BTS3900AL In an AC BTS3900AL, the UTPUT2 power terminals on the PDU03D-01 are connected to the DC junction box, which then distributes DC power to the DCDU-03B, DCDU-11B, or DCDU-12B.

Exterior A DC junction box is installed on the inner wall of an BTS3900AL DC cabinet. The following figure shows the exterior of a DC junction box.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


723



Figure 4-134 Exterior of a DC junction box

4.3.19 DC Junction Box in the IBBS300D or IBBS300T A DC junction box for an IBBS300D or IBBS300T converts one DC power input into two DC power outputs.

Exterior Two DC junction boxes are installed in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T. One is on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the other one is on the inner right wall of the cabinet. The following figure shows a DC junction box in an IBBS300D. Figure 4-135 Exterior of a DC junction box

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


724



Functions l

Obtains power from the storage batteries in the basic cabinet (APM30H, BTS3900AL, or TP48600A-H17B1) and converts it into two DC power outputs, which are provided for two storage packs in the battery cabinet.

l

Obtains power from the basic cabinet (APM30H, BTS3900AL, or TP48600A-H17B1) and provides it to the fan or TEC in the battery cabinet.

Interior The following figure shows the interior of a DC junction box. Figure 4-136 Interior of a DC junction box

(1) Wiring terminals for power cables of storage batteries

(2) Wiring terminals for power cables of the fan or TEC

4.3.20 AC Junction Box When a heater or a heating film is configured, the AC junction box provides power for the heater or the heating film. An AC junction box can be used in a BTS3900AL, APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS300D, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T.

Exterior The AC junction box in an APM30H, TMC11H, IBBS300D, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T is located on the inner left wall of the cabinet. The AC junction box in a BTS3900AL cabinet is located on the inner right wall of the cabinet. The following figure shows an APM30H as an example.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


725



Figure 4-137 Exterior of the AC junction box

Function The AC junction box in a cabinet performs the following functions: l

The PDU05A-01 in a BTS3900AL cabinet feeds power into the AC junction box. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater in the cabinet.

l

An EPU subrack feeds power into the AC junction box in an APM30H. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater in the cabinet or heating film in the IBBS200D.

l

The AC junction box in the APM30H feeds power into the AC junction box in the TMC11H. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater or service outlet unit (SOU) in the cabinet.

l

The AC junction box in the basic cabinet (APM30H, BTS3900AL, or TP48600AH17B1) feeds power into the AC junction box in the IBBS300D, IBBS700D, or IBBS700T. The power is divided into four AC power outputs, which are then provided for the heater in the cabinet.

Interior The following figure shows the interior of an AC junction box.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


726



Figure 4-138 Interior of an AC junction box

(1) Four AC output L wiring terminals

(2) Four AC output N wiring terminals

(3) Four AC output PE wiring terminals

(4) Cable holes

(5) AC input N wiring terminal

(6) AC input L wiring terminal

4.3.21 Storage Battery Storage batteries store power and can be installed an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS20D, IBBS700D, IBBS700T, BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, or IMS06.

Exterior

NOTICE When storage batteries are not provided by Huawei, ask Huawei technical personnel to assess the model compatibility. NOTE

Storage batteries from different manufacturers differ in exteriors and technical specifications. This section uses 12 V 100 Ah, 12 V 150 Ah, and 12 V 20 Ah storage batteries as examples.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


727



Figure 4-139 Storage battery

Configuration Each battery pack consists of four storage batteries. The following table lists the storage battery configurations achieved by combining different battery packs. Table 4-99 Storage battery configurations Cabinet Type

Storage Battery Type

Battery Pack Specifications

l IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T (Ver.B)

12 V, 100 Ah

l One battery pack (48 V, 100 Ah)

12 V, 150 Ah


12 V, 20 Ah

l A single cabinet supports one battery pack. (48 V, 20 Ah)

l IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C)

l Two battery packs connected in parallel (48 V, 200 Ah)

l IBBS200D (Ver.D) or IBBS200T (Ver.D) l IBBS200D (Ver.E) or IBBS200T (Ver.E) IBBS300D or IBBS300T

IBBS20D

l Two battery packs connected in parallel (48 V, 300 Ah)

l Two cabinets supports two battery packs connected in parallel. (48 V, 40 Ah)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


728



Cabinet Type

Storage Battery Type

Battery Pack Specifications

IBBS700D or IBBS700T

12 V, 150 Ah


12 V, 100 Ah

One battery pack (48 V, 100 Ah)

l BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

l Four battery packs connected in parallel (48 V, 600 Ah)

l IMS06

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of storage batteries. Table 4-100 Technical specifications of storage batteries Storage Battery Type


Weight

12 V, 100 Ah


≤ 34 kg (74.97 lb)

12 V, 150 Ah

l In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T: 125 mm x 310 mm x 561 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 in. x 22.09 in.)

60 kg (132.3 lb)

l In an IBBS700D or IBBS700T: 125 mm x 310 mm x 528 mm (4.92 in. x 12.20 in. x 20.79 in.) 12 V, 20 Ah


6.35 kg (14 lb)

4.4 Monitoring Devices This section describes monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the monitoring devices. For specific monitoring schemes in base stations, see Monitor Management.

4.4.1 CMUA The central monitoring unit type A (CMUA) is a centralized monitoring unit. It monitors the temperature of the fans, heater assembly unit (HAU), and cabinet. A CMUA can be used in an AMP30H(Ver.B), RFC(Ver.B), TMC11H(Ver.B), IBBS200D(Ver.B), or IBBS200T(Ver.B). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


729



Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUA. Figure 4-140 CMUA

Function The CMUA performs the following functions: l

Automatically adjusts the temperature of cabinets with different temperature control modes.

l

Reserves ports for three Boolean inputs to support Boolean alarm detection, but does not support detection of alarms reported by devices outside the cabinet.

l

Provides an electronic label for RJ45 port and realizes the detection of cabinet types.

Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUA. Figure 4-141 Ports on a CMUA

The following table describes the ports on the CMUA. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


730



Table 4-101 Ports on the CMUA No.

Silkscreen

Description

(1)

l In the RFC: TEM

l In the RFC, this port is connected to the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of the cabinet to receive temperature alarms.

l In the IBBS200 D or IBBS200 T: TEM_BA T

l In the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, this port is connected to the battery temperature sensor in the IBBS200D/ IBBS200T to receive battery temperature alarms.

COM_OUT

Cascading port connected to a lower-level device

(2)

l In the APM30H, this port is connected to the PMU. l In the RFC, TMC11H, or IBBS200D/IBBS200T, this port is connected to the lower-level CMUA. (3)

COM_IN

Cascading port connected to an upper-level device l In the APM30H, this port is connected to the BBU. l In the RFC or TMC11H, this port is connected to the BBU or an upper-level CMUA. l In the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, this port is connected to the PMU or an upper-level CMUA.

(4)

ELU

Connected to the Electronic Label Unit (ELU) to receive ELU-related alarms.

(5)

GATE

Connected to the door status sensor to receive door status alarms.

(6)

IN0, IN1, and IN2

Boolean signal port. l In the APM30H, RFC, or TMC11H, these ports are reserved. l In the IBBS200D, or IBBS200T, IN0, IN1, and IN2 are connected to the BAU02D if BAU02D is configured.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(7)

SMOKE

Connected to the smoke sensor to receive smoke alarms.

(8)

FAN_EXT

Connected to the outer air circulation fan in the cabinet door to receive its alarm signals.

(9)

PWR

Port feeding power to the CMUA

(10)

TEC

Connected to the TEC to receive its alarm signals.


731



No.

Silkscreen

Description

(11)

l In the APM30H , TMC11H , RFC, or IBBS200 D: FAN1

l In the APM30H or TMC11H, this port is connected to the fans in the fan assembly.

l In the IBBS200 T: FAN_EX T l In the RFC or IBBS200 D: FAN2

(12)

l In the IBBS200 T: FAN_IN T

l In the RFC or IBBS200D, this port is connected to the right fan in the fan assembly or fan mounting frame. l In the IBBS200T, this port is connected to the outer air circulation fan on the TEC and to receive alarm signals of fans in each cabinet.

l Connected to the left fan in the fan assembly in the RFC or IBBS200D. l In the IBBS200T, it is connected to the inner air circulation fan on the TEC to receive alarm signals of fans in each cabinet.

Indicator The two indicators on the CMUA panel indicate the status of the CMUA. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-102 Indicators on the CMUA panel Silkscr een

Color

State

Meaning

RUN

Green


The board is functional and communicating with its upper-level device properly.


The board is functional but fails to communicate with its upper-level device for more than one minute.

Steady on or off

The board is faulty (if it is not in the poweron check state).

Steady off


Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the board needs to be replaced.

ALM

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Red


732


Silkscr een


Color

State

Meaning


An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by the fault in an associated board or port. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.

DIP Switch On the CMUA, there are three DIP switches, which are SW1, SW2, and SW3. The DIP switches are used to set the working mode of the CMUA according to the cabinet type. The following figure shows the positions of the DIP switches on the CMUA. Figure 4-142 Positions of the DIP switches on the CMUA (top view)

In different types of cabinets, the DIP switches on the CMUA are set in different ways, as shown in the following figure. Figure 4-143 DIP switches setting of the CMUA in different types of cabinets

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


733



NOTE

In the preceding figure, the small red box indicates connecting to the upper jumper cap.

4.4.2 CMUE The central monitoring unit type E (CMUE) is a centralized monitoring unit. It monitors the temperature of the fans, heater assembly unit (HAU), and cabinet. A CMUE can be used in an AMP30H(Ver.C), RFC(Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.C), IBBS200D(Ver.C), or IBBS200T(Ver.C).

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUE. Figure 4-144 CMUE

Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUE. Figure 4-145 Ports on a CMUE

The following table describes the ports on a CMUE. Table 4-103 Ports on the CMUE

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Silkscreen

Description

(1)

TEMP2

Reserved port, connected to a temperature sensor Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

734



No .

Silkscreen

Description

(2)

WATER

Connected to a water sensor.

(3)

IFAN4

Connected to the inner circulation fan for the cabinet

(4)

IFAN3


(5)

IFAN2


(6)

IFAN1


(7)

TEC

Connected to the TEC to receive alarms related to the TEC

(8)

TEMP1

l In the RFC, this port is connected to the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of the cabinet to receive temperature alarms. l In the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, this port is connected to the battery temperature sensor in the IBBS200D/IBBS200T to receive battery temperature alarms.

(9)

COM_OUT

RS485 signal port. It communicates with lower-level cascading ports and reports monitoring information. l In the APM30H, this port is connected to the PMU. l In the RFC, TMC11H, or IBBS200D/IBBS200T, this port is connected to the lower-level CMUE.

(10 )

COM_IN

RS485 signal port. It communicates with upper-level cascading ports and reports monitoring information. l In the APM30H, this port is connected to the BBU. l In the RFC or TMC11H, this port is connected to the BBU or an upper-level CMUE. l In the IBBS200D/IBBS200T, this port is connected to the PMU or upper-level CMUE.

(11 )

RUN

Indicating the running status of the fans

(12 )

ALM

Indicating the alarm status of the fans

(13 )

ELU

Port connected to the ELU to report the cabinet type

(14 )

GATE

Boolean signal port connected to the door status sensor

(15 )

IN0, IN1, and IN2

Boolean signal port. l In the APM30H, RFC, or TMC11H, these ports are reserved. l In the IBBS200D, or IBBS200T, IN0, IN1, and IN2 are connected to the BAU02D if BAU02D is configured.

(16 )

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

SMOKE

Boolean signal port connected to the smoke sensor


735



No .

Silkscreen

Description

(17 )

EFAN1

Connected to the outer circulation fan for the cabinet

(18 )

EFAN2

Connected to the outer circulation fan for the cabinet

(19 )

PWR

Power input port providing DC power input for the board

Indicator The two indicators on the CMUE panel indicate the status of the CMUE. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-104 Indicators on the CMUE panel Silkscr een

Color

State

Meaning

RUN

Green


The board is functional and communicating with the BBU properly.


The board is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or the board is not registered.

Steady on

The board is in the power-on self-check status.

Steady off

The board is faulty.

Steady off

No alarm is reported.

Steady on

Alarms are generated, and the board must be replaced.


An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by the fault in an associated board or port. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.

ALM

Red

DIP Switch On the CMUE, there is a DIP switch J18, which is used to set the working mode of the CMUE according to the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on the CMUE.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


736



Figure 4-146 Position of the DIP switch on the CMUE

In different types of cabinets, the DIP switch on the CMUE is set in different ways, as shown in the following figure. Figure 4-147 DIP switch setting of the CMUE in different cabinets

NOTE

The red rectangles in Figure 4-147show the positions for connecting jumper caps.

4.4.3 CMUEA The central monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA) monitors the fans, Heater Assembly Unit, and cabinet temperature. A CMUEA can be used in the APM30H(Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.D_B), APM30H(Ver.D_A2), APM30(Ver.D_A1), RFC(Ver.D), RFC(Ver.D_B), RFC(Ver.D_A), TMC11H(Ver.D), TMC11H(Ver.D_B), TMC11H(Ver.D_A2), TMC11H(Ver.D_A1), IBBS200D(Ver.D), IBBS200T(Ver.D) or IBBS700D cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUEA. Figure 4-148 Exterior of a CMUEA

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


737



Ports The following figure shows the ports on a CMUEA. Figure 4-149 Ports on a CMUEA

The following table lists information about ports on a CMUEA. Table 4-105 Ports on a CMUEA No .


Description

(1)

TEMP2

Reserved port, connected to the temperature sensor.

(2)

WATER

Connected to the water sensor.

(3)

IFAN4

(4)

IFAN3

Connected to the inner air circulation to receive alarms related to the inner air circulation.

(5)

IFAN2

(6)

IFAN1

(7)

TEC

Connected to the TEC cooler to receive alarms related to the TEC cooler.

(8)

TEMP1

l In an RFC, this port is connected to the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of the cabinet to receive temperature alarms about the RFC. l In an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or IBBS700D, this port is connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive alarm signals about the battery temperature.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


738



No .


Description

(9)

COM_OUT

It is an RS485 signal port, which communicates with lower-level cascading ports and reports monitoring information. l In the APM30H, this port is connected to the PMU. l In an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or IBBS700D, this port is connected to a lower-level CMUEA.

(10 )

COM_IN

RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information. l In the APM30H, this port is connected to the BBU. l In the RFC or TMC11H, this port is connected to the BBU or an upper-level CMUEA. l In an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or IBBS700D, this port is connected to the PMU or an upper-level CMUEA.

(11 )

ELU

Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type.

(12 )

GATE

Boolean signal port, which is connected to the door status sensor.

(13 )

IN0, IN1, and IN2

Boolean signal port. l In the APM30H, RFC, or TMC11H, reserved port. l In the IBBS200D, or IBBS200T, IN0, IN1, and IN2 are connected to the BAU02D or ODM06D Surge Protection Alarm Cable. l In the IBBS700D, IN0 is connected to the heater, and IN1 and IN2 are reserved.

(14 )

SMOKE

Boolean signal port. l In the APM30H, RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T, this port is connected to the smoke sensor. l In the IBBS700D, this port is not involved.

(15 )

EFAN1

(16 )

EFAN2

(17 )

PWR

Connected to the outer air circulation fan to receive its alarm signals.

Power input port providing DC power input for the board.

Indicators The two indicators on the CMUEA panel indicate the status of the CMUEA. The following table describes their meanings.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


739



Table 4-106 Indicators on the CMUEA panel Silkscr een

Color

State

Meaning

RUN

Green





Steady on


Steady off


Steady off


Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the board must be replaced.


An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the board.

ALM

Red

DIP Switch On the CMUEA, there is a DIP switch J18, which is used to set the working mode of the CMUEA according to the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on the CMUEA. Figure 4-150 Position of DIP switch on a CMUEA

In different types of cabinets, DIP switches on the CMUEA are set in different ways, as shown in the following figure. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


740



Figure 4-151 DIP switch setting on the CMUEA in different cabinets

4.4.4 CMUG The central monitoring unit type G (CMUG) monitors the temperature in the cabinet, detects power supply, and reports alarms. A CMUG can be used in an IBBS20D.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUG. Figure 4-152 Exterior of a CMUG

Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUG.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


741



Figure 4-153 Ports on a CMUG

The following table describes the ports on a CMUG. Table 4-107 Ports on the CMUG No .


Description

(1)

ELU

Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type

(2)

ELU_GAT E

Boolean signal port, reserved

(3)

COM_IN

RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information l In an IBBS20D, this port connects to a PMU or upper-level CMUG.

(4)

COM_OUT

RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and receiving monitoring information l In an IBBS20D, it connects to a lower-level CMUG.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(5)

GATE

Boolean signal port connected to the door status sensor

(6)

FAN

Connects to the fan in the cabinet and receives alarm signals from the fan.

(7)

MON

Monitoring signal port, used for detecting the voltage, current, and circuit breaker status of the storage batteries and controlling the power-off of storage batteries.

(8)

HEATER

Connects to the heating film to heat the IBBS20D.

(9)

PWR

Power input port providing DC power input for the board


742



Indicator The following table describes the two status indicators on the CMUG panel. Table 4-108 Indicators on the CMUG panel Silkscr een

Color

State

Description

RUN

Green


The board is functional and communicates with the upper-level device properly.


The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device or the board is not registered.

Steady on


Steady off


Steady off


Steady on




ALM

Red

4.4.5 CMUH A central monitoring unit type H (CMUH) mainly monitors a fan module, a heater, cabinet temperature, and lower-level devices. A CMUH can be installed in an RFC (Ver.E), IBBS200D (Ver.E), or IBBS200T (Ver.E).

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUH. Figure 4-154 Exterior of a CMUH

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


743



Port The following figure shows the ports on a CMUH. Figure 4-155 Ports on a CMUH

The following table describes the ports on a CMUH. Table 4-109 Ports on a CMUH No.

Silkscreen

Description

(1)

TEMP1

Reserved port for connecting a temperature sensor

(2)

WATER

Connecting to a water sensor

(3)

IFAN4

(4)

IFAN3

Connecting an internal circulation fan and receiving internal circulation fan alarm signals

(5)

IFAN2

(6)

IFAN1

(7)

IFAN0

(8)

TEC

Connecting the TEC in an IBBS200T and receiving TEC alarm signals

(9)

TEMP0

l Connecting the temperature sensor at the air intake vent of a cabinet to receive temperature alarm signals in an RFC. l Connecting a battery temperature sensor and receiving battery temperature alarm signals in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


744



No.

Silkscreen

Description

(10)

D_COM0

Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices

(11)

D_COM1

Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices Connecting a WIUA that is optional

(12)

COM_OUT

RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and receiving monitoring information. l Connecting a lower-level CMUH or CCUB in an RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T

(13)

COM_IN

RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information. l Connecting an upper-level CMUH or CCUB in an RFC l Connecting a CCUB or upper-level CMUH in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T

(14)

ELU

Connecting an ELU to report the cabinet type

(15)

GATE

Boolean signal port for connecting a door status sensor that is configured by default

(16)

IN0, IN1, and IN2

Boolean signal port l Reserved port in an RFC l Connecting a BAU02D or ODM06D surge protection alarm cable in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T

(17)

SMOKE

Boolean signal port Connecting a smoke sensor in an RFC, IBBS200D, or IBBS200T

(18)

EFAN

Connecting an external circulation fan and receiving external circulation fan alarm signals

(19)

PWR

Power input port providing DC power inputs for boards

Indicator The following table describes the two status indicators on a CMUH.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


745



Table 4-110 Indicators on a CMUH Label

Color

Status

Meaning

RUN

Green


The board is functional and communicates with the upperlevel device properly.


The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upperlevel device or the board is not registered.

Steady on


Steady off


Steady off


Steady on




ALM

Red

4.4.6 HEUA The Heat Exchange Unit type A (HEUA) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the status of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU. HEUA can be used in OMB cabinet.

Panel The following figure shows the HEUA panel.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


746



Figure 4-156 Exterior of the HEUA

(1) IntFAN

(2) ISENSOR

(3) DC_SPD

(4) AC_SPD

(5) GATE

(6) COM IN

(7) COM OUT

(8) ExtFAN

(9) DC INPUT

Function The HEUA performs the following functions: l

Provides -48 V DC power to the fan assembly.

l

Collects the cabinet environment monitoring information.

l

Collects surge protection alarm information from the DCDU-03B or AC/DC power equipment.

l

Monitors the running status of fans and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.

l

Reports the collected information to the BBU through an RS485 port.

Port The following table describes the ports on the HEUA. Table 4-111 Ports on the HEUA

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

IntFAN

4-pin connector

Power port for the inner air circulation fan

ISENSOR

4-pin connector

Port connected to the temperature sensor

DC_SPD

8_PCB connector

Port for collecting the DC input surge protection alarm


747



Silkscreen

Connector

Description

AC_SPD

8_PCB connector

Port for collecting the AC input surge protection alarm

GATE

8_PCB connector

Port for the door status sensor

COM IN

RJ45 connector

Port for reporting monitoring signals

COM OUT

RJ45 connector

Monitoring port for the AC/DC power equipment

ExtFAN

4-pin connector

Power port for the outer air circulation fan

DC INPUT

3V3 connector

Port for feeding -48 V DC power

4.4.7 HEUB The Heat Exchange Unit type B (HEUB) provides power for the fan assembly, monitors the status of the fan assembly, collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and power surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU. HEUB can be used in OMB(Ver.C) cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a HEUB. Figure 4-157 Exterior of the HEUB

Function The HEUB performs the following functions: l

Provides -48 V DC power to the fan assembly, monitors the running status of fans, and supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.

l

Collects the cabinet environment monitoring information and surge protection alarm information, and reports the collected information to the BBU.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


748



Port The following figure shows the ports on a HEUB. Figure 4-158 Ports on a HEUB

The following table describes the ports on the HEUB. Table 4-112 Ports on the HEUB

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Silkscreen

Connector

Ports on the HEUB

(1)

ELU

RJ45 connector

Electronic label port

(2)

ExtFAN

4-pin connector

Power port for the outer air circulation fan

(3)

IntFAN

4-pin connector

Power port for the inner air circulation fan

(4)

TEM

4-pin connector

Port connected to the temperature sensor

(5)

AC_SPD

Bare wire


(6)

GATE

Bare wire

Port for the door status sensor

(7)

COM_IN

RJ45 connector

Port for reporting monitoring signals


749



No.

Silkscreen

Connector

Ports on the HEUB

(8)

COM_OUT

RJ45 connector

Port connected to the ETP48100-A1

(9)

PWR

3V3 connector

Port for feeding -48 V DC power

4.4.8 CMUF The central monitoring unit type F (CMUF) monitors the fans and cabinet temperature. A CMUF can be used in the BTS3900AL and IBBS700T.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CMUF. Figure 4-159 CMUF

Ports The following figure shows the ports and indicators on a CMUF. Figure 4-160 Ports on a CMUF

The following table describes the ports on a CMUF.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


750



Table 4-113 Description of the ports on a CMUF No.

Port

Description

(1)

WATER

Reserved port, connected to the water sensor.

(2)

FAN4

One-row 4-pin port for connecting a fan. It is a reserved port.

(3)

FAN5

(4)

FAN6

(5)

FAN8

(6)

FAN7

(7)

TEM0

Dual-row 4-pin port for connecting a fan. It is a reserved port.

l It is connected to the temperature sensor next to the storage battery in the BTS3900AL. l It is reserved in the IBBS700T.

(8)

TEM1

Connected to the temperature sensor on the front door of the cabinet.

(9)

COM_OUT

RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information.

(10)

COM_485

Reserved RS485 signal port.

(11)

COM_IN

RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information.

(12)

ELU

Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type.

(13)

GATE

Boolean signal port, which is connected to the door status sensor.

(14)

IN0

Boolean signal port l It is reserved in the BTS3900AL. l It is connected to a heater and reports monitoring information in the IBBS700T.

(15)

SMOKE

Boolean signal port l In the BTS3900AL, this port is connected to the smoke sensor. l In the IBBS700T, this port is not involved.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(16)

TEC

Connected to the TEC cooler to receive alarms related to the TEC cooler.

(17)

FAN_EXT 0

Connected to the outer air circulation fan.

(18)

FAN_EXT 1

Connected to the outer air circulation fan.

(19)

FAN_IN0

Connected to the inner air circulation fan.

(20)

FAN_IN1

Connected to the inner air circulation fan.

(21)

PWR

Power input port providing DC power input for the board.


751



Indicators The two indicators on the CMUF panel indicate the status of the CMUF. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-114 Indicators on the CMUF Silkscr een

Color

State

Meaning

RUN

Green





Steady on


Steady off


Steady off


Steady on




ALM

Red

DIP Switch The DIP switches on the CMUF are used to set the working mode of the CMUF according to the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on the CMUF.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


752



Figure 4-161 Positions of the DIP switches on the CMUF

(1) DIP Switch

The following figure shows the settings of the DIP switches on the CMUF in different cabinets. Figure 4-162 Settings of the DIP switches on the CMUF in different cabinets

4.4.9 CCU A cabinet control unit (CCU) monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and manages devices in the cabinet. A CCU can be used in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A), IBBS700D, or IBBS700T cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the CCU.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


753



Figure 4-163 Exterior of the CCU

Functions A CCU performs the following functions: l

Provides four standard 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet ports for cascading and commissioning CCUs.

l

Provides three uplink RS485 ports for the main equipment to manage the CCU.

l

Provides eight downlink RS485 ports to communicate with the CMUF, FAU, HAU, PMU, EMUA, and EMUB.

l

Reports environment alarms such as smoke alarms and access control alarms when being connected to corresponding sensors.

Port The following figure shows the ports on the CCU panel. Figure 4-164 Exterior of the CCU panel

The following table describes the ports on the CCU panel. Table 4-115 Ports on the CCU panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Item

Silkscreen

Description

(1)

CCU cascading ports

FE_L and FE_R

The FE_R port on the upper-level CCU connects to the FE_L port on the lower-level CCU. The FE_L port on level 1 CCU is idle.


754



No.

Item

Silkscreen

Description

(2)

FE cascading ports

FE0 and FE1

The FE0 port is reserved and the FE1 port is a commissioning port. NOTE l The combined serial connector and Ethernet connector cable for commissioning connects the CCU to the FE1 port on the CCU and port for the HyperTerminal tool, which is integrated in the Windows operating system. The serial port has a rate of 115,200 bit/s. l After connecting the cable, log in to the serial port using "root" as the user name and "Huawei@ccu123" as the password.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(3)

Electronic label unit (ELU) port

ELU

Used to manage the cabinet asset

(4)

Downlink COM port

D_COM0 to D_COM7

Used to manage electromechanical devices through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 communication

(5)

Uplink COM port

U_COM0 to U_COM2

Used for the main device to manage the CCU through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 or FE communication

(6)

USB port

USB

Reserved

(7)

DC power input port

RTN(+) and NEG(-)

Used to receive -48 V DC power

(8)

Port for the cabinet lamp

LAMP

Used to supply -48 V DC power to the cabinet lamp

(9)

Boolean signal port

GATE, IN0, and IN1

Port for providing three Boolean inputs. The GATE port connects the door status sensor, the IN1 port connects the AC surge protector, and the IN0 port is reserved.

(10)

Enhanced protective RS485 port

T+T- and R +R-

Supports uplink RS485 communication.

(11)

Port for connecting the smoke sensor

SMOKE

Port for connecting the smoke sensor

(12)

Port for connecting the temperature sensor

TEM

Reserved

(13)

Indicator

RUN, ALM, and LINK

For details about the indicators' status, see Table 4-116.


755



Indicator The two indicators on the CCU panel indicate the status of the CCU. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-116 Status indicator Silksc reen

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

Steady off



The board is functioning properly according to the configuration.


Software is being loaded to the module, or the module is not started.

Steady on



An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the current board.

Steady off


ALM

Red

Besides the preceding two indicators, there is another indicator indicating the status of the cascading port on the CCU. The following table describes this indicator. Table 4-117 Port indicator Silksc reen

Color

Status

Description

LINK

Red

Steady on

An alarm is generated on the CCU cascading port which may be connected improperly.

Steady off

No fault.

4.4.10 CCU01D-03 A cabinet control unit 1D-03 (CCU01D-03) monitors the operating environment of the cabinet and manages devices in the cabinet. A CCU01D-03 can be installed in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


756



Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CCU01D-03. Figure 4-165 Exterior of the CCU01D-03

Functions A CCU01D-03 monitors all functions of a cabinet. It performs the following functions: l

Provides two standard Ethernet ports with the rate of 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s for cascading CCU01D-03 modules.

l

Provides two uplink RS485 ports for connecting the upper- or lower-level communication ports.

l

Provides two downlink RS485 ports for managing electromechanical components.

l

Reports environment alarms such as smoke alarms and door status alarms when it is connected to corresponding sensors.

Port The following figure shows the ports on the CCU01D-03 panel. Figure 4-166 Ports on the CCU01D-03 panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


757



The following table describes the ports on the CCU01D-03 panel. Table 4-118 Ports on the CCU01D-03 panel No .

Silkscreen

Description

(1)

TEMP2

Reserved port for connecting to the temperature sensor

(2)

WATER

Connects to the water sensor.

(3)

FAN_EXT

Connects to the outer air circulation fan to receive alarm signals from it.

(4)

FAN_INT

Connects to the inner air circulation fan to receive alarm signals from it.

(5)

TEC

Connects to the TEC to receive alarms signals from it.

(6)

PWR

Power input port for providing DC power input for the board

(7)

EXTFAN2

Reserved.

(8)

EXTFAN1

(9)

SMOKE

Boolean signal port Port for connecting to the smoke sensor in an IBBS300D or IBBS300T.

(10 )

IN0, IN1, and IN2

Boolean signal port l If a BAU02D is optionally configured, these ports connect to the BAU02D. l If an IBBS300D is not configured with a BAU02D, the IN0 port connects to a heater and the IN1 and IN2 ports are reserved.

(11 )

GATE

Boolean signal port for connecting to the door status sensor

(12 )

COM_OUT

RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and receiving monitoring information In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T, it connects to a lower-level CCU01D-03.

(13 )

COM_IN

RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T, it connects to the PMU or upper-level CCU01D-03.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(14 )

D_COM1

(15 )

D_COM0

(16 )

FE_R

Manages electromechanical devices through RJ45 connectors, supporting RS485 communication

The FE_R port on the upper-level CCU01D-03 is connected to the FE_L port on the lower-level CCU01D-03. If the FE_L port on a Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

758



No .

Silkscreen

Description

(17 )

FE_L

CCU01D-03 is not connected to a cable, the CCU01D-03 is the firstlevel CCU01D-03.

(18 )

RUN, ALM, and LINK

For the meanings of the indicator status, see Table 4-119and Table 4-120.

(19 )

ELU

Port for connecting the ELU to report the cabinet type

(20 )

TEMP1

In an IBBS300D or IBBS300T, this port is connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive battery temperature alarms.

Indicator The two indicators on the CCU01D-03 panel indicate the status of the CCU01D-03. The following table describes their meanings. Table 4-119 Status indicator description Silksc reen

Color

State

Description

RUN

Green

Steady on

There is power supply, but the board is faulty.

Steady off



The board is functioning properly according to the configuration.


Data is being loaded to the board, or the board is not started.

Steady on

Alarms are generated, and the board needs to be replaced.



Steady off


ALM

Red

Besides the preceding two indicators, there is another indicator indicating the status of the cascading port on the CCU01D-03. The following table describes this indicator.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


759



Table 4-120 Port indicator description Silksc reen

Color

State

Description

LINK

Red

Steady on

An alarm is generated on the CCU01D-03 cascading port which may be connected improperly.

Steady off

There is no fault.

DIP Switch On the CCU01D-03, there is a DIP switch J18, which is used to set the working mode of the CCU01D-03 according to the cabinet type. The following figure shows the position of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03. Figure 4-167 Position of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03

The following figure shows the settings of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03 in different cabinets. Figure 4-168 Settings of the DIP switch on the CCU01D-03 in different cabinets

4.4.11 CCUB A cabinet control unit type B (CCUB) monitors a fan module, a heater, cabinet temperature, a power module, and lower-level devices. A CCUB can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


760



Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a CCUB. Figure 4-169 Exterior of a CCUB

Port The following figure shows the ports on a CCUB. Figure 4-170 Ports on a CCUB

The following table describes the ports on a CCUB. Table 4-121 Ports on a CCUB

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No .

Silkscr een

Description

(1)

PWR

Power input port providing DC power inputs for boards

(2)

EFAN1

Connecting an external circulation fan and receiving external circulation fan alarm signals

(3)

COM_4 85

Connecting a monitoring board in a battery cabinet and receiving alarm signals from the battery cabinet Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

761



No .

Silkscr een

Description

(4)

MON00/ D_COM 0-0

l MON0-0: Connecting an environment monitoring unit in another RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H

MON01/ D_COM 0-1

l MON0-1: Connecting an environment monitoring unit in another RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H

MON10/ D_COM 1-0

l MON1-0: Connecting an environment unit in an RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H

MON11/ D_COM 1-1

l MON1-1: Connecting an environment unit in an RFC, TMC11H, or APM30H

D_COM 2

Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

l D_COM0-0: Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices




Connecting a WIUA that is optional (9)

D_COM 3

Downlink communication port supporting RS485 communication and used for managing electromechanical devices Connecting an electric lock that is optional

(10 )

COM_I N/ U_COM 0

l COM_IN: Connecting an upper-level CCUB or CMUH. If no BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) or the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) does not work as a manager, this port communicates with an upper-level cascading port for reporting monitoring information. l U_COM0: If the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) works as a manager, this port connects to the MON1 port on the BBU.

(11 )

COM_O UT/ U_COM 1

l COM_OUT: If no BBU is installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) or the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) does not work as a manager, this port communicates with a lower-level cascading port for receiving monitoring information and connecting a lower-level CMUH. l U_COM1: If the BBU installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E) works as a manager, this port connects to the MON1 port on the BBU.

(12 )

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

PMI

Connecting a power monitoring interface (PMI) board and receiving monitoring signals from the power system


762



No .

Silkscr een

Description

(13 )

ELU

Connecting an ELU to report the cabinet type

(14 )

IN0, IN1, and IN2

Reserved Boolean signal port

(15 )

GATE

Boolean signal port for connecting a door status sensor that is configured by default

(16 )

SMOKE

Boolean signal port

(17 )

TEMP0

Reserved temperature monitoring port

(18 )

TEM_B AT

Battery temperature sensor port for receiving temperature information about internal or external storage batteries of an APM30H

(19 )

ADDR

Address monitored by the PMU function of a CCUB. The monitored address is 3 if the DIP switch is set to 1. The monitored address is 4 if the DIP switch is set to 0.

(20 )

WATER

Reserved port for connecting a water sensor

(21 )

TEMP2

Reserved port for connecting a temperature sensor

(22 )

IFAN0

Connecting an internal circulation fan and receiving internal circulation fan alarm signals

Connecting a smoke sensor in an APM30H or TMC11H

Indicator The following table describes the two status indicators on a CCUB. Table 4-122 Indicators on a CCUB

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Label

Color

Status

Meaning

RUN

Green





Steady on

The board is in the power-on selfcheck status.


763


Label

ALM


Color

Red

Status

Meaning

Steady off


Steady off


Steady on




4.4.12 WIUA A wireless interface unit type A (WIUA) is mainly used to monitor the running status of other components in the same cabinet. A WIUA can be installed in an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.

Applicable Version The WIUA is available in MBTS V100R011C00 and later versions.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a WIUA. Figure 4-171 Exterior of a WIUA

(1) COM_IN port

(2) SETUP indicator

(3) STATE indicator

(4) Pairing button

(5) ANT port

-

Function A WIUA provides the following functions: Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


764



l

Provides one RS485 signal port for communicating with an upper-level component.

l

Provides one antenna port for connecting to an antenna and communicating with external wireless components.

l

Contains an antenna for performing wireless communication with other components in the same cabinet.

l

Provides a pairing button for pairing with a lower-level component.

l

Provides an electronic label.

The following figure shows the function of a WIUA. Figure 4-172 WIUA function

Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a WIUA. Table 4-123 Indicators on a WIUA

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Label

Color

Status

Meaning

STATE

Red or green

Steady off


Steady green

The board is performing self-check or loading and activation.

Blinking green (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s)

The board is not registered, or the communication is interrupted.


765


Label

SETUP


Color

Green

Status

Meaning

Blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s)


Steady red


Blinking red (on for 1s and off for 1s)

Communications are normal but an alarm is generated, and you need to locate the fault before deciding whether to replace the board.

Steady off

No power is supplied or the pairing function is not enabled, and the board does not exchange data with a lower-level device.

Steady on

No data is being initialized and the pairing operation is not supported.


The board is performing wireless exchange with a lower-level device.


The board has been enabled with the pairing function.

Port and Button The following table describes the ports and button on a WIUA. Table 4-124 Ports and button on a WIUA Silkscreen

Description

COM_IN

RS485 signal port for communicating with an upper-level cascading port and reporting monitoring information Pairing buttona

ANT

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Port for connecting an external antennab


766



NOTE

a: The pairing button works as follows: l

After you press the pairing button on a WIUA, the WIUA can be paired with a lower-level device if the SETUP indicator is blinking green (on for 1s and off for 1s).

l

If you press the pairing button again during a pairing process, the pairing process will be interrupted and the SETUP indicator is steady off.

l

After the SETUP indicator blinks (on for 1s and off for 1s) for 10 minutes, the pairing function is automatically disabled.

b: When the WIUA is used together with an external antenna, the external antenna must be an omnidirectional antenna with a gain of less than 3 dBi and be installed by qualified personnel.

Engineering specifications The following table lists the engineering specifications of the WIUA. Table 4-125 Engineering specifications Specifications

Remarks

Input voltage

12 V DC

Operating voltage range:9 V DC to 12 V DC

Power consumption

2W

-


27 mm x 45 mm x 55 mm (1.06 in. x 1.77in. x 2.17 in.)

-

Weight

0.1 kg (0.22 lb)

-


-40°C to +70°C

-

Relative humidity

5% RH to 95% RH

-

Altitude

-60 m to 4000 m (-196.85 ft to 13123.20 ft)

From the altitude of 1800 m (5905.51 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1°C (33.8°F) each time the altitude increases by 220 m (721.78 ft).

Storage temperature

-40°C to +70°C


Protection level

IP20

-

Item Power specifications

Equipment specifications

Environment specifications

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


767



4.4.13 eBat An eBat is used to monitor the running status of a storage battery and report monitoring information to an upper-level WIUA through wireless communication. An eBat can be installed in an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T.

Applicable Version The eBat is available in MBTS V100R011C00 and later versions.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an eBat. Figure 4-173 Exterior of an eBat

(1) Cable outlet

(2) Pairing button

(3) RUN/ALM indicator

Function An eBat performs the following functions: l

Monitors the voltage of a storage battery.

l

Monitors the inner resistance of a storage battery.

l

Reports monitoring information about a storage battery to a WIUA.

Indicator The following table describes the indicators on an eBat. Table 4-126 Indicators on an eBat

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Label

Color

Status

Meaning

RUN/AL M

Green

Steady off

An eBat is not powered on or is in sleep mode.

Steady on

An eBat is not paired with a WIUA


768


Label


Color

Red

Orange

Status

Meaning


An eBat is being pairing with a WIUA.



Steady on

Communications are normal but a major internal battery resistance alarm is reported, and batteries need to be replaced.


A hardware sensor is faulty and communications are interrupted.


A hardware sensor is faulty but communications are normal.

Steady on

A minor internal battery resistance alarm is reported and communications are normal.

Port and Button The following table describes the port and button on an eBat. Table 4-127 Port and button on an eBat Item

Description

Cable outlet for an eBat

Two red cables and two black cables are routed through this cable outlet and connected to the positive and negative poles of a storage battery. Pairing button. After an upper-level WIUA starts pairing, pressing this button can pair the WIUA and eBat.

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an eBat.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


769



Table 4-128 Specifications of an eBat Item

Technical Specifications


48.5 mm x 35 mm x 17 mm (1.91 in. x 1.38 in. x 0.67 in.)

Operating voltage

11 V DC to 17 V DC


-20°C to 65°C (-4°F to 149°F)

Voltage monitoring range

11 V DC to 17 V DC

Internal resistance monitoring range

1.5 mΩ to 60 mΩ

Voltage monitoring precision

2%

Internal resistance monitoring precision

0.1 mΩ

4.5 Surge Protection Devices This section describes surge protection devices and types of cabinets supported by the surge protection devices.

4.5.1 SLPU The signal lightning protection unit(SLPU), which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 1 U high. A SLPU can be used in an AMP30H, TMC11H, or BTS3900AL(Ver.A).

Exterior of an SLPU The following figure shows the exterior of an SLPU. Figure 4-174 Exterior of an SLPU

SLPU slot assignment rules As a mandatory module providing protection for trunk signals in APM30H or TMC11H cabinet, the SLPU is configured with a UELP or UFLP and is installed in the top 1 U space of the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


770



Table 4-129 SLPU slot assignment rules Board


Maximum Quantity

Slot

Restriction

UELP

Optional

4

Slot 0 to slot 3

The UELP is preferentially configured in the descending order of priority in slot 2, 0, 1, or 3.

UFLP

Optional

1

Slot 3

If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.

When 16 or fewer customized alarm inputs are required, the SLPU is an optional module that provide protection for monitoring signals, the SLPU is configured with two USLP boards and is installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. Table 4-130 SLPU slot assignment rules Board


Maximum Quantity

Slot

Restriction

USLP

Optional

2

Slot 2 and slot 3

-

4.5.2 Surge Protection Subrack for Transmission Signals A surge protection subrack can be configured with a UELP or UFLP, which provides surge protection for transmission signals. It can be used in BTS3900AL(Ver.A).

Slot No. The following figure shows the slots in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


771



Figure 4-175 Slots in the surge protection subrack for transmission signals

Board Configuration The surge protection subrack for transmission signals is on the upper right of the cabinet, and can be configured with the UELP or UFLP. The following table describes the board configuration principles. Table 4-131 Board configuration principles

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Board


Maximum Quantity

Slot

Restriction

UELP

Optional

4

Slot 0 to slot 3

The UELP is preferentially configured in the descending order of priority in slot 2, 0, 1, or 3.

UFLP

Optional

1

Slot 3

If both the UELP and UFLP are configured, the UFLP is installed in a slot with a higher priority than the UELP.


772



4.5.3 UELP Each universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) provides surge protection for four channels of E1/T1 signals. It can be used in APM30H, TMC11H, BTS3900AL(Ver.A), or OMB(Ver.C).

Panel The following figure shows the UELP panel. Figure 4-176 UELP panel

Port The following table describes the ports on the UELP. Table 4-132 Ports on a UELP Silkscreen

Connector

Description

INSIDE

DB25 female connector

Connects to a transmission board of the base station.

OUTSIDE

DB26 female connector

Connects to the external transmission equipment.

DIP Switch A UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded. The DIP switch has four DIP bits. The following figure shows the DIP switch on a UELP.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


773



Figure 4-177 DIP Switch on a UELP

The following table lists the setting of the DIP switch on a UELP. Table 4-133 Setting of the DIP switch on a UELP DIP Switch

DIP Status 1

2

3

4

S1

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Meaning

Other status

Not grounded Grounding

NOTE

The E1 cable of 75 ohms can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the E1 cable of 120 ohms and the T1 cable of 100 ohms cannot be grounded.

4.5.4 UFLP A universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP) provides protection for two channels of FE signals. A universal FE lightning protection unit type b (UFLPb) or universal FE lightning protection unit type c (UFLPc) provides protection for two channels of FE or GE signals. A UFLP, UFLPb, or UFLPc can be installed in an APM30H, TMC11H, BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet, or OMB (Ver.C).

Panel The following figure shows the UFLP panel. Figure 4-178 UFLP panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


774



The following figure shows the UFLPb panel. Figure 4-179 UFLPb panel

The following figure shows the UFLPc panel. Figure 4-180 UFLPc panel

Port The following table describes ports on the UFLP. Table 4-134 Ports on the UFLP Port Location

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

INSIDE side

FE0 and FE1

RJ45 connector


OUTSIDE side

FE0 and FE1

RJ45 connector


The following table describes ports on the UFLPb or UFLPc. Table 4-135 Ports on the UFLPb or UFLPc

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Port Location

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

INSIDE side

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1

RJ45 connector



775



Port Location

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

OUTSIDE side

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1

RJ45 connector


4.5.5 USLP A universal signal lightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) or universal signal lightning protection unit type c (USLPc) provides protection for dry contacts and can be installed in an APM30H, TMC11H, or BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet.

Panel The following figure shows the USLP2 panel. Figure 4-181 USLP2 panel

The following figure shows the USLPc panel. Figure 4-182 USLPc panel

Port The following table describes ports on the USLP2 or USLPc. Table 4-136 Ports on the USLP2 or USLPc

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity of Ports

Description

IN0, IN1, IN2, and IN3

4-pin

4

Connect to customized alarm devices.


776



Silkscreen

Connector

Quantity of Ports

Description

OUT0 and OUT1

RJ45 connector

2

Connects to the EXTALM port on the UPEU or UEIU in a cabinet.

The following figure shows the mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports on the USLP2 or USLPc. Figure 4-183 Mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports OUT0 7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2

OUT1 7 5 3 1 8 6 4 2

IN0 1

2

3

IN1 4

1

2

3

IN2 4

1

2

3

IN3 4

1

2

3

4

The following table describes the mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports on the USLP2 or USLPc. Table 4-137 Mapping between the pins in the IN and OUT ports on the USLP2 or USLPc Input Port Silkscreen

Pin

Silkscreen

Pin

IN0

IN0.1

OUT1

OUT1.1

IN1

IN2

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Output Port

IN0.2

OUT1.2

IN0.3

OUT1.4

IN0.4

OUT1.5

IN1.1

OUT1.3

IN1.2

OUT1.6

IN1.3

OUT1.7

IN1.4

OUT1.8

IN2.1

OUT0

OUT0.1

IN2.2

OUT0.2

IN2.3

OUT0.4


777



Input Port

Output Port

Silkscreen

Pin

IN3

Silkscreen

Pin

IN2.4

OUT0.5

IN3.1

OUT0.3

IN3.2

OUT0.6

IN3.3

OUT0.7

IN3.4

OUT0.8

For details about the application of a USLP, see 4.5.1 SLPU.

4.5.6 GPS Surge Protector A GPS surge protector provides surge protection for a satellite receiver. It can be used in BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL(Ver.A), OMB(Ver.C), APM30H, and TMC11H. The following figure shows the exterior of a GPS surge protector. Figure 4-184 Exterior of a GPS surge protector

(1) Type N female connection terminal

(2) Surge protection and grounding (3) Type N male connection terminal terminal

4.5.7 SPD An AC surge protection box provides surge protection for the input AC power in an OMB (Ver.C) or BTS3900AL(Ver.A). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


778



Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an AC surge protection box. Figure 4-185 Exterior of an AC surge protection box

(1) AC surge protection box

(2) Alarm port

(3) AC power supply ports

Port The following table describes the ports on an AC surge protection box. Table 4-138 Ports on an AC surge protection box Port

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

Alarm port

ALARM

Bare wire



L

Cord end terminal


N PE

4.5.8 AC Surge Protection Box A lightning arrester box provides surge protection for the input AC power, it can be used in OMB.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a lightning arrester box. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


779



Figure 4-186 Exterior of a lightning arrester box

(1) Alarm port

(2) Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables

Port The following table describes the ports on a lightning arrester box. Table 4-139 Ports on a lightning arrester box Port

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

Alarm port

SPD ALM

2-Pin cord end terminal


Port for power input

L

OT terminal

Wiring terminals for the AC input power cables

N PE

4.6 Temperature Control Devices This section describes temperature control devices and types of cabinets supported by the temperature control devices. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


780



4.6.1 Fan Assembly This section describes fan assemblies and types of cabinets supported by the fan assemblies.

FAN The FAN dissipates heat from the cabinet and monitors temperature. It can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.B) and BTS3900L (Ver.B) cabinets.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN which includes the fan subrack, fans, and FMUC. Figure 4-187 Exterior of a FAN

(1) Fan

(2) Fan subrack

(3) FMUC

Functions The FAN performs the following functions: l

Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from the cabinet.

l

Monitors temperature.

l

Adjusts fan speed based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.

l

Stops the fans automatically when the ambient temperature is low.

Ports The following figure shows the ports on a FAN. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


781



Figure 4-188 Ports on a FAN

The following table describes the ports on a FAN. Table 4-140 Ports on a FAN Port

Silkscreen

Connector

Remarks

Power port

-48V

3V3 connector

Supports -48 V DC power input.

Sensor port

SENSOR

RJ45 connector

Connects the ELU.

Communicatio n port

COM OUT

RJ45 connector

Cascades the lower-level FMUC or lower-level EMU.

COM IN

RJ45 connector

Connects the BBU, upperlevel FMUC, or upperlevel GATM.

Indicators The following table describes the indicators on a FAN. Table 4-141 Indicators on a FAN

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Indicato r

Color

State

Meaning

RUN

Green

On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s

The module is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or an upper-level FMUC.

On for 1s and off for 1s

The module is functional and is communicating with the BBU or an upper-level FMUC.


782


Indicato r

ALM


Color

Red

State

Meaning

Steady off

There is no power supply, or the module is faulty.


The module is reporting alarms.

Steady off

The module is not reporting alarms.

FAN 01A A FAN 01A dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in an RFC (Ver.B) cabinet.

Exterior A FAN 01A consists of three parts: the fan subrack, fans, and the CMUA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01A. Figure 4-189 Exterior of a FAN 01A

(1) CMUA

(2) Fans

(3) Fan subrack

Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 01A.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


783



Figure 4-190 Ports on a FAN 01A

(1) COM_OUT

(2) COM_IN

(3) RUN

(4)(5)(6) IN0, IN1, IN2

(7) PWR

(8) SMOKE

(9) GATE

(10) ELU

(11) ALM

(12) TEM

-

-

For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUA, see 4.4.1 CMUA.

FAN 01B A FAN 01B dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in an RFC (Ver.C) cabinet.

Exterior A FAN 01B consists of a fan subrack, fans, and a CMUE. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01B. Figure 4-191 Exterior of a FAN 01B

(1) CMUE

(2) Fans

(3) Fan subrack

Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 01B.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


784



Figure 4-192 Ports on a FAN 01B

(1) COM_OUT

(2) COM_IN

(3) RUN

(4)(5)(6) IN0, IN1, IN2

(7) PWR

(8) SMOKE

(9) GATE

(10) ELU

(11) ALM

(12) TEMP1

-

-

For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUE, see 4.4.2 CMUE.

FAN 01C A FAN 01C dissipates heat and detects temperature. It can be used in an RFC(Ver.D), RFC(Ver.D_B), or RFC(Ver.D_A).

Exterior A FAN 01C consists of the fan subrack, fans, and CMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01C. Figure 4-193 Exterior of a FAN 01C

(1) CMUEA

(2) Fans

(3) Fan subrack

Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 01C. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


785



Figure 4-194 Ports on a FAN 01C

(1) COM_OUT

(2) COM_IN

(3) RUN

(4)(5)(6) IN0, IN1, IN2

(7) PWR

(8) SMOKE

(9) GATE

(10) ELU

(11) ALM

(12) TEMP1

-

-

For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUEA, see 4.4.3 CMUEA.

FAN 01D A FAN 01D dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. A FAN 01D can be installed in an RFC (Ver.E).

Exterior A FAN 01D consists a fan, a fan subrack, and a CMUH. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 01D. Figure 4-195 Exterior of a FAN 01D

(1) CMUH

(2) Fan

(3) Fan subrack

Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 01D. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


786



Figure 4-196 Ports on a FAN 01D

(1) RUN

(2) D_COM0

(3) D_COM1

(4) COM_OUT

(5) COM_IN

(6) ELU

(7) GATE

(8) SMOKE

(9) PWR

(10)(11)(12) IN2, IN1, and IN0

(13) TEM

(14) ALM

-

-

-

For details about the ports and indicators on a CMUH, see 4.4.5 CMUH.

FAN 02A A FAN 02A dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in APM30H (Ver.B) and TMC11H (Ver.B) cabinets.

Exterior A FAN 02A consists of a fan subrack, fans, an HPMI, and a CMUA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02A. Figure 4-197 Exterior of a FAN 02A

(1) Fans

(2) Fan subrack

(3) CMUA

(4) HPMI

Ports on the HPMI The following figure shows the ports on the HPMI. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


787



Figure 4-198 Ports on the HPMI

The following table describes the ports on the HPMI. Table 4-142 Ports on the HPMI Description

Silkscreen

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Optional/Mandatory Devices Connected to the Ports(1) APM30H

TMC11H

PMU_DB50

Connected to the PMU.

-

-

OUT0 and OUT1

Each port provides one extended Boolean signal output.

Reserved port

Reserved port

IN0, IN1, and IN2

Each port provides one extended Boolean signal input.

Reserved port

Reserved port

FUSE

Reserved port for the fuse testing breaker

-

-

GATE


Mandatory

Reserved port

IN3 and IN4


Reserved port

Reserved port

TEM_BAT1

Connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive battery temperature alarm signals.

Optional

Reserved port

SMOKE


Reserved port

Reserved port


788



Silkscreen

Description


TMC11H

WATER

Connected to the water sensor to receive water damage alarms.

Reserved port

Reserved port

TEM_HUM

Connected to the temperature and humidity sensor to receive temperature and humidity alarms.

Reserved port

Reserved port

NOTE

Mandatory monitoring devices are installed in the cabinets before delivery, and all monitoring cables in all the cabinets are connected before delivery. The customer equipment is configured based on customer requirements, and the monitoring signal cables for the customer equipment must be connected onsite. For detailed installation procedures, see BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide.

The CMUA For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUA, see 4.4.1 CMUA.

FAN 02B A FAN 02B dissipates heat and monitors the temperature. It can be used in APM30H (Ver.C) and TMC11H (Ver.C) cabinets.

Exterior A FAN 02B consists of a fan subrack, fans, a CMUE, and an HPMI. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02B. Figure 4-199 Exterior of a FAN 02B

(1) Fan subrack

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(2) Fans

(3) CMUE


(4) HPMI

789



Ports on the HPMI The following figure shows the ports on the HPMI. Figure 4-200 Ports on the HPMI

The following table describes the ports on the HPMI. Table 4-143 Ports on the HPMI Description

Silkscreen

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


TMC11H

PMU_DB50

Connected to the PMU.

-

-

OUT0 and OUT1

Each port provides one extended Boolean signal output.

Reserved port

Reserved port

IN0, IN1, and IN2


Reserved port

Reserved port

FUSE

Reserved port for the fuse testing breaker

-

-

GATE


Mandatory

Reserved port

IN3 and IN4


Reserved port

Reserved port

TEM_BAT1

Connected to the battery temperature sensor to receive battery temperature alarm signals.

Optional

Reserved port


790



Silkscreen

Description


TMC11H

SMOKE


Reserved port

Reserved port

WATER

Connected to the water sensor to receive water damage alarms.

Reserved port

Reserved port

TEM_HUM

Connected to the temperature and humidity sensor to receive temperature and humidity alarms.

Reserved port

Reserved port

NOTE

Mandatory monitoring devices are installed in the cabinets before delivery, and all monitoring cables in all the cabinets are connected before delivery. The customer equipment is configured based on customer requirements, and the monitoring signal cables for the customer equipment must be connected onsite. For detailed installation procedures, see BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide.

CMUE For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUE, see 4.4.2 CMUE.

FAN 02D A FAN 02C dissipates heat and detects temperature. It can be used in an APM30H(Ver.D), APM30H(Ver.D_B), APM30H(Ver.D_A2), APM30H(Ver.D_A1), TMC11H(Ver.D), TMC11H(Ver.D_B), TMC11H(Ver.D_A2), TMC11H(Ver.D_A1).

Exterior A FAN 02D consists of the fan subrack, fans, and CMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02D.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


791



Figure 4-201 Exterior of a FAN 02D

(1) Fan subrack

(2) Fans

(3) CMUEA

Port The following figure shows the ports of a FAN 02D. Figure 4-202 Ports on a FAN 02D

(1) PWR

(2) FAN_EXT

(3) SMOKE

(4) RUN

(5) COM_IN

(6) COM_OUT

(7) ALM

(8) ELU

(9) GATE

(10)(11)(12) IN0, IN1, IN2

-

-

For details about the ports and indicators on the CMUEA, see 4.4.3 CMUEA.

FAN 02E A FAN 02E dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. A FAN 02E can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.E) or TMC11H (Ver.E).

Exterior A FAN 02E consists a fan, a fan subrack, and a CCUB. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02E.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


792



Figure 4-203 Exterior of a FAN 02E

(1) CCUB

(2) Fan

(3) Fan subrack

Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 02E. Figure 4-204 Ports on a FAN 02E

(1) ALM

(2) ADDR

(3) TEM

(4) SMOKE

(5) GATE

(6) COM_OUT/ U_COM1

(7) COM_IN/ U_COM0

(8) D_COM3

(9) D_COM2

(10) COM_485

(11) FAN_EXT

(12) PWR

(13) MON0-0/ D_COM0-0

(14) MON0-1/ D_COM0-1

(15) MON1-0/ D_COM1-0

(16) MON1-1/ D_COM1-1

(17) PMI

(18) ELU

(19) IN0, IN1, and IN2

(20) TEM_BAT

(21) RUN

-

-

-

-

For details about the ports and indicators on a CCUB, see 4.4.11 CCUB.

FAN 02F A FAN 02F dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. A FAN 02F can be installed in an APM30H (Ver.B), TMC11H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), or TMC11H (Ver.C). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


793



Exterior A FAN 02F consists a fan, a fan subrack, a HPMI, and a CMUH. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 02F. Figure 4-205 Exterior of a FAN 02F

(1) Fan

(2) HPMI

(3) CMUH

(4) Fan subrack

Port The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 02F. Figure 4-206 Ports on a FAN 02F

(1) PMU_DB50

(2) OUT0

(3) OUT1

(4) IN0

(5) IN1

(6) IN2

(7) FUSE

(8) GATE

(9) TAM_BAT1

(10) IN3

(11) IN4

(12) SMOKE

(13) WATER

(14) TEM_HUM

(15) RUN

(16) ALM

(17) D_COM0

(18) D_COM1

(19) COM_OUT

(20) COM_IN

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


794



(21) ELU

(22) GATE

(23) IN0

(24) IN1

(25) IN2

(26) SMOKE

(27) FAN_EXT

(28) PWR

-

-

FAN 03B The FAN 03B dissipates heat and monitors temperature. It can be used in BTS3900 (Ver.C) and BTS3900L (Ver.C) cabinets.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 03B which includes the fans, fan subrack, and FMUE. Figure 4-207 Exterior of a FAN 03B

(1) Fan

(2) Fan subrack

(3) FMUE

Functions The FAN 03B performs the following functions: l


l

Monitors the temperature of fans.

l


l


Ports The following figure shows the ports on a FAN 03B. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


795



Figure 4-208 Ports on a FAN 03B

The following table describes the ports on a FAN 03B. Table 4-144 Ports on a FAN 03B Port Type

Silkscreen

Connector

Remarks

Power port

-48V

3V3 connector


Sensor port

SENSOR

RJ45 connector

Connects the ELU.

Communicatio n port

COM OUT

RJ45 connector

Cascades the lower-level FMUE or EMU.

COM IN

RJ45 connector

Connects the BBU, upperlevel FMUE, or upperlevel GATM.

Indicators The following table describes the indicators on the FMUE in a FAN 03B. Table 4-145 Indicators on the FMUE in a FAN 03B

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Indicato r

Color

State

Meaning

RUN

Green

On for 0.125s and off for 0.125s

The module is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or an upper-level FMUE.


The module is functional and is communicating with the BBU or an upper-level FMUE.

Steady off



796



Indicato r

Color

State

Meaning

ALM

Red


The module is reporting alarms.

Steady off

The module is not reporting alarms.

FAN 03C A FAN 03C dissipates heat from a cabinet and monitors temperature. FAN 03C modules can be installed in BTS3900(Ver.D), BTS3900(Ver.D_A), BTS3900(Ver.D_B), BTS3012(Ver.D_Z), BTS3900L(Ver.D), and BTS3900L(Ver.D_B) cabinets.

Exterior A FAN 03C consists the fans, fan subrack, and FMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of a FAN 03C. Figure 4-209 Exterior of a FAN 03C

(1) Fan

(2) Fan subrack

(3) FMUEA

Functions A FAN 03C performs the following functions: l

Provides ventilation and dissipates heat from a cabinet.

l

Monitors temperature.

l


l


Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


797



Ports The FAN 03C has two port types, as shown in Figure 4-210and Figure 4-211. Figure 4-210 Ports on a FAN 03C (1)

Figure 4-211 Ports on a FAN 03C (2)

The following table describes the ports on a FAN 03C. Table 4-146 Ports on a FAN 03C

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Port

Silkscreen

Connector

Remarks

(1)

Power port

-48V

3V3 connector


Sensor port

SENSOR

RJ45 connector

Connects the ELU.

Communica tion port

COM OUT

RJ45 connector

Cascades a lowerlevel FMUEA, lowerlevel EMU, or lowerlevel PMU.


798


Item

(2)


Port

Silkscreen

Connector

Remarks

COM IN

RJ45 connector

Connects a BBU or upper-level FMUEA and cascades an upper-level GATM.

Power port

PWR

3V3 connector


Sensor port

SENSOR

RJ45 connector

Connects the ELU.

Communica tion port

COM_OUT

RJ45 connector

Cascades a lowerlevel FMUEA, lowerlevel EMU, or lowerlevel PMU.

COM_IN

RJ45 connector

Connects a BBU or upper-level FMUEA and cascades an upper-level GATM.

Indicators The following table describes the indicators on a FAN 03C. Table 4-147 Indicators on a FAN 03C Indicato r

Color

Status

Meaning

RUN

Green


The module is functional but fails to communicate with the BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.


The module is functional and is communicating with the BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.

Steady off


Steady off


Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the FAN 03C must be replaced.

ALM

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Red


799


Indicato r


Color

Status

Meaning


An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the FAN 03C.

FAU01D-01 An FAU01D-01 dissipates heat and monitors temperature. It can be used in an OMB (Ver.C) cabinet. The OMB (Ver.C) has two FAU01D-01s, located on the upper left and the lower left in an OMB. The inner air circulation fan is located on the upper left, and the outer air circulation fan is located on the lower left.

Exterior The following figure shows the FAU01D-01 exterior. Figure 4-212 FAU01D-01 exterior

(1) Barcode opening

FAU03D-01 An FAU03D-01 is a fan assembly in the RF compartment. It dissipates heat and detects temperature for a BTS3900AL(Ver.A).

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the FAU03D-01.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


800



Figure 4-213 Exterior of the FAU03D-01

Panel The following figure shows the FAU03D-01 panel. Figure 4-214 FAU03D-01 panel

Port The following table describes the ports on the FAU03D-01 panel. Table 4-148 Ports on the FAU03D-01 panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Port

Description

(1)

TEM0

Port for connecting to the temperature sensor

(2)

COM_OUT

RS485 signal port for communicating with lower-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information

(3)

COM_485

Port for connecting to the FAU03D-01 monitoring signal cable


801



No.

Port

Description

(4)

COM_IN

RS485 signal port for communicating with upper-level cascading ports and reporting monitoring information

(5)

ELU

Port for connecting to the ELU to report the cabinet type

(8)

GATE


(9)

IN0


(10)

SMOKE


(11)

TEC

Reserved port for connecting to the TEC

(12)

PWR

Port for providing DC power for the FAU03D-01

Indicator The following table describes the indicators on the FAU03D-01 panel. Table 4-149 Indicators on the FAU03D-01 panel No.

Silk scre en

Color

State

Meaning

(6)

RU N

Green


The board is functional and communicating with the upper-level device properly.



Steady on


Steady off

The FAU03D-01 is faulty.

Steady off


Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the FAU03D-01 must be replaced.


An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the FAU03D-01.

(7)

AL M

Red

Fan Assembly (FAU03D-02) An FAU03D-02 dissipates heat from the cabinet and monitors the temperature. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


802



Exterior An FAU03D-02 consists of the fans, fan subrack, and FMUEA. The following figure shows the exterior of the FAU03D-02. Figure 4-215 Exterior of an FAU03D-02

Functions The FAU03D-02 performs the following functions: l


l

Monitors the temperature.

l

Adjusts fan speed based on the temperature.

l


Ports The following figure shows ports on the FAU03D-02.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


803



Figure 4-216 Ports on the FAU03D-02

The following table describes the ports on the FAU03D-02. Table 4-150 Ports on the FAU03D-02 Port Type

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

Power supply port

PWR

3V3 connector


Sensor port

SENSOR

RJ45 connector

Connects the temperature sensor at the air intake vent for BBUs to cascade the ELU through the RJ45 connector on the temperature sensor.

Communicatio n port

COM OUT

RJ45 connector

Cascades the lower-level FMUEA.

COM IN

RJ45 connector

Connects a BBU or upperlevel FMUEA.

Indicators The following table describes the indicators on the FAU03D-02. Table 4-151 Indicators on the FAU03D-02

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Indicato r

Color

Status

Description

RUN

Green


The module is functional but fails to communicate with a BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.


The module is functional and is communicating with a BBU or an upper-level FMUEA.


804



Indicato r

ALM

Color

Red

Status

Description

Steady off


Steady off


Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the fan assembly needs to be replaced.


An alarm is generated, and the alarm may be caused by an associated board or port fault. Therefore, you need to locate the fault before determining whether to replace the fan assembly.

OMB Fans The OMB fans enable the ventilation and heat dissipation for the cabinet. The fans consist of the inner air circulation fan and outer air circulation fan. The inner air circulation fan is installed on the top left inside the OMB, and the outer air circulation fan is installed on the bottom left outside the OMB.

Appearance l

Figure 4-217 shows the inner air circulation fan. Figure 4-217 Inner air circulation fan

l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Figure 4-218 shows the outer air circulation fan.


805



Figure 4-218 Outer air circulation fan

4.6.2 (Optional) AC Heater An AC heater ensures that the customer equipment in a cabinet works within the acceptable temperature range. It is optionally installed in the customer space in an APM30H or TMC11H.

Exterior An AC heater is 1 U high. The following figure shows the exterior of an AC heater. Figure 4-219 Exterior of an AC heater

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an AC heater. Table 4-152 Technical specifications of an AC heater

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Counter

Specification

The temperature of the AC heater starts working

< 1oC (±6oC)

The temperature of the AC heater stops working

> 15oC (±3oC)

Rated heating power

330 W


806



4.6.3 (Optional) Heating Film When the operating temperature is lower than the temperature specifications of storage batteries, the storage battery capacity declines. In this case, heating films are installed to ensure that the storage batteries work in a proper temperature range. Heating films are optional and can be configured in an IBBS200D or IBBS20D.

Exterior The following table lists the configurations of AC- and DC-powered heating films in different cabinets. Table 4-153 Configurations of heating films Illustration

Cabinet


Description

Figure 4-220

l IBBS200D (Ver.B)

2

Two AC-powered heating films are installed on the upper and lower pallets of a cabinet.

l IBBS200D (Ver.C) l IBBS200D (Ver.D) Figure 4-220

IBBS20D

1

One DC-powered heating film is installed on the pallet in the front door of a cabinet.

Figure 4-221

IBBS200D (Ver.E)

1

One AC-powered heating film is installed on the lower pallet of a cabinet.

Figure 4-220 Exterior of a heating film (1)

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


807



Figure 4-221 Exterior of a heating film (2)

A: The 220 V AC power cable for a heating film consists of a brown L wire, a blue N wire, and a green and yellow PE wire.

B: The 110 V AC power cable for a heating film consists of a black L wire, a gray N wire, and a green PE wire.

Technical Specifications The following table lists technical specifications of an AC-powered heating film. Table 4-154 Technical specifications of an AC-powered heating film Item

Specifications IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), or IBBS200D (Ver.D)

IBBS200D (Ver.E)

Dimensions

350 mm x 250 mm (13.78 in. x 9.84 in.)


Cross-sectional area of a cable

18 AWG

l In most regions: 3x1.5 mm2(0.0023 in.2) l In other regions: 3x16 AWG

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film starts working

< 1°C±6°C (33.8°F±42.8°F)

< 0°C±6°C (32°F±42.8°F)

Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film stops working

> 15°C±3°C (59°F±37.4°F)

> 15°C±3°C (59°F±37.4°F)


808



Item

Specifications IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), or IBBS200D (Ver.D)

IBBS200D (Ver.E)

Rated heating power

100 W

280 W (maximum heating power)

Rated operating voltage

220 V AC


The following table lists technical specifications of a DC-powered heating film. Table 4-155 Technical specifications of a DC-powered heating film Item

Specifications

Dimensions

195 mm x 120 mm (7.68 in. x 4.72 in.)

Cross-sectional area of a cable

22 AWG

Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film starts working

< 0°C±0.5°C (32°F±32.9°F)

Temperature range in a cabinet when the heating film stops working

> 15°C±0.5°C (59°F±32.9°F)

Rated heating power

90 W

Rated operating voltage

-48 V DC

4.6.4 TEC in the IBBS200T/IBBS300T A TEC can refrigerate the air in a cabinet to ensure that it works properly when the temperature is high. It can be used in an IBBS200T or IBBS300T.

Exterior The TECs in an IBBS200T and an IBBS300T are both located on the doors of the cabinets. They have the same exterior. The following figure shows the TEC in an IBBS200T as an example.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


809



Figure 4-222 Exterior of the TEC in an IBBS200T

(1) Outer air circulation fan

(2) Inner air circulation fan

Technical Specifications The technical specifications of a TEC in an IBBS200T or IBBS300T are as follows: l

If there is a sun shield (no impact of solar radiation) and the ambient temperature is 50°C (122°F), the TEC ensures that the temperature in the cabinet is less than or equal to 40°C (104°F) when storage batteries are in float charge and less than or equal to 45°C (113°F) when the storage batteries are in boost charge.

l

If there is no sun shield and the ambient temperature is 50°C (122°F) with solar radiation of 1120 W/m2, the TEC ensures that the temperature in the cabinet is less than or equal to 45°C (113°F) when storage batteries are in float charge and less than or equal to 50°C (122°F) when the storage batteries are in boost charge.

l

When the ambient temperature is 32°C (89.6°F) and there is no temperature difference between the air intake vent at the hot side and that at the cold side of the TEC, the following conditions must be met: –

For Ver.B, Ver.C, and Ver.D cabinets, the refrigeration power of the TEC is greater than or equal to 190 W±10% and the COP is greater than or equal to 0.5.

–

For a Ver.E cabinet, the refrigeration power of the TEC is greater than or equal to 250 W±5% and the COP is greater than or equal to 0.5.

4.6.5 TEC Cooler in an IBBS700T A IBBS700T TEC dissipates heat for the storage batteries and ensures the normal operation in high-temperature areas. It is installed in IBBS700T cabinet.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a IBBS700T TEC. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


810



Figure 4-223 Exterior of the TEC

Technical Specifications The technical specifications of a IBBS700T TEC are as follows: l

Obtains -48 V DC power from the power distribution box in the middle of the cabinet.

l

Provides the low-voltage disconnect (LVD) function. The LVD threshold is 44 V and the leakage current is less than 5 mA after the LVD.

4.6.6 HAU01A-01 An HAU01A-01 is a heater. It ensures that the components in the cabinet work in a normal temperature when the ambient temperature is lower than the operating temperature. It can be used in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A), IBBS300D, IBBS200D(Ver.E), or IBBS700D.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of the HAU01A-01.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


811



Figure 4-224 Exterior of the HAU01A-01

Panel The following figure shows the HAU01A-01 panel. Figure 4-225 HAU01A-01 panel

Port The following table describes the ports on the HAU01A-01 panel. Table 4-156 Ports on the HAU01A-01 panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

No.

Silkscree n

Item

Description

(2)

COM_IN

RS485 port for communicating with the upperlevel device

Only the RJ45 connector and RS485 signals are supported.

(3)

COM_OU T

RS485 port for communicating with the lowerlevel device

Only the RJ45 connector and RS485 signals are supported.


812



No.

Silkscree n

Item

Description

(4)

AC_IN

AC input

The 110 V AC and 220 V AC voltages are supported.

(5)

ALM_AL L

Alarm port

Monitors Boolean alarms. Boolean alarms consist of alarms related to the heater faults, including fan faults, board hardware faults, and temperature sensor faults.

(6)

TEST

Test button

Reserved

Indicator The following table describes the indicators on the HAU01A-01 panel. Table 4-157 Indicators on the HAU01A-01 panel No.

Indica tor

Color

Status

Description

(1)

RUN

Green




The board is functional but fails to communicate with the upper-level device. If the board has not communicated with the upper-level device for more than one minute, this situation is regarded as a communication failure.

Steady on


Steady off

The board is not powered on.

Steady off


Steady on

An alarm is generated, and the heater needs to be replaced.

(7)

ALM

Red

4.6.7 Outer Air Circulation Assembly The outer air circulation assembly includes a heat exchanger core and a fan. The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. The fan dissipates heat from the cabinet. Outer air circulation assembly can be used in APM30H. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


813



Exterior The outer air circulation assembly is installed in the door of the APM30H. The following figure shows the exterior of the outer air circulation assembly. Figure 4-226 Exterior of the outer air circulation assembly

(1) Heat exchanger core

(2) Fan

4.6.8 Inner Air Circulation Fan The inner air circulation fan promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. Inner air circulation fan can be used in IBBS700T. The inner air circulation fan is installed in the upper part of the cabinet door. The following figure shows the exterior of the inner air circulation fan.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


814



Figure 4-227 Exterior of the inner air circulation fan

4.6.9 Outer Air Circulation Fan The outer air circulation fan promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. Outer air circulation fan can be used in IBBS700T. The outer air circulation fan is installed in the lower part of the cabinet door. The following figure shows the exterior of the outer air circulation fan.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


815



Figure 4-228 Exterior of the outer air circulation fan

4.6.10 Fan Mounting Frame The fan mounting frame contains a fan, which accelerates the inner and outer air circulation of the cabinet to ensure that the cabinet works within an acceptable temperature range. This allows the batteries to work properly. A fan mounting frame can be installed in an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), IBBS300D (Ver.A), IBBS20D, or IBBS700D.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS200D (Ver.B).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


816



Figure 4-229 Exterior of a fan mounting frame

(1) Fan

(2) CMUA

The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS200D (Ver.C). Figure 4-230 Exterior of a fan mounting frame

(1) Fan

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(2) CMUE


817



Fan mounting frames in an IBBS200D (Ver.D), an IBBS200D (Ver.E), and an IBBS300D (Ver.A) have the same exteriors. The following figure shows an IBBS200D (Ver.D) as an example. Figure 4-231 Exterior of a fan mounting frame

The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS20D. Figure 4-232 Exterior of a fan mounting frame

The following figure shows the exterior of a fan mounting frame in an IBBS700D. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


818



Figure 4-233 Exterior of a fan mounting frame

Function A fan mounting frame performs the following functions: l

The fan promotes the inner and outer air circulation of the cabinet to ensure that the cabinet work within an acceptable temperature range. This allows the batteries to work properly.

l

The monitoring board installed in a fan mounting frame in an IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), IBBS200D (Ver.D), or IBBS300D (Ver.A) collects the alarm signals from the door status sensor, storage battery temperature sensor, fans, and smoke sensor in the cabinet, and reports these alarm signals to the PMU through an RS485 signal cable.

Signal Cable Delivered with a Fan Exterior An IBBS200D (Ver.B), an IBBS200D (Ver.C), an IBBS200D (Ver.D), and an IBBS300D (Ver.A) have signal cables delivered with them. The following figure shows the exterior of such a signal cable. Figure 4-234 Exterior of a signal cable delivered with a fan

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


819



NOTE

The signal cable delivered with a fan feeds power into the fan and transmits signals to a monitoring board.

Description The following table describes a signal cable delivered with the fan. Table 4-158 Description Cable

A End

Color

Description

W1

A.1

Red

Connects to the positive pole of the power supply.

W2

A.2

Yello w

Imports PWM speed-adjusting signals.

W3

A.3

Blue

Exports alarm or speed signals.

W4

A.4

Black

Connects to the negative pole of the power supply.

NOTE

The color of the signal cable delivered with a fan depends on the manufacturer.

4.6.11 Heat Exchanger Core The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air circulation, and therefore accelerates air exchanges. In this way, it lowers the operating temperature in the cabinet and protects the cabinet from dust. Heat Exchanger Core can be used in APM30H (Ver.B). The heat exchanger core is installed in the door of the APM30H. The following figure shows the exterior of the heat exchanger core. Figure 4-235 Exterior of the heat exchanger core

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


820



4.7 Environment Monitoring Device This section describes environment monitoring devices and types of cabinets supported by the environment monitoring devices.

4.7.1 Door Status Sensor The door status sensor can monitor the status (open or closed) of a door. It can be used in any of the following cabinets: BTS3900AL (Ver.A), OMB, OMB (Ver.C), APM30H, RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS20D, IBBS700D, and IBBS700T.

Exterior A door status sensor consists of a magnet and a switch. The following figures show the exteriors of the magnet of a door status sensor. Figure 4-236 Exterior of the magnet of a door status sensor

(1) Shell of the magnet

(2) Magnet

The following figure shows the exterior of the switch of a door status sensor.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


821



Figure 4-237 Exterior of the switch of a door status sensor

Installation Positions The door status sensors in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A), IBBS700D, and IBBS700T are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) as an example. Figure 4-238 Position of the door status sensor in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

The door status sensors in the OMB and OMB (Ver.C) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the OMB (Ver.C) as an example. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


822



Figure 4-239 Position of the door status sensor in the OMB (Ver.C) cabinet

The door status sensors in the APM30H, RFC, TMC11H, IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS20D, IBBS300D, and IBBS300T, are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the APM30H (Ver.D) as an example. Figure 4-240 Position of the door status sensor in the APM30H (Ver.D) cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


823



4.7.2 Temperature Sensor A temperature sensor can monitor the temperature. It can be used in any of the following cabinets: BTS3900AL (Ver.A), RFC, IBBS200T, IBBS200D, IBBS300T, IBBS300D, OMB (Ver.C), IBBS700T, IBBS700D, and IMS06.

Exterior In the following figure, illustration 1 shows the exterior of the temperature sensor in an IMS06 and illustration 2 shows the exterior of the temperature sensor in other cabinets. Figure 4-241 Exteriors of temperature sensors

(1) 2-pin connector

(2) Temperature sensor

(3) OT terminal (M6)

(4) 4-pin connector

Installation Positions The following figure shows the temperature sensor in a BTS3900AL (Ver.A).

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


824



Figure 4-242 Position of the temperature sensor in the BTS3900AL (Ver.A) cabinet

The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS700D.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


825



Figure 4-243 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS700D

The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS700T.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


826



Figure 4-244 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS700T

The door status sensors in the RFC (Ver.B), RFC (Ver.C), and RFC (Ver.D) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows the RFC (Ver.D) as an example. Figure 4-245 Position of the temperature sensor in the RFC (Ver.D) cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


827



The temperature sensors in the IBBS200T (Ver.B), IBBS200T (Ver.C), and IBBS200T (Ver.D) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows an IBBS200T (Ver.D) as an example. Figure 4-246 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS200T (Ver.D)

The temperature sensors in the IBBS200D (Ver.B), IBBS200D (Ver.C), and IBBS200D (Ver.D) are located in the same positions. The following figure shows an IBBS200D (Ver.D) as an example.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


828



Figure 4-247 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS200D (Ver.D)

The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS300T (Ver.A). Figure 4-248 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS300T (Ver.A)

The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an IBBS300D (Ver.A). Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


829



Figure 4-249 Position of the temperature sensor in the IBBS300D (Ver.A)

The following figure shows the temperature sensor in an OMB (Ver.C). Figure 4-250 Position of the temperature sensor in the OMB (Ver.C)

NOTE

For cables of the temperature sensor in an OMB, see Monitoring Signal Cable for the OMB Fan Assembly.

The following figure shows the position of the temperature sensor in an IMS06. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


830



Figure 4-251 Position of the temperature sensor in the IMS06

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a temperature sensor. Table 4-159 Technical specifications of a temperature sensor Item

Specifications

Operating voltage

3.0 V DC to 5.5 V DC

Temperature measurement range

-55°C to +125°C (-67°F to 257°F)

Temperature measurement error

±2°C (±35.6°F)

4.7.3 (Optional) EMU The environment monitoring unit (EMU) monitors environment of the equipment room. It can be used in BTS3900 and BTS3900L. The EMU monitors environment of the equipment room through the connection between the signal cable and the main equipment. The EMU performs the following functions: l

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Provides detection ports for the temperature sensor, humidity sensor, smoke sensor, water sensor, infrared alarm sensor, and door status sensor, as well as the extended Boolean value, analog values, and output control value. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

831


l


Provides communication ports RS485 and RS232 connecting to the base station.

For details about the structure and functions of the EMU, see EMU User Guide.

4.7.4 (Optional) EMUA/EMUB An environment monitoring unit type A/B (EMUA/EMUB) monitors the environment in a cabinet and processes alarms. It can be used in BTS3900AL(Ver.A), APM30H and TMC11H. An EMUA/EMUB is connected to the main equipment by using a monitoring signal cable. Through the connection, the EMUA/EMUB monitors the environment of the equipment room and cabinet. An EMUA/EMUB monitors the following: l

Environment, including the temperature, humidity, water, and smoke

l

Insertion (by using infrared and door status sensors)

l

Boolean signal monitoring

For detailed structure and functions of the EMUA, see EMUA User Guide. For detailed structure and functions of the EMUB, see EMUB User Guide.

4.8 Other Devices This section describes other devices besides power equipment, monitoring devices, surge protection devices, and temperature control devices, and environment monitoring devices, and types of cabinets supported by the other devices.

4.8.1 (Optional) GATM A GSM antenna and TMA control module (GATM) controls the RET antenna, feeds power to the TMA, reports alarms about control signals of the RET antenna, and monitors the feeding current. A GATM is installed along with the DRFU.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a GATM. Figure 4-252 Exterior of a GATM

Port The following table describes the ports and socket on a GATM.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


832



Table 4-160 Ports and socket on a GATM Silkscreen

Connector

Description

ANT0 to ANT5

SMA female connector

Feeds power into the TMA and transmits RET control signals.

COM1

RJ45 connector

Connects the GATM to the BBU.

COM2

RJ45 connector

Provides an extended RS485 port to be cascaded with other devices.

-48 V

3V3 connector

Receives -48 V power

Indicator The following table describes the indicators on a GATM. Table 4-161 Indicators on a GATM Indicator

Color

State

Meaning

RUN

Green


The power input is normal but the communication with the BBU is abnormal.


The GATM is functional properly and communicates with the BBU properly.

Off

There is no power supply or the module is faulty.

On

The AISG link is normal.

Off

The AISG link is abnormal.

Irregularly fast blinking

There is transmission on the AISG link.

On

An overcurrent alarm about the module is generated.

Off

The module is working properly.

ACT

ALM

Green

Red

4.8.2 (Optional) WGRU A WCDMA GPS receiving unit (WGRU) receives and processes the positioning information and clock synchronization signals to provide clock reference for the base station. The clock signals along with the positioning information can be converted into PPS signals and A-GPS positioning information. The WGRU is optional. It is installed in a dedicated case. Each base station can be configured with one WGRU. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


833



Exterior Figure 4-253shows the exterior of a WGRU. Figure 4-254shows the exterior of a WGRU case. Figure 4-253 Exterior of a WGRU

Figure 4-254 Exterior of a WGRU case

Panel There are indicators, a reset button, and ports on the front panel of the WGRU, as shown in Figure 4-255. There is a power input socket and a GPS signal input port on the rear panel of the WGRU, as shown in Figure 4-256.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


834



Figure 4-255 Front panel of a WGRU

Figure 4-256 Rear panel of a WGRU

(1) Grounding bolt

Ports The following table describes the ports on the front panel of the WGRU. Table 4-162 Ports on the panel of the WGRU Location

Silkscreen

Connector

Description

Front panel

PPS1

RJ45 connector

Transmits PPS signals.

PPS2

RJ45 connector

Reserved.

COM1

RJ45 connector

Forwards GPS information and BBU interaction, management, and maintenance information.

COM2

RJ45 connector

Reserved.

POWER

Two-hole male connector

Connects to the external power equipment.

ANT

Type N female connector

Connects to the GPS antenna system.

CLK1 CLK2 Rear panel

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


835



Indicators The following table describes the indicators. Table 4-163 Indicators on the front panel of the WGRU Indicator

Color

State

Meaning

RUN

Green


The WGRU is running properly.

Steady on

There is power supply, but the WGRU is faulty.

Steady off

There is no power supply, or the WGRU is faulty.

Steady off


Steady on

An alarm is reported, indicating a fault during the operation.

Steady on

The WGRU has resolved the positioning information.

Steady off

The WGRU fails to resolve the positioning information.

ALM

ACT

Red

Green

4.8.3 ELU An electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting. It applies to the following cabinets: BTS3900, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, OMB, OMB (Ver.C), IBC10,APM30H series cabinets, IBBS200D series cabinets, IBBS200T series cabinets, IBBS300D, IBBS300T, IBBS20D, IBBS700D, and IBBS700T.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ELU.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


836



Figure 4-257 Exterior of an ELU

(1) Housing

(2) RJ45 port

NOTE

The ELU in a BTS3900 or BTS3900L cabinet does not have a housing.

Installation Positions The following figure shows the position of an ELU in a cabinet. Figure 4-258 Position of the ELU in a BTS3900 cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


837



Figure 4-259 Position of the ELU in a BTS3900L cabinet

The ELU in an APM30H, TMC11H, or RFC is located on the inner right wall of the cabinet. The ELU in an IBBS200D, IBBS200T, IBBS300D, or IBBS300T is located on the inner left wall of the cabinet. The following figure shows an APM30H and an IBBS200D as examples. Figure 4-260 Positions of the ELUs in an APM30H and an IBBS200D

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


838



Figure 4-261 Position of the ELU in an OMB

Figure 4-262 Position of the ELU in a BTS3900AL cabinet

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


839



Figure 4-263 Position of the ELU in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T cabinet

NOTE

l In the IBBS700D, the ELU is located above a CCU when a CCU is installed in the cabinet or on the right of the CMUEA when no CCU is installed in the cabinet. l In the IBBS700T, the ELU is located above a CCU when a CCU is installed in the cabinet or on the left of the CMUF when no CCU is installed in the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


840



Figure 4-264 Position of the ELU in an IBC10

Figure 4-265 Position of the ELU in an IBBS20D

4.8.4 (Optional) SOU A service outlet unit (SOU) transfers AC power to the customer equipment. An SOU is optionally installed in the customer space in an APM30H. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


841



Exterior An SOU is 1 U high. The following figure shows the exterior of an SOU. Figure 4-266 Exterior of an SOU

(1) Input power port

(2) Breaker

(3) Socket (European standard)

An SOU applies to the four types of sockets meeting the following standards: North American standard, European standard, Universal standard, and British standard. The following figure shows the exteriors of the four types of sockets. Figure 4-267 Exteriors of different types of sockets

(1) North American standard

(2) European standard

(3) Universal standard

(4) British standard

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an SOU. Table 4-164 Technical specifications of an SOU

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Counter

Specification


482.6 mm x 91 mm x 55 mm (7.87 in. x 23.62 in. x 17.09 in.)

Weight

1.5 kg (3.31 lb)

Input voltage range


Maximum input current

10 A


842



Counter

Specification

Output voltage range


Maximum output current

10 A

Frequency band

50 Hz or 60 Hz


-40oC to +55oC

Altitude

≤ 4000m NOTE Above the altitude of 3000 m (9842.52 ft), the maximum operating temperature drops by 1oC (33.8oF) as the altitude increases by 100 m (328.08 ft).

Protection class

IP20

4.8.5 (Optional) DDF A digital distribution frame (DDF) connects the trunk cables between communication devices and transmission equipment and also connects the communication devices and external alarm cables. A DDF is optionally installed in the customer space of the BTS3900AL, APM30H, and TMC11H cabinets.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of a DDF. Figure 4-268 Exterior of a DDF

(1) Alarm module

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

(2) Digital distribution module

(3) Wall mounting bracket


(4) Baffle plate

843



Function A DDF performs the following functions: l

Supports the installation in a 19 inches rack and on a wall, and provides attachments for the installation.

l

Supports the transfer of eight E1 cables and 16 alarm cables.

l

Supports cabling from the front to facilitate the maintenance.

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of a DDF. Table 4-165 Technical specifications of a DDF Counter

Specification



Weight

1 kg (2.20 lb)

Working frequency

2 Mbit/s

Characteristic impedance

120 ohm

Inter-wire-bundle cross noise prevention class

≥ 60 dB

Insertion loss

≤ 0.4 dB

Return loss

≥ 18 dB

4.8.6 (Optional) Filler Module A filler module is a standard plastic component, which prevents heat reflux in the empty space below the BBU and improves the heat dissipation in the cabinet. Filler modules can be installed in the customer space of an APM30H(Ver.B), APM30H(Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), TMC11H(Ver.C), BTS3012AE(Ver.D_Z).

Exterior A filler module is 1 U high. The following figure shows the exterior of a filler module. Figure 4-269 Exterior of a filler module

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


844



Function A filler module is installed in the customer space below the BBU to prevent heat reflux in the empty space below the BBU. NOTE

In an APM30H, TMC11H, BTS3012AE(Ver.D_Z)the filler module is configured in the customer space by default. Before installing other modules, first remove the filler module. For details about removing a filler module, see chapter "Installing Optional Modules and Cables" in the "Installation Guide".

4.8.7 ODM06D The outdoor distribution module DC 6 (ODM06D) is a power distribution box with the surge protection function. It supplies power to and provides surge protection for outdoor RRUs.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an ODM06D. Figure 4-270 Exterior of an ODM06D

Functions The ODM06D performs the following functions: l

Provides surge protection for outdoor RRUs.

l

Provides one or two power inputs and six power outputs.

l

Supports a maximum of 100 A input current.

l

Reports the surge protection failure alarm.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


845



Structure The following figure shows the structure of an ODM06D. Figure 4-271 Structure of an ODM06D

(1) Protective plate

(2) Cover

(3) Cable connector making label

(4) Circuit breaker

(5) Surge protector

(6) Cord end terminal bar

(7) Cable clip

-

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an ODM06D. Table 4-166 Technical specifications of an ODM06D Item

Specifications


369 mm x 278.5 mm x 98.5 mm (14.53 in. x 10.96 in. x 3.88 in.)

Weight

4.0 kg (8.82 lb)

4.8.8 OFD06 The outdoor fiber distribution 6 (OFD06) distributes trunk fiber optic cables on the RRU side. The OFD06 can be installed flexibly. For example, it can be installed on an outdoor wall, pole, or tower.

Exterior The following figure shows the exterior of an OFD06. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


846



Figure 4-272 Exterior of an OFD06

Port The following figure shows the ports and interior of an OFD06 Figure 4-273 Ports and interior of an OFD06

(1) Box

(2) Fiber optic cable distribution and storage area

(3) Fiber optic cable routed-in area

(4) Trunk fiber optic cable (connected to the indoor fiber distribution)

(5) Outdoor optical jumper (connected to RRUs)

Technical Specifications The following table lists the technical specifications of an OFD06. Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


847



Table 4-167 Technical specifications of an OFD06

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)

Item

Specifications


270 mm x 278 mm x 100 mm (10.63in. x 10.94 in. x 3.94 in.)

Weight

2.5 kg (5.51 lb)

Input (core)

1 x 12 core

Output (core)

6 x 2 core (6 RRUs)


848


5 Cable Description

5

Cable Description

For cable description in 3900 series base stations, see 3900 Series Base Station Cables. 3900 Series Base Station Cables describes the cable list, cable connections, and cable functions.

Issue 02 (2015-12-30)


849

3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description(02)(PDF)-En

Recommend Documents